Home

QNX® Neutrino® RTOS:User's Guide

1. The QNX Neutrino DOS filesystem silently converts FAT 8 3 filenames to uppercase to give the illusion that lowercase is allowed but it doesn t preserve the case For more information on the DOS filesystem manager see fs dos so in the Utilities Reference and Filesystems in the System Architecture guide Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 161 Working with Filesystems CD ROM filesystem QNX Neutrino s CD ROM filesystem provides transparent access to CD ROM media so you can treat CD ROM filesystems as though they were POSIX filesystems This transparency lets processes operate on CD ROM files without any special knowledge or work on their part The s cd so shared object provides filesystem support for the ISO 9660 standard as well as a number of extensions including Rock Ridge RRIP Joliet Microsoft and multisession Kodak Photo CD enhanced audio This shared object is automatically loaded by the devb drivers when mounting an ISO 9660 filesystem The CD ROM filesystem accepts any characters that it sees in a filename it s read only so it s up to whatever prepares the CD image to impose appropriate restrictions Strict adherence to ISO 9660 allows only 0 9A Z_ but Joliet and Rockridge are far more lenient For information about burning CDs see Backing Up and Recovering Data p 277 We ve deprecated fs cd so in favor of s udf so which now supports ISO 9660 filesystems
2. Filters p 212 Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 219 Printing Printing with spooler QNX Neutrino provides the spooler utility as an alternative printing mechanism to the standard UNIX like 1p family Setting up spooler The spooler utility manages one printer but you can run more than one instance of it When you start spooler e t sets up an entry for the printer in the dev pathname space dev printers printer_name spool e Next spooler queries the printer to determine its type constructs a properties file for the specific printer from the system s general printer configuration files see below and stores the file in the printer s directory under dev e Then spooler creates a spooling directory var spool printers printer_name host e Next spooler stores the printer properties file in the spooling directory If you have a file that s already in a form that the printer understands or for which there s a filter you can print it by copying it into the raw spooling directory cp my_file dev printers printer_name raw When the spooler sees the print job in dev printers printer_nam raw it copies the job file to the spooling directory var spool printers printer_name host and invokes the appropriate filter which prepares the file and then sends it to the printer 220 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Printing with spooler Application E dev printers
3. 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited The unique identifier representing a process A PID is a positive integer The system may reuse a process ID after the process dies provided no existing process group has the same ID Only the Process Manager can have a process ID of 1 pty Pseudo TTY a character based device that has two ends a master end and a slave end Data written to the master end shows up on the slave end and vice versa You typically use these devices when a program requires a terminal for standard input and output and one doesn t exist for example as with sockets Qnet The native network manager in the QNX Neutrino RTOS QoS Quality of Service a policy e 8 loadbalance used to connect nodes in a network in order to ensure highly dependable transmission QoS is an issue that often arises in high availability HA networks as well as realtime control systems ass QNX Software Systems quoting A method of forcing a shell s special characters to be treated as simple characters instead of being interpreted in a special way by the shell For example less my file name escapes the special meaning of the spaces in a filename RAM Random Access Memory a memory technology characterized by the ability to read and write any location in the device without limitation Contrast flash EPROM and EEPROM raw mode In raw input mode the character device library performs no editing on received charac
4. If the mount fails the first portion of the QNX 4 partition is probably damaged since the driver will refuse to mount what it considers to be a corrupted filesystem In this case you can use the dinit utility to overlay enough good information onto the disk to satisfy the driver dinit hr dev hd0t79 The r option tells dinit to rewrite e the root block e the bitmap with all blocks allocated e the constant portions of the root directory You should now be able to reissue the mount command and once again try to create a mountpoint for a QNX 4 filesystem called hd After doing this you ll need to rebuild the bitmap with chkfsys even on a good partition At least a portion of your QNX 4 filesystem should now be accessible You can use chkfsys to examine the filesystem and recover as much data as possible If the hard disk is mounted as hd e g the machine boots from CD enter path_on_CD chkfsys hd If the hard disk is mounted as e g a network boot enter network_path chkfsys In either case e f possible you should run chkfsys from somewhere other than the filesystem that you re trying to recover e Make note of any problems reported and allow chkfsys to fix as much as it can What you do next depends on the result of running chkfsys 304 Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited What to do if your system will no longer boot If the disk is unrecoverable If for any reason your disk is
5. SPROMPTS ESSOR_ARCHITE ENTIFIE QNX Neutrino equivalent Run the date utility S date see Parameters in the documentation for ksh QNX Neutrino doesn t use drive letters see SHOMEPATHS Run the uname utility uname QNX Neutrino treats file extensions as part of the filename Executable status is a file permission See chmod Run the uname utility uname p Run the uname utility uname n PS1 PS2 see Parameters in the documentation for ksh and kshrc in the Examples appendix SRANDOM RANDOM QNX Neutrino doesn t use drive letters the system root is always SYSTEMROOTS The system root is always neon Run the date utility date Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Here are some common problems you might encounter while working on the command line Why can t run my program called test The shell has a builtin command called test When the shell parses the command line it matches any builtin commands before it looks for executable files You have two choices rename your program or specify the path to it e g test Why do I get a not found message when I try to run my program The program is likely in a directory that isn t listed in your PATH In particular your current directory isn t in your PATH for secur
6. The lprc program gives the root user local control over printer activity Here are the program s major commands and their intended uses see the Utilities Reference entry for the command format and full list of commands start Enable printing and ask 1pd to start printing jobs abort Terminate an active spooling daemon on the local host immediately and then disable printing preventing new daemons from being started by lpr You typically use the abort command to forcibly restart a hung printer Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 207 Printing Spooling directories 208 daemon e g when 1prq reports that a daemon is present but nothing is happening The abort command doesn t remove any jobs from the spool queue for this use lprrm enable and disable Turn spooling in the local queue on or off in order to allow or prevent 1pr from putting new jobs in the spool queue For example you may want to use the disable command when testing new printer filters because this lets root print but prevents anyone else from doing so The other main use of this option is to prevent users from putting jobs in the queue when the printer is expected to be unavailable for a long time restart stop topq Allow ordinary users to restart printer daemons when lprq reports that no daemon is present Halt a spooling daemon after the current job is completed this also disables printing This is a clean way to shut a p
7. The specification for Central European time is Central Europe Time 2 00 e Central European Time is 2 hours later than Coordinated Universal Time UTC e Daylight saving time doesn t apply in this locale Japanese time The specification for Japanese time is ds T 9 e Japanese Standard Time is 9 hours earlier than Coordinated Universal Time UTC e Daylight saving time doesn t apply in this locale Programming with time zones Inside a program you can set the TZ environment variable by calling setenv or putenv For example setenv TZ PSTO8PDTO7 M3 2 0 2 M11 1 0 2 1 putenv TZ PSTO8PDT07 M3 2 0 2 M11 1 0 2 To obtain the value of the variable use the getenv function char tzvalue 128 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Setting the time zone tzvalue getenv TZ You can get the value of _CS_TIMEZONE by calling confstr like this confstr _CS_TIMEZONE buff BUFF_SIZE or set it like this confstr _CS_SET _CS_TIMEZONE JST 9 0 The tzset function gets the current value of TZ or _CS_TIMEZONE if TZ isn t set and sets the following global variables daylight Indicates if daylight saving time is supported in the locale timezone The number of seconds of time difference between the local time zone and Coordinated Universal Time UTC tzname A vector of two pointers to character strings co
8. You should take special note of the Packets Transmitted OK and Packets Received OK counters If they re zero the driver might not be working or the network might not be connected Verify that the driver has correctly auto detected the Current Operation Rate How do get diagnostic information You can find diagnostic information in proc qnetstats If this file doesn t exist Qnet isn t running The gnetstats file contains a lot of diagnostic information that s meaningful to a Qnet developer but not to you However you can use grep to extract certain fields cat proc qnetstats grep compiled Qnet compiled on Jun 3 2008 at 14 08 23 running on EAdd3528 Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 185 Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing or cat proc qnetstats grep e ok e bad 30 txd ok txd bad 0 rxd ok 2027 rxd bad dr 0 rxd bad L4 0 If you need help getting Qnet running our Technical Support department might ask you for this information Is the hostname unique Use the hostname command to see the hostname This hostname must be unique for Qnet to work Are the nodes in the same domain If the nodes aren t in the same domain you have to specify the domain For example ls net kenneth qnx com 186 Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Chapter 11 TCP IP Networking The term TCP IP implies two distinct protocols TCP and IP Since these protocols have bee
9. xblk_xtnts 59 xblk_signature lamXbik first xblk xblk_first_xtnt Figure 12 An extent block Each extent block contains forward backward pointers a count of extents only a count of all the blocks in all the extents defined by this extent block pointers and block counts for each extent a signature IamXb1k The first extent block also contains a redundant pointer to the first file extent also described within the directory inode entry This lets you recover all data in the file by locating this block alone Files or file extents are groupings of blocks described by directory inode entries they have no structure imposed on them by the QNX 4 filesystem Most files in QNX Neutrino have the following overall structure Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Root Signatures y LY QNX in dot entry of SS dir 55 each directory 5 S S SS lamXblk in header of y each extent block f S TB dir file s SS SS Extent blocks 0 2 3 leo e Y Y y Extent Extent 2 Extent 3 Extent n Figure 13 QNX 4 file structure Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited QNX 4 disk structure 295 Backing Up and Recovering Data File maintenance utilities If a crash occurs you can use the followi
10. 3 n p pattern y n 00 logfile t tag T tagsfile cmd file You can combine multiple options that don t take an argument The aBcCdeEf imMn NqQrsSuUw notation is shorthand for a B c C d and soon If an argument to a command starts with a hyphen you can signal the end of the options by using a double hyphen ls 1 my_file For more information see Utility Conventions in the Utilities Reference Displaying online usage messages You can look up detailed usage descriptions or you can display brief summaries of the syntax and options of commands and utilities If you want a detailed description of a utility see the Utilities Reference But if you just want a quick reminder of the syntax and options you can display the utility s online usage message by invoking the use command it s similar to man in UNIX and Linux For example to display the message for more type use More If you request usage for a command and the command either doesn t have an executable in the current path or doesn t contain usage message records use displays an error message For more information see use in the Utilities Reference or simply type use use Executing commands on another node or tty 68 If the machines on your network are running Qnet see Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing you can execute commands on another machine This is known as remote execution For example on n n
11. The PATH environment variable specifies the search paths for commands while LD LIBRARY PATH specifies the search paths for shared libraries for the linker The initial default values of PATH and LD_LIBRARY_PATH are specified in the buildfile before procnto is started Two configuration strings see Configuration strings p 122 below _CS_PATH and _CS_LIBPATH take the default values of PATH and LD_LIBRARY_PATH The login utility uses _CS_PATH to set the value of PATH and passes this environment variable and both configuration strings to its child processes If you type set or env in a shell that was started from login you ll see the PATH variable but not LD_LIBRARY_PATH _CS_LIBPATH works in the same manner as LD_LIBRARY_PATH You can use the etc default login file to indicate which environment variables you want login to preserve You can edit this file to add new variables such as LD_LIBRARY_PATH but you can t change existing variables such as PATH and TERM If you use ksh as your login shell you can edit etc profile and SHOME profile to override existing variables and add new ones Any environment variables set in Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Environment variables etc profile override previous settings in etc default login and SHOME profile overrides both etc default login and etc profile For more information on configuration strings see Configuration strings p 122 bel
12. When backing up your data you need to decide whether to back up each file and directory separately or in an archive with a collection of other files You also need to decide whether or not to compress your data to reduce the storage requirements for your backups The time lost to compression and decompression may be offset to a degree by the reduced time it takes to write or read the compressed data to media or to transfer it through a network To reduce the expense of compression you may choose to compress the backup copies of your data as a background task after the data has been copied possibly days or weeks after to reduce the storage requirements of older backups while keeping newer backups as accessible as possible You should back up often enough so that you can recover data that s still current or can be made current with minimal work In a software development group this may range from a day to a week Each day of out of date backup will generally cost you a day of redevelopment If you re saving financial or point of sale data then daily or even twice daily backups are common It s a good idea to maintain off site storage Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Archiving your data Archiving your data You can store backups of each of your files separately or you can store them in an archive with other files that you re backing up Files stored in an archive can be more readily identified as belonging to a
13. rm nodel rp 1pt1 sd usr spool output lptl1 lp IptE2 x rm nodel rp 1pt2 sd usr spool output lpt2 1p This specifies the two printers we just located on node1 with the names to be used on node2 Make sure there s an entry for nodel in etc hosts Local and remote printers What if we now want to move one of the two printers say 1pt 2 from node1 to node2 i i dev par1 dev par1 TCP IP A gt node1 node2 We have to change the etc printcap file on both nodes Likewise we need to change etc printcap on any other network nodes we wished to print from e On nodel ptl lp dev par1 sd usr spool output lpt1 lpt2 rm node2 rp lpt2 sd usr spool output lpt2 216 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Printing with lpr e Onnode2 ptis rm node1 rp lpt1 sd usr spool output lpt1 ipt2 1p dev parl sd usr spool output lpt2 e On other nodes ipti rm nodel rp 1pt1 sd usr spool output lpt1 Ipt2 rm node2 rp 1pt2 sd usr spool output lpt2 Make sure you have entries for nodel and node2 in the etc hosts file on each node You also need entries in the etc hosts 1pd file on nodel and node2 for each node that you want to be able to use the printers If you ve set up your remote printing network according to the examples given you should
14. 4096 Maximum filesystem size 64 GB For NAND flash some additional limitations apply e Single level cell SLC and multi level cell MLC NAND flash are supported MLC NAND requires hardware error correction code ECC e The maximum filesystem size is 4 GB This is a practical limit not an actual one When the ETFS driver starts it scans the entire part recreating its own representation of the data the larger the part the longer this takes e ECC protection of the spare area is supported only on 2 KB and 4 KB page NAND e The software ECC supports only 1 bit error correction for each 256 byte buffer e Only NAND flash with page sizes of 512 2048 and 4096 bytes are supported For ETFS on NAND you can perform 1 bit software error correction coding ECC for the data in the spare area Support configurations are available for e 2 KB page NAND flash devices e 4 KB page NAND flash devices Once calculated the spare area receives the ECC value from devio_postcluster Ta and then writes it to NAND flash To determine the appropriately sized ECC value use the following e For512 NAND it s not available e For 2048 NAND use 64 byte ECC e For 4096 NAND use 128 byte ECC Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 339 Understanding System Limits To take advantage of the spare area you ll need to make the following changes for BSPs e For devio_readtrans and devio_readcluster When reading the spare
15. 44 45 adding 44 45 assigning 42 login 34 41 user 34 42 assigning 42 root 34 IEEE 1003 1e and 1003 2c drafts withdrawn 100 ifconfig 20 191 ifs file extension 104 image filesystems 104 images 86 148 164 filesystem 164 creating 164 OS 86 148 creating 148 img file extension 104 include directory 95 inetd 91 193 inetd conf 91 193 inflator 172 info 95 104 directory 95 387 Index info continued file extension 104 GNU utility 104 infocmp 51 130 information nodes See inodes Initial Program Loader See IPL inodes 86 152 291 293 321 322 entries 152 293 pregrowing 321 input 51 62 modes 51 redirecting standard 62 Ins key 52 insert mode 52 instrumented kernel 104 316 Integrated Development Environment See IDE integrity ensuring on entire disk system 299 interactive mode 355 interface controllers 201 information displaying 201 internal modems 264 international characters 84 filenames 84 Internet 91 193 194 boot protocol daemon 194 daemons 193 domain names 194 daemon 194 super server 91 193 Interrupt Request line See IRQ io audio 241 io blk so 232 240 320 324 328 cache size 232 320 328 fine tuning 320 number of vnodes 320 328 RAM disks 240 io hid 248 io net 87 io pkt 87 165 167 179 181 184 191 195 197 199 210 249 254 CIFS 165 NFS 167 printing with 210 Qnet 184 shim layer for supporting legacy drivers 199 starting 181 io usb 247 iofunc_lock_calloc 342 I
16. Executing commands on another node or tty ooccoccccocccncncocnconnnnnncnanenancnnnnnannncnnnonos 68 PALOS EI T AAA SAA AAA A A ALA AEE 69 Basi COMMANGS rd nta tdt Dar A 70 QNX Neutrino for MS DOS users cccccccncccnnoncnncnnnnononcncnnnononcnnnononcnnnnnnannnnnnnonnrnnnrnnnarannonnaness 71 DOS commands and their QNX Neutrino equivalents cccccceceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeees 71 MS DOS local command interpreter variables occccocncccncocnnonnnonncnnncnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 73 Troubleshooting ina A tn a iaa 75 Chapter 5 Working with Files c ccccsccsseeseeeeeeeaeeeaneeanesaaesaaeseaeeseeeseeeaeesaea sae seanesanesaansagessaesgas 77 NM A O aed day aha cede tiv ae E aa ae waned ia ie 78 Filenames and pathname cccccccccecccscecseeceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee esse esse esse eeseeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeneees 80 Absolute and relative pathname ccccceccceeecceceeecee eee eeseeeseeeseeesaeeeeeeeeeeeneeseseenaes 80 Dot anid dot dot directores ra iaa dad a 81 No drive letters comicios ia dra a AR SANAE TRE SRA IAKA 82 Pathnames that begin witha dotar is 82 EXLENSIONS sec O 82 Pathname Space MAPPING oocccccccccccnccconncnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonanenanenaninannnanes 83 Filename rules ias taa T ainda 83 Where everything iS stored oocccocccoccnoccnonncnocononnnnnnonnnonnnoncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnonnnnnannnnrnnannnnnnnoss 85 O A 85 DM A IA Manus Ds daa 86 IDOOL voaa rE EE AEE 0 A E E speed
17. For example to set the speed of the modem on dev ser1 to 57600 56K modems use this speed type stty baud 57600 lt dev serl 3 Type qtalk m device where device is the name of the serial port e g dev ser1 4 Type at The modem should reply OK For more information see the entry for qtalk in the Utilities Reference Troubleshooting modems 266 If you followed the instructions above but the modem doesn t reply OK check the following e Make sure your baud rate settings are correct e Is the modem plugged in e Is the modem a software modem QNX Neutrino doesn t support Win modems or HSP Host Signal Processor modems otherwise known as soft modems QNX Neutrino works with PnP modems but you must specify in the BIOS that you aren t running a PnP aware OS e Does the modem conflict with another device at the same I O port and IRQ If the modem is an internal ISA modem you may need to reserve an I O port range and IRQ in the BIOS so that the PCI doesn t use it e Have you disabled the comm port in the BIOS if you re using the same I O port and IRQ of acomm port This applies only to internal modems Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Chapter 14 Setting Up an Embedded Web Server QNX Neutrino ships with Slinger a very small web server optimized for embedded applications Since it supports Common Gateway Interface CGI 1 1 HTTP 1 1 and dynamic HTML via SSI commands it lets you easily
18. Other filters Used to convert files from one form to another For example va varian Benson Varian 1p dev va0 sd usr spool vad of usr lib vp X tf usr lib rvcat mx 2000 p1 58 px 2112 py 1700 tr f The t entry specifies usr 1ib rvcat as the filter to use when printing troff output This filter is needed to set the device into print mode for text and into plot mode for printing troff files and raster images Note that the page length is set to 58 lines by the p1 entry for 8 5 by 11 fanfold paper To enable accounting add an af filter to the varian entry like this va varian Benson Varian lp dev va0 sd usr spool vad of usr lib vpf if usr lib vpf tf usr lib rvcat af usr adm vaacct mx 2000 p1 58 px 2112 py 1700 tr f QNX Neutrino doesn t provide print filters you have to either port them from another UNIX type OS or write your own If you don t want to do this you can use the spooling system which provides print drivers for specific families of currently popular printers See spooler in the Utilities Reference and Printing with spooler p 220 below The 1pa daemon spawns the filters their standard input is the data to be printed their standard output is the printer Standard error is attached to the 1f file for logging errors or you can use syslogd A filter must return an exit code of O if there were no errors 1 if the job should be reprinted or 2 if the job should be thrown
19. Your printer should now appear in dev printers Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 221 Printing Remote printing over Qnet To print across Qnet print to net nodename dev printers printer_name spool The spooler program for the printer must be running on nodename Remote printing over TCP IP If you want to set up spooler to print on a remote printer you can pipe the print job to lpr This takes advantage of the fact that the filter sends the print job to the printer you just name the remote printer in the filter command line of the configuration file used by spooler To try it first get your remote printer working using lpr see Remote printing to a TCP IP enabled printer using lpr p 218 then do the following 1 Copy the configuration file from the printer you want to use in this case a PostScript printer cp etc printers ps cfg etc printers test cfg 2 Find the filter command lines in test c g they look like this Filter Filter phs d phs to ps raw Sd cat These filter command lines are in the form source destination filter The phs filter command line tells the filter to process phs files by sending them through a filter called phs to ps before sending them on to the destination passed by spooler The raw filter command is for utilities that already produce the correct output for the printer 3 Change the phs filter command line from this Filter phs d phs to ps t
20. a login password a user s full name a home directory and a login shell This data is stored in the etc passwd and etc shadow files where it s accessed by login utilities as well as by other applications that need user account information User names and passwords are case sensitive User accounts let e users log in with a user name and password starting a session under their user ID and group ID e users create their own login environments e applications determine the user name and account information relating to a user ID and group ID if they re defined in etc passwd and etc group le g 1s 1 displays the names not the IDs of the user and group who own each file e utilities and applications accept user names as input as an alternative to numeric user IDs e shells expand username paths into actual pathnames based on users home directory information stored in their accounts Groups are used to convey similar permissions to groups of users on the system Entries in etc passwd and etc group define group membership while the group ID of a running program and the group ownership and permission settings of individual files and directories determine the file permission granted to a group member When you log in you re in the group specified in etc passwd You can switch to another of your groups by using the newgrp utility User accounts vs user IDs login lookup and permissions 34 Once you ve logged
21. area first save the spare area ECC and then set those fields of the spare structure to OxFF which is required for calculating the cyclic redundancy check CRC data integrity checks for NAND Perform the CRC calculation and if it fails then in order to recover you must attempt using the new spare area ECC value If the spare area CRC is correct then you can skip the ECC operation If the ECC can correct the spare area then set tacode in the transaction structure to ETFS_TRANS_ECC If the ECC can t be corrected then set the tacode to ETFS_TRANS_DATAERR e For devio_postcluster After calculating the CRC and ECC for the cluster data and calculating the CRC for the spare area add a calculation for the ECC of the spare area When doing the CRC calculation use OxFF as placeholder values for the spare area ECC UDF filesystem The limits for UDF filesystems include Filename length 255 Unicode characters Pathname length 1024 bytes Disk size This filesystem uses a 32 bit block address but the filesystem is 64 bit gt 4 GB We don t allow the creation of anything via fs udf so It s read only Apple Macintosh HFS and HFS Plus The limits for the Apple Macintosh HFS Hierarchical File System and HFS Plus include Filename length 31 MacRoman characters on HFS 255 bytes Unicode on HFS Plus Pathname length 1023 bytes Disk size 340 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited F
22. be unique in the domain and can t contain slashes or periods The default node name is the value of the _CS_HOSTNAME configuration string If your hostname is localhost the default when you first boot Qnet uses a hostname based on your NIC hardware s MAC address so that nodes can still communicate node domain A character string that 1sm qnet so adds to the end of the node name Together the node name and node domain must form a string that s unique for all nodes that are talking to each other The default is the value of the _CS_DOMAIN configuration string fully qualified node name FQNN The string formed by concatenating the node name and node domain For example if the node name is kar1 and the node domain name is qnx com the resulting FQNN is karl qnx com network directory A directory in the pathname space implemented by 1sm qnet so Each network directory there can be more than one on a node has an associated node domain The default is net as used in the examples in this chapter The entries in net for nodes in the same domain as your machine don t include the domain name For example if your machine is in the qnx com domain the entry for karl is net karl if you re in a different domain the entry is net karl qnx com name resolution The process by which 1sm qnet so converts an FQNN to a list of destination addresses that the transport layer knows how to get to name resolver
23. e If you type my_ followed by Esc Esc or Tab the shell can t complete the command name because what you ve typed isn t enough to distinguish between the possibilities e If you type my_w followed by Esc Esc or Tab the system completes the command name my_wonderful_app If you haven t typed enough to uniquely identify the command or file you can press Esc to get a list of the possible completions You can control which keys the shell uses for completing names by setting the shell s complete key binding For example the command that lets you use the Tab key is as follows bind I complete You can use bind on the command line or in the ksh profile For more information about the bind command and the key bindings see emacs interactive input line editing in the documentation for ksh in the Utilities Reference for information about the profiles for ksh see also Configuring your shell p 118 in Configuring Your Environment The Korn shell recognizes these reserved words and symbols case else function then do esac EF time EL done Ed in until elif for select while and uses them to build compound commands For example you can execute commands in a loop for i in c de cp 1 i bak done Entering multiple commands You can enter more than one command at a time by separating your commands with a semicolon For example if you want to determine your current working directory invoke pwd If you wa
24. is often the same as your user name lib This directory contains essential shared libraries that programs need in order to run filename so as well as static libraries used during development See also usr lib and usr local lib The 1ib directory includes lib dl11 Contains additional shared libraries that implement OS drivers and services such as drivers filesystem managers and so on For some examples of how shared libraries are used for certain types of drivers and services see Filesystems Native Networking Qnet and TCP IP Networking in the System Architecture guide For details about specific shared objects in the 1ib d11 directory see their respective entries in the Utilities Reference proc Owned by the process manager procnto this virtual directory can give you information about processes and pathname space configuration The proc directory contains a subdirectory for each process the process ID is used as the name of the directory These directories each contain an entry as that defines the process s address space Various utilities use this entry to get information about a process For more information see Controlling processes via the proc filesystem in the Processes chapter of the QNX Neutrino Programmer s Guide The proc directory also includes proc boot Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 93 Working with Files The image filesystem that comprises the boot image
25. mnt sbin type link usr bin mnt usr bin type link usr sbin mnt usr sbin type link lib mnt lib type link usr lib mnt usr lib type link etc mnt etc libc so 2 libc so libm so PARAR AAA AAA A AEA A AAPA AEA AEA A AEE AEA A AEE AE AAA EAE AA A EA AEE AE a uncomment for NETWORK driver PETE EE EE EE EH EE EE EE EE EE EE EEE EE EEE EE EE EEE EE EEE EEE EEE AE FE AE AE AE E AE HE AE E devn penet so libsocket so dc uncomment for USB driver HARA Aa AAT ARE FE AE AE AEA AEA AEA AEE AEE AEA AEA AEA AEE AEE AEA AEA AAT AEE AEE EA EA HEAT AE AEE EA EA AEA AE AE EA EE devu uhci so libusbdi so data c devc ser8250 FAR AAT HEART HH RA AAT HRA AE HEAT FE FE AE FE TH RA HAA HARA AE RAAT HEART HARA HAA HH uncomment for REMOTE_DEBUG gdb or Momentics HARA AT AE AE AEA EA AEA AEA AEA AEE AEA EA AEA AEE EEA AEA AEA AEA AEE AE EEA AEA HEAT AEE AEE AEA EA AEA AEE AE EEA EA E devc pty qconn HARA AT ARE AE AEA EA AEA AEA AEA AEA A EA AEA AEE AEE AEA AEA AAT AEE AEE EEA EA HEAT AEE AEE AEA EA AEA HEE AEE EEA EE uncomment for PCI server FAR AAT HART HH RAE HARARE HAA AEA AT HE EAE HE AEA AE AE AEA EE HE AEE AE EE AE AEE AE HE EAE AE EE AEA EAA AEE pci abc123 pci FEAT HAART HH RAH HAA HAA HAA HE AEA TH RA HARA RAAT RAE AT EAA TH AAT HARA HE uncomment for FLASH driver HARA Aa ARE AEE AAPA AEA AE AEE AE AEE AEE A EA AE AE AEE AEE AEE AEA AE AE AE AEE AEE EA EA AAT AEE AE AEA EA EA EE AE EA A E devf
26. oocccocccconcnoncconnonnnonnnonnnoncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnonnnnnnneninencnnnaninoss 208 ACCESS control mico A RE AVEA AEA AE ONEA AE dE 209 Network managet estaciona tt td a a eera aus 210 Printer capabilities etc printCap reussi asne ienna aan ar ane haa Kaaa ie eaaa aa 210 Some etc printcap exaMplesS oocccocccnncncnnnnncononccononcnnnnncnnnnccnnnncnn naco nnncrnnnncnnnnrnnnnnoss 214 Remote printing to a printer on another Network occcocccccccocccoccconncnnncnoncnannnanonannnns 218 Remote printing to a TCP IP enabled printer USING IPr occcocccocccconcconcnoncnannncnnnncnnns 218 PriNtINS WITRSPOdlE ot A A A A id 220 Setting UDS podra a AT ATE OAE A TETT 220 Printing on a USB pride A aa eaaa a a a paaa Eai 221 Remote printing over Qnet seror aena ar aan aT A N E Ea 222 Remote printing over TCP IP occcocccccccccncncccnnnnonnnoninoncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnonnnnnannnncnnn 222 Troubleshooting irainen AAA EA E eee ON AI 224 Understanding lpr error messages ccoocccccccoccnonnonnneninencnoncnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnonnnennnnnannnacnnn 224 Troubleshooting remote printing problems occccocncocnnoccnonnnocnnnnncnnncnnnnonnnoninenineninns 226 Table of Contents Chapter 13 Connecting Hardware oocccccccccncncccncconncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnrnnnrrnnrrnnnnnnnnnnnrananinans 229 POMAGP GEVICES usa acacia oc sanses dant dds dra seadesetanesh e aaa S aaa raaa ite 230 CD ROMS and DVDS aries A da AA AE 231 Floppy disks
27. own address However this is rare and generally found only on embedded systems If the value represented is FFFFFF FFFFFF or 000000 000000 there s likely something wrong with the setup of the hardware or you need to assign a MAC address to the card Check the hardware manual to see whether or not this is the case If the hardware didn t get set up correctly the MAC address may not always appear as shown above the list at http www cavebear com archive cavebear Ethernet vendor html to see if the vendor ID is valid Then check the card ID the last 6 digits The card ID should be something semi random A display similar to 444 444 is likely incorrect The first six digits of the MAC address are the vendor ID Check the entries against Current Physical Node ID The current physical node ID is shown if a card has been set up to spoof the ID of another card Basically a parameter is passed to the driver telling it that the node s ID is actually the value that appears Depending on the card some drivers will accept this What spoofing does on a higher software level is filter out the packets that were meant for this node ID This method is considerably slower than if you let the card filter out the packets on a hardware level Because the card is set in promiscuous mode it has to accept all packets that come in and use a software mode to sort them Another way of thinking about this is to compare it to a postal syste
28. p 97 in the Working with Files chapter in this guide Ta e Qnet p 312 in the Securing Your System chapter in this guide e Autodiscovery vs static in the Transparent Distributed Processing Using Qnet chapter of the QNX Neutrino Programmer s Guide Creating useqnet To start Qnet automatically when you boot your system log in as root and create an empty useqnet file Here s how touch etc system config useqnet If this file exists your etc system sysinit script starts Qnet when you boot your machine If you need to specify any options to Qnet edit sysinit and change these lines Enable qnet if user has enabled it if test r etc system config useqnet a d dev io net then mount Tio pkt lsm qnet so EL For example if the hardware is unreliable you might want to enable Cyclic Redundancy Checking on the packets Change the above lines to Enable qnet if user has enabled it if test r etc system config useqnet a d dev io net then mount Tio pkt o do_crc 1 1sm qnet so EL 180 Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Starting Qnet Starting the network manager protocols and drivers The io pkt manager is a process that assumes the central role to load a number of shared objects It provides the framework for the entire protocol stack and lets data pass between modules In the case of native networking the shared objects are 1sm qnet so and networking drivers dev
29. 0 9 A prune print gt mountpoints Use cut and sort to extract a list of the processes that own the mountpoints cut d f 2 lt mountpoints sort nu gt pidlist Use xargs and pidin to display the process ID long name and interrupt handlers for each of these processes xargs i pidin p F za 3n Q lt pidlist less Use grep to show the mountpoints for a specified process ID pid grep pid mountpoints Use the i option of the use utility to show the date of a specified driver drivername use i drivername This procedure which approximates the functionality of the Windows XP driverquery command shows the drivers programs that have mountpoints in the pathname space that are currently running it doesn t show those that are merely installed 173 Chapter 10 Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing A QNX Neutrino native network is a group of interconnected workstations running only the QNX Neutrino RTOS In this network a program can transparently access any resource whether it s a file a device or a process on any other node a computer or a workstation in your local subnetwork You can even run programs on other nodes The Qnet protocol provides transparent networking across a QNX Neutrino network Qnet implements a local area network that s optimized to provide a fast seamless interface between QNX Neutrino workstations whatever the type of hardware For QNX
30. 15073 15073 15 seconds ftruncate 13908 8510 22418 22 seconds devctl 8479 8534 8 5 seconds Note how extending the file incrementally as a result of each write call is slower than growing it with a single ftruncate call as the filesystem can allocate larger contiguous Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 327 Fine Tuning Your System data extents and needs to update the inode metadata attributes only once Note also how the time to overwrite already allocated data blocks is much less than that for allocating the blocks dynamically the sequential writes aren t interrupted by the periodic need to synchronously update the bitmap Although the total time to pregrow and overwrite is worse than growing the pregrowth could be performed during an initialization phase where speed isn t critical allowing for better write performance later The optimal case is to pregrow the file without zero filling it using a devct and then overwrite with the real data contents Fine tuning USB storage devices If your environment hosts large e g media files on USB storage devices you should ensure that your configuration allows sufficient RAM for read ahead processing of large files such as MP3 files You can change the configuration by adjusting the cache and vnode values that devb umass passes to io b1k so with the blk option A reasonable starting configuration for the blk option is cache 512k vnode 256 You
31. 2 0 4 tcpip_printer e Add an entry to describe the printer in the etc printcap file on the same node ript2 rm tcpip_printer rp ps sd usr spool output lpd rlpt2 Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Printing with lpr This example shows that the name of the remote machine in this case the actual printer is tcpip_printer and the spool directory is usr spool output lpd ript2 Note that the remote printer is specified as ps which is the name some network printers use for accepting PostScript files You need to find out the name your printer wants you to use it may require different names for different types of print file format e g PostScript and text files Make sure you ve created your spool directory that s about it Follow the usual steps described in Local and remote printers p 216 and you should be able to print to your remote printer using a command line like this lpr Prlpt2 root junk ps This sends a PostScript file named root junk ps to the remote printer named tcpip_printer located at the IP address 10 2 0 4 To keep it simple we ve taken the easy way out in this example by sending a PostScript file to a PostScript printer It s easy because the formatting is embedded in the PostScript text You might have to filter the print file to get your printer to work using lpr you can specify the filter to use in the etc printcap entry for the printer for more information on this see
32. 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 71 Using the Command Line 72 DOS command QNX Neutrino command s diskcomp See The diskcomp DOS command p 73 driverquery See Troubleshooting p 173 in Working with Filesystems format fdformat and dinit getmac See ifconfig netstat also 1s dev io net ar n 0 tracelogger Lprg v E Os O Oo 3 3 3 K O O H lt Q 5 gt Y 0 ce tar unzip echo PATH export PATH new path see Utilities p 66 in this chapter or the documentation for ksh query rem Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited QNX Neutrino for MS DOS users DOS command QNX Neutrino command s few CITO The diskcomp DOS command Here s the QNX Neutrino equivalent of the DOS diskcomp command 1 Copy the master disk to a file cp dev fd0 referencecopy 2 Compare other disks with the copy of the master file cmp referencecopy dev fd0 3 Copy the master file to a new floppy cp referencecopy dev fd0 MS DOS local command interpreter variables This table lists some built in MS DOS local command interpreter variables and their equivalent QNX Neutrino environment variables or commands DOS Local QNX Neutrino equivalent SCOMPUTERNAMES HOSTNAME SCOMSPECS SHELL Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 73 Using the Command Line 74 DOS Local MEDRIV ESSOR_ID
33. 233 filesystem 84 87 93 162 337 mounting 87 cdrecord 285 CDs 285 bootable 285 burning 285 cfg file extension 104 CGI 267 270 274 scripts 270 274 channels limits on 343 CHAP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol 359 chap secrets 359 character devices 51 251 253 drivers 51 251 command line interpreting 51 1 0 attributes 253 character special files 78 characters 52 61 63 84 140 334 control disabling 334 counting 63 Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited QNX Neutrino RTOS characters continued deleting 52 international 84 filenames 84 special quoting 63 140 wildcard 61 140 chat 359 chattr 159 chdir DOS command 71 chgrp 97 335 maximum group ID for QNX 4 filesystems 335 chkdosfs 20 chkdsk DOS command 71 chkfsys 20 85 156 297 299 300 overriding clean flag 299 read only mode 300 recovering damaged filesystem 299 using on live system 300 when to run 299 chkqnx6fs 20 157 chmod 44 97 101 136 152 338 and access control lists ACLs 101 not supported by CIFS filesystem 338 chown 97 152 335 338 maximum group or user ID for QNX 4 filesystems 335 not supported by CIFS filesystem 338 chown restricting use of 334 CIFS filesystem 165 337 clean flag chkfsys 299 clients 188 197 PPPoE 197 TCP IP 188 cls DOS command 71 cmd DOS command 71 CMD_INT 271 coaxial cables 257 collisions 260 261 263 excessive 261 frames 263 late 261 multiple 260 single 260 COLUM
34. 251 393 Index rshd 193 runas DOS command 71 rwhod 194 S S 104 file extension 104 s file extension 104 S_IFNAM 149 S_IFREG 149 SAMBA printing over 203 357 sbin 94 95 scanning for consistent data chkfsys 299 schtasks DOS command 71 screen 52 clearing 52 scripts 65 133 270 274 CGI 270 274 perl 274 shell 65 133 SCSI Small Computer Systems Interface 231 236 search permission 98 security 36 66 99 180 193 209 270 273 308 309 311 312 313 CGI scripts 270 firewalls 313 general 308 inetd 193 IPSec 312 message passing 311 password database 36 PATH 66 pdebug 311 printing 209 protecting encrypted passwords 36 qconn 311 Qnet 180 312 QNX Neutrino specific 311 setuid and setgid commands 99 309 Trojan horse programs 66 309 viruses 309 web server 273 sed 134 self 94 sem 88 semaphores 88 343 limits 343 named 88 pathname space 88 ser 264 serial ports 78 88 252 multiport 252 performance 252 Server Side Includes See SSI servers 188 193 197 267 273 299 Internet super server 193 PPPoE 197 running chkfsys on 299 TCP IP 188 web embedded 267 273 security 273 394 sessions limits 342 setconf 122 124 setenv 128 setfacl 101 103 setgid 98 setrlimit 343 344 setuid 98 309 setvbuf 320 323 326 sh 55 134 See also Korn shell shadow 36 38 43 entries 38 users removing 43 share 95 shared memory 89 149 343 limits 343 procnto 149 shared objects 93 104 SHELL 3
35. 4 the protocol used for native networking is called FLEET it isn t compatible with Qnet In essence the Qnet protocol extends interprocess communication IPC transparently over a network of microkernels taking advantage of QNX Neutrino s message passing paradigm to implement native networking When you run Qnet entries for all the nodes in your local subnetwork that are running Qnet appear in the net namespace Under QNX 4 you use a double slash followed by a node number to refer to another node For more details see the Native Networking Qnet chapter of the System Architecture guide For information about programming with Qnet see the Transparent Distributed Networking via Qnet chapter of the Programmer s Guide Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 175 Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing When should you use Qnet When should you use Qnet and when TCP IP or some other protocol It all depends on what machines you need to connect Qnet is intended for a network of trusted machines that are all running QNX Neutrino and that all use the same endian ness It lets these machines share all their resources with little overhead Using Qnet you can use the QNX Neutrino utilities cp mv and so on to manipulate files anywhere on the Qnet network as if they were on your machine Because it s meant for a group of trusted machines such as you d find in an embedded system Qnet doesn t do any aut
36. 91 fopen 320 format DOS command 71 forums 345 Foundry27 112 FQNN fully qualified node name 177 fragmentation reducing 151 Frame Check Sequence See FCS fread 320 327 free disk space determining 70 146 free software 345 freeze 283 FS_FLAGS_ COMMITTING 159 fs_qnx4 h 289 fs cd so 84 162 231 fs cifs 165 fs dos so 84 161 fs ext2 so 84 163 fs mac so 170 340 fs nfs2 167 fs nfs3 167 fs nt so 171 341 fs qnx4 so 84 151 240 devb ram 240 fs qnx6 so 84 157 fs udf so 84 169 231 fsck UNIX command 20 fsync 159 324 ftpd 90 193 configuration 90 ftpd conf 90 ftpusers 90 ftruncate 324 327 full duplex 256 fully qualified node name FQNN 177 fwrite 320 G gateways 188 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited gawk 104 134 138 getconf 122 152 332 getenv 128 getfacl 101 103 getmac DOS command 71 getrlimit 343 ghost images 287 GIF graphical images 104 Greenwich Mean Time GMT See UTC Coordinated Universal Time grep 60 63 64 140 173 group 36 37 43 90 entries 37 users removing 43 groups 34 37 42 44 45 97 98 137 adding 45 changing 34 creating 44 files and directories specifying for 97 IDs 34 42 45 adding 45 assigning 42 passwords not supported 37 permissions 34 44 running programs as a specific 98 137 gunzip 70 277 283 gzip 104 149 277 283 GPL issues 283 using in dev shmem 149 H h file extension 104 half duplex 257 hard disks 87 93 233
37. A etc passwd e putting a password on an account that previously didn t have a password e editing the etc passwd or etc group files If it s likely that someone might try to use the passwd utility or update the account database files while you re editing them lock the password database by creating the etc pwlock file before making your changes As described below you should use the passwd utility to change an account s password However you need to use a text editor to e change an existing user s user name full name user ID group ID home directory or login shell e create a new account that doesn t conform to the passwd utility s allowed configuration e remove a user account e add or remove a group e change the list of members of a group The changes you make manually to the account files aren t checked for conformance to the rules set in the passwd configuration file For more information see the description of etc default passwd in the documentation for passwd in the Utilities Reference Adding users To add a user 1 Log in as root Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 41 Managing User Accounts 42 2 Use passwa passwd new_username Make sure that the user name is no longer than 14 characters otherwise that user won t be able to log in lt If you specify a user name that s already registered passwd assumes you want to change their password If that s what
38. CR is received will the line of data be made available to application processes Contrast raw mode channel A kernel object used with message passing In QNX Neutrino message passing is directed towards a connection made to a channel threads can receive messages from channels A thread that wishes to receive messages creates a channel using ChannelCreate and then receives messages from that channel using MsgReceive Another thread that wishes to send a message to the first thread must make a connection to that channel by attaching to the channel using ConnectAttach and then sending data using MsgSend CIFS Common Internet File System aka SMB a protocol that allows a client workstation to perform transparent file access over a network to a Windows server Client file access calls are converted to CIFS protocol requests and are sent to the server over the network The server receives the request performs the actual filesystem operation and sends a response back to the client CIS Card Information Structure command completion A shell feature that saves typing type enough of the command s name to identify it uniquely and then press Esc twice If possible the shell fills in the rest of the name command interpreter A process that parses what you type on the command line also known as a Shell compound command A command that includes a shell s reserved words grouping constructs and
39. Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 177 Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing A piece of code that implements one method of converting an FQNN to a list of destination addresses Each network directory has a list of name resolvers that are applied in turn to attempt to resolve the FQNN The default is the Node Discovery Protocol NDP 178 Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Software components for Qnet networking Software components for Qnet networking You need the following software entities along with the hardware for Qnet networking Dd T Ll Client processes Microkernel Ism qnet so 4 f io pkt Network drivers devnp so Hardware Figure 4 Components of Qnet io pkt Manager to provide support for dynamically loaded networking modules devn devnp Managers that form an interface with the hardware 1lsm qnet so Native network manager to implement Qnet protocols Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 179 Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing Starting Qnet You can start Qnet by e creating a usegnet file then rebooting or e explicitly starting the network manager protocols and drivers as described below If you run Qnet anyone else on your network who s running Qnet can examine your files and processes if the permissions on them allow it For more information see File ownership and permissions
40. E 86 MU AAA A A A A ec Pee LL rere eee eee a ia 87 A A TENE L TE TA E EEA A AE 90 QNX Neutrino RTOS AA A A OE 93 rao e cr A PE EE a A A AA ces 93 A e e aces e e suede teen E at ead Micka at vide save th bay ones nee oh Oe 93 AN 94 IM AAA AA A A E A ad 94 Dre ra a AI in od A ltda 94 JUST cin aa AA AA A RA A R A 95 A A A E A A E A TE 96 File ownership and permissions cccccccececeeeceecceeeceeceeeeee cece eeee esse esse eeseeeseeeseeeaeeeeaeeeaeesneees 97 Setuid and seteid cts s ccie seer nea AA Ai ct 98 Sticky Dlls ya Micka Hed detec easton shel Pees ar aba 99 Default file PErMISSIONS 0 a a maikkarin ee 99 Access Control Lists AGUS ira ii A 100 Filename extensions eraa A A Adi aia 104 TROUDIESHOOELING iriaren prea a area a EE eia a acd a a a at a aaa 107 Chapter 6 Using Editors ccoo on tandita eet aaa adna ai ech teestedes ctl cde ae Taranii aain Ea 109 Supported editors Tukiri A A AA da E ENS 110 Specifying the default editor ccocccccnccocccocncocncnnnennnononnncnnonnnnnnnonnnnnnonnnnnnnnonnnennnenanenaninoss 113 Chapter 7 Configuring Your Environment occocccccccncccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnrnnnrnnnnnnnnrnnnrnnnninnns 115 What happens when you log in ocoocccccccncccnocccncncnnnonnnencnoncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnneninenineninns 116 CUSTOMIZING your NOME ii A A aa e At 117 Configuring Youre e dd e a ene a Dic dina do oo dE 118 JOUC POT Ges 3 etree da A A A a de a NTG 118 SHOMEL Prom mr
41. IRQ 7 specify devb eide eide ioport 0x320 0x32c irq 7 noslave e f your devices support UDMA 4 or higher but sloginfo reports that the driver is using a lower mode make sure you re using an 80 conductor cable e If you have an 80 conductor cable and your devices support UDMA 4 or higher but sloginfo reports that the driver is using a lower mode the device firmware might be out of date The driver relies on the device firmware to detect the cable type You can check to see if the device manufacturer has a firmware upgrade or you can use the udma xxx command line option to override the mode For example devb eide eide vid 0x8086 did 0x2411 pci 0 chnl 1 master udma 4 If the drives are detected but they re running slowly e Use sloginfo to examine the devb driver output in the system log It will tell you the current speed of the driver e g max udma 5 cur udma 3 QNX Neutrino automatically uses the maximum UDMA mode unless you ve specified a maximum in the BIOS The following table shows the maximum mode and rate for each disk specification The PIO MDMA and lower UDMA modes use a 40 pin cable higher UDMA modes require an 80 pin cable Specification PIO MDMA UDMA UDMA Maximum 40 pin 80 pin rate CC mmr fee fe ess The maximum rate is the maximum theoretical burst interface throughput Sustained throughput depends on many factors such as the drive cache Copyright 2014 QNX Software Sys
42. Limited Technical support Technical support Technical assistance is available for all supported products To obtain technical support for any QNX product visit the Support area on our website www gnx com You ll find a wide range of support options including community forums Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 17 Chapter 1 Getting to Know the OS Welcome to the QNX Neutrino RTOS This section describes how the QNX Neutrino RTOS compares to UNIX and Microsoft Windows from a user s not a developer s perspective For more details about QNX Neutrino s design and the philosophy behind it see the System Architecture guide Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 19 Getting to Know the OS QNX Neutrino compared with UNIX If you re familiar with UNIX style operating systems you ll feel right at home with QNX Neutrino many people even pronounce QNX to rhyme with UNIX some spell it out Q N X At the heart of the system is the microkernel procnto surrounded by other processes and the familiar Korn shell ksh see the Using the Command Line p 49 chapter Each process has its own process ID or pid and contains one or more threads o To determine the release version of the kernel on your system use the uname a command For more information see its entry in the Utilities Reference lt QNX Neutrino is a multiuser OS it supports any number of users at a t
43. Mqueue manager GUI manager Figure 1 The QNX Neutrino architecture The advantage of using virtual memory is that one process can t corrupt another process s memory space For more information see The Philosophy of QNX Neutrino in the System Architecture guide QNX Neutrino s most important features are its microkernel architecture and the resource manager framework that takes advantage of it for a brief introduction see Resource managers p 24 Drivers have exactly the same status as other user applications so you debug them using the same high level source aware breakpointing IDE that you d use for user applications This also means that e You aren t also debugging the kernel when you re debugging a driver e A faulty driver isn t likely to crash the OS e You can usually stop and restart a driver without rebooting the system Developers can usually eliminate interrupt handlers typically the most tricky code of all by moving the hardware manipulation code up to the application thread level with all the debugging advantages and freedom from restrictions that that implies This gives QNX Neutrino an enormous advantage over monolithic systems Likewise in installations in the field the modularity of QNX Neutrino s components allows for the kind of redundant coverage expressed in our simple yet very effective High Availability HA manager making it much easier to construct extremely robust des
44. OS images that the secondary boot loader can load on bootup e Ona bootable QNX 4 fs qnx4 so filesystem it s a file that contains the primary OS image For more information see QNX Neutrino and QNX 4 bootloader partitions in the QNX Neutrino Technical Notes diskroot A file that indicates which QNX 4 filesystem to mount as inodes Contains additional data pointing to extra inode blocks required by files that device For more information see QNX 4 filesystem p 151 in Working with Filesystems The directory also contains platform specific directories e g armle v7 x86 as well as the directories described in the sections that follow bin The bin directory contains binaries of essential utilities such as chmod 1s and ksh To display basic utility syntax type use utilityname from the command line For more information see use in the Utilities Reference boot The boot directory contains files and directories related to creating bootable OS images image filesystems Image filesystems contain OS components your executables and data files that need to be present and running immediately upon bootup For general information on this topic see the Making an OS Image chapter in the Building Embedded Systems guide and mkifs in the Utilities Reference This directory includes boot build This directory contains the mkifs buildfiles used to build OS images boot fs By conventio
45. SERIAL_PORT while true do SECHO Waiting on modem SERIAL_PORT SECHO Starting PPP services SPPPD connect DO_CHAT debug nodetach auth chap SLOCAL_IP SREMOTE_IP SSERIAL_ PORT done The TIMEOUT is 32000000 because it s a long period of time before the timeout takes effect chat doesn t allow an infinite wait The etc ppp chap secrets is as follows Client Server Secret Addresses allowed Ha HE TE EE EE EE HE HE HE HE FE E HE EE FE FE FE E aE aE FE aE EE HEE HEE HEE HE EE HE EE HE EE FE H EH E password You can also extend the chat script that answers the modem to be a little more robust with specific events that should restart the answering service other than the events given You might want to add other features as well Here s the buildfile used to set up a machine to allow telnet connections to log in for shell access and t ftp access for file transfer over PPP virtual x86 bios compress bootstrap startup bios K8250 2f8 0 57600 1843200 16 v PATH proc boot procnto vvv script startup script seedres pci bios amp waitfor dev pci Start 1 keyboard console devc con n8 amp Start serial A driver waitfor dev conl reopen dev conl devc ser8250 e b38400 waitfor dev serl pipe touch tmp syslog syslogd devc pty io pkt v4 ppppmgr Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 359 Examples 360 waitfor dev io net ip_ppp inetd display_msg She
46. To recover from circular references the system imposes a limit on the number of hops this limit is defined as SYMLOOP_MAX in the lt limits h gt include file Symlinks to symlinks You can get some surprising results depending on how you set up the symbolic links in your system For example ln sP dev shmem some_dir echo gt some_dir my_file In sP some_dir my_file some_dir my_link ls some_dir my_file my_link cd some_dir 1s my_file Note that 1s shows the link if given an explicit path but otherwise doesn t Understandably this can cause some confusion and distress Since it s common for tmp to be a link to dev shmen this situation can easily arise for special files created in tmp The root of the problem is that when you use chdir or the shell s cd command to go to some_dir you actually end up at dev shmem because of the some_dir symbolic link But you asked the path manager to create a link under some_dir not under dev shmem and the path manager doesn t care that some_dir is a link somewhere else The problem can occur any time a directory symlink exists where the following special files are created by postfixing the symlink path e path manager symlinks created through pathmgr_symlink or 1n sP as above e names attached by a resource manager using resmgr_attach for example a UNIX domain socket We recommend that you always create such links attachment points by using a
47. Underrun except in this case the DMA engine can t copy the packet into memory as fast as the data is coming from the network and the packet gets dropped Like the Transmit Underrun this is generally due to poor hardware Ethernet Headers out of range This entry indicates the number of packets whose Ethernet type length field isn t valid Oversized Packets received An oversized packet is simply a received packet that was too big to fit in the driver s Receive buffer Frames with Dribble Bits Dribble bits are extra bits of data that were received after the Ethernet CRC They re commonly caused by faulty hardware or by Ethernet cabling that doesn t conform to the 802 3 specifications Total Frames experiencing Collision s This is the total number of frames that have experienced a collision while trying to transmit on the network This can sometimes be high depending on how busy the network is A busy network experiences these types of errors more often than a quiet one Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 263 Con necting Hardware Modems 264 Internal modems ISA non PnP You can have any of the following types e Internal ISA Plug and Play or not e PCI based e External e Cable Internal modems can be ISA and are either Plug and Play PnP or not You have to manually set up non PnP ISA devices In order to identify your device you need to have the documentation for the device or be
48. User Accounts 36 Account database etc passwd The account database consists of the files listed with the appropriate access permissions described in this section File Owner Group Permissions Note that anyone can read etc passwad This lets standard utilities find information about users The encrypted password isn t stored in this file it s stored in etc shadow which only root has permission to read This helps prevent attempts to decrypt the passwords To protect the security of your user community make sure you don t change these permissions This file stores information about users Each line in etc passwa is in this format username has_pw userid group comment homedir shell The fields are separated by colons and include username The user s login name This can contain any characters except a colon but you should probably avoid any of the shell s special characters For more information see Quoting special characters p 63 in Using the Command Line has_pw This field must be empty or x If empty the user has no password if x the user s encrypted password is in etc shadow userid The numeric user ID Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Account database group The numeric group ID comment A free form comment field that usually contains at least the user s real name this field must not contain a colon homedir The user s home
49. With a 1 KB default block size you can fit 256 block pointers in a block so a file that s 16 x 256 x 1 KB 4 MB requires 1 level of indirect pointers If the file is bigger you need two levels e 16 blocks of 256 pointers to blocks holding another 256 pointers to blocks which gives a maximum file size of 1 GB For three levels of indirect pointers the maximum file size is 256 GB If the block size is 2 KB then each block holds up to 512 pointers and everything scales accordingly Ext2 filesystem The limits for Linux Ext2 filesystems include Filename length 255 bytes Pathname length 1024 bytes File size Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 335 Understanding System Limits 2GB 1 Directory size 2 GB 1 directories are files with inode and filename information as data Filesystem size 2 GB x 512 Disk size 264 bytes limited by the disk driver DOS FAT 12 16 32 filesystem The limits for DOS FAT 12 16 32 filesystems include Filename length 255 characters Pathname length 260 characters File size 4 GB 1 uses a 32 bit filesystem format Directory size Depends on the type of filesystem e The root directory of FAT12 16 is special in that it s pregrown and can t increase You choose the size when you format and is typically 512 entries FAT32 has no such limit e FAT directories are limited for DOS compatability to containing 64 K entries e For long non 8 3 names a sin
50. a OS Image in Building bootable image Embedded Systems Java archive consisting of Java applications e g the multiple java files class IDE files etc compressed into a single file Kernel events gathered by procnto instr the instrumented kernel tracelogger and used to profile an traceprinter the IDE entire QNX Neutrino system see also the System Analysis Toolkit User s Guide Makefile source typically make used within QNX Neutrino recursive makes Binary output file that qcc make results from compiling a C C or Assembly source file Assembly source code file GNU assembler as Tape archive tar Backing Up and Recovering Data p 277 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 105 Working with Files Extension Description Related programs utilities Compressed tape archive gzip tar Backing Up and Recovering Data p 277 ASCII text file Many text based editors applications and individual users Usage message source for programs that don t embed usage in the program source code QNX Neutrino recursive make Extensible Markup Language file multiple uses including IDE documentation If you aren t sure about the format of a file use the file utility file filename 106 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Here are a few problems that you might have with files I m trying to write a file but get a permis
51. able to contact the device manufacturer to have it identified Currently there is no utility within QNX Neutrino to obtain a list of ISA devices installed on your system Configure the modem to use an I O port and IRQ that don t conflict with anything else in the system The devc ser8250 driver should autodetect the modem and it should appear in the dev directory as serx where x is an integer There may be more than one entry under the name Assume that the first two entries represent the comm ports of the system Any additional entry is likely To the modem If in doubt try all ser entries with qtalk For more information see Testing Modems p 265 below Entries will usually appear in this fashion Comml is enabled in the BIOS Comm2 is disabled Modem is configured to Comm2 s ioport and IRQ In the dev directory you ll see e seri Comml e ser2 Modem Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Modems ISA PnP If you have an ISA PnP modem that can be manually assigned an IRQ and I O port via jumpers we recommend that you use the manual method rather than Plug and Play The devc ser8250 driver should automatically detect the modem which should appear in the dev directory as serx where x is an integer There may be more than one entry in dev under the name ser Assume that the first two represent the comm ports of the system Any additional entry is likely the modem However if
52. and unmounting filesystems ccoocccccccocccncnonnnonnnoncnnncnnnnnnonnnonnnnnnonnnonnnnnnnnnncnon 147 Maga filesystem setea A sn 148 dev shmem RAM filesystem iooooccccccccnnnncnnoncnnnnncnnnnncnnoncnnnononnnnncnnnnnrnnnncnnrnnrnnnncrnnnnnnnnns 149 QNX A TilesystM coi A eid aie A A eee 151 A O 151 AE vicio rn adorar cara E RAR A A A AA 152 Links and inode ii A AA cis 152 A A o A A ch hash cade Gita leltscete seh ack 132 153 Directory WINKS aia A AAA AA A eee Pies 153 Symbolic SINKS usa tata 154 Filesystem robustness viii a ceeud ee da veve e a da ie 156 PoWer Sate tileSyStemiyics etsses a 157 BOOUiOestsc a e A e A TTA e chet aca ta 158 SMapShots ii A A A od 158 DOS filesystem 0 Is A dentioen Sens 161 CD ROM filesystem e eisai a eens arene eae A eas hata Fedak 162 Linux Ext2cflesysternitc ics fated otc ario da 163 Flash filesystems ii iaa 164 CIFS TilesyStemt ui A A a 165 NESST YT a A AA EA A DA 166 Setting INE Rios 166 NFS SCIVGP sereis irine srk ai SANE ENAERE AE AER ERONEN EEEE A A ARA 166 NES A At 167 Universal Disk Format UDF filesystem oocccccccocccocnnncnonnnoncnnncnnonnnonnnnnnonanonanononnnnnnnninon 169 Apple Macintosh HFS and HFS PIUS occooccccccccccnocnnncnnnnnnncnnncnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnninenineninns 170 Windows NT sfilGSYStOM costa diia 171 Inflator filesystem A ia Tea 172 TROUBIESHOOTING moronene A A A ds 173 Chapter 10 Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing ccss
53. appears as dev hdl To mount the drive type mount dev hdl fs zip_drive You don t need to remount the drive when you change disks Magnetic optical drives 238 Magnetic optical MO drives are usually attached to a SCSI or EIDE ATA bus Before you attempt to use the drive ensure that the hardware is set up correctly and that the BIOS detects the hardware properly The driver that you need depends on whether the drive is attached to a SCSI or EIDE interface If it s SCSI you ll need to determine the proper driver for your SCSI interface If it s EIDE simply use the devb eide driver For more information see Hard disks p 233 above The drivers for optical disks load the cam optical so shared object which provides a common access method for optical disks Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Hard disks The MO drive should appear in your dev directory as dev mox where x is the number of the drive starting at O To mount the drive type mount dev mo0 fs mo_drive You don t need to remount the drive when you change disks Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 239 Connecting Hardware RAM disks A RAM disk is a storage area that exists only in memory but looks like a hard disk You can add one to your system by using devb ram but this is a RAM disk with the overhead of a block filesystem by default it s initialized and formatted for an fs qnx4 so filesystem unless
54. are allowed Any characters except for a leading colon digits comma minus plus and ASCII NUL 10 are allowed offset The value you must add to the local time to arrive at Coordinated Universal Time UTC The offset has the form hhl mmL ssi Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited rule Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Setting the time zone Minutes mm and seconds ss are optional The hour Ah is required it may be a single digit The offset following std is required If no offset follows dst summer time is assumed to be one hour ahead of standard time You can use one or more digits the value is always interpreted as a decimal number The hour may be between O and 24 the minutes and seconds if present between O and 59 If preceded by a the time zone is east of the prime meridian otherwise it s west which may be indicated by an optional preceding Indicates when to change to and back from summer time The ru e has the form date time date time where the first date describes when the change from standard to summer time occurs and the second date describes when the change back happens Each time field describes when in current local time the change to the other time is made The format of date may be one of the following Jn The Julian day n 1 lt n lt 365 Leap days aren t counted That is in all years including leap years
55. are unique to QNX Neutrino Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 307 Securing Your System General OS security It should be fairly obvious that security is important you don t want someone to take control of a device and disrupt its normal functioning imagine the havoc if someone could stop air traffic control systems or hospital equipment from functioning properly The importance of security to an individual machine depends on the context e A machine behind a strong firewall is less vulnerable than one connected to a public network e One that doesn t even have a network connection is in even less danger Part of securing a machine is identifying the level of risk By classifying threats into categories we can break down the issues and see which ones we need to concern ourselves with Remote and local attacks We can break the broad division of security threats also known as exploits into categories Remote exploit The attacker connects to the machine via the network and takes advantage of bugs or weaknesses in the system Local attack The attacker has an account on the system in question and can use that account to attempt unauthorized tasks Remote exploits Remote exploits are generally much more serious than local ones but fortunately remote exploits are much easier to prevent and are generally less common For example suppose you re running bind a DNS resolver on port 53 of a publicly c
56. away When iprrm sends a SIGINT signal to the 1pd process that controls the printing 1pa sends a SIGINT signal to all filters and their descendants Filters that need to do cleanup operations such as deleting temporary files can trap this signal The arguments 1pd passes to a filter depend on the filter type Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 213 Printing e Output of filters are called with the following arguments filter wwidth llength The width and length values come from the pw and p1 entries in the etc printcap database e Input if filters are called with the following arguments filter c wwidth llength iindent nlogin hhost acct_file The optional c flag is used only when control characters are to be passed uninterpreted to the printer when using the I option of 1pr to print the file The w and parameters are the same as for of filters The n and h parameters specify the login name and hostname of the job owner The last argument is the name of the accounting file from etc printcap e All other filters are called with these arguments filter xwidth ylength nlogin hhost acct_file The x and y options specify the horizontal and vertical page size in pixels from the px and py entries in the etc printcap file The rest of the arguments are the same as for if filters Some etc printcap examples USB printer 214 This section gives you some examples to show you how to s
57. can use the d option to pass the driver io audio yvy d audiopc amp To see what other options you can use see the documentation for io audio in the Utilities Reference and for your specific card If the operating system doesn t detect your card properly you can manually start the driver In order to do this you need to identify the card You can find a list of currently supported hardware in the Community area of our website http www qnx com ISA cards ISA cards are either Plug and Play or not You typically have to manually set up non PnP ISA devices In order to identify your device you need to have the manual for your device or have a way to contact your device s manufacturer e g via their website There isn t currently a QNX Neutrino utility that lists the ISA devices that are installed on a system Non PnP based With non PnP cards you can manually start the driver and specify the I O port IRQ and DMA channel For example this command starts the Sound Blaster driver io audio dsb ioport port irq req dma ch dmal ch To find out what to set the I O port and IRQ to manually open the system and look at the card Then start the driver using the configuration settings that the card is set to Ensure that the I O port and IRQ are reserved in the BIOS for non PCI devices If you re using a Sound Blaster card check the following e f the driver rejects the card make sure that the I O port doesn t conflic
58. certain time or machine by naming the archive more easily transferred in bulk to other systems by transferring a single archive file and can sometimes be more readily compressed than individual files can You have several archive formats to choose from under QNX Neutrino including pax and tar QNX Neutrino also supports cpio cpio but we recommend it only when the archive needs to be readable by other systems that use cpio archives Creating an archive The simplest backup you can do on your system is to duplicate the files individually using cp or pax For example to duplicate a single file cp t my_file backup_directory or echo my_file pax rw backup_directory To back up an entire directory type cp Rt my_directory backup _directory or find my_directory print pax rw backup_directory To back up only certain files matching some criteria use the find utility or other means of identifying the files to be backed up and pipe the output to pax rw like this find my_directory name ch pax rw backup_directory To combine individual files into a single archive use tar or pax These utilities take all the files that you give them and place them into one big contiguous file You can use the same utilities to extract discrete files from the archives Some filesystems can t support archives or any other files that are larger than 2 GB When you use pax as an archiver pax w
59. cgi script found in usr www cgi bin Is executed and foo is sent as pathname information to get_data cgi The foo directory is stored in the PATH_ INFO environment variable which is used to send extra path information Slinger sets several environment variables which can be used by CGI scripts For more information see slinger in the Utilities Reference Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Dynamic HTML SSI method Server Side Includes SSI is a type of command language that can be embedded in HTML files With SSI you can add dynamic content to your HTML Slinger uses the PATH and CMD_INT environment variables to provide information to the SSI command exec Using dynamic HTML clients can offer interactive realtime features on their web pages Clients can create dynamic HTML by placing SSI tokens in the HTML code of their web pages The SSI token contains a command that s handled by Slinger While transmitting the HTML code Slinger replaces a token with HTML data based on the tag contained in the SSI token For example the embedded server can e execute utilities at user defined points in an HTML document the output of these utilities can be optionally inserted into the document e insert contents of other HTML files at a user defined point e handle conditional statements e g if break goto so you can define what parts of an HTML file are transmitted For Slinger to process SSI tokens the HTML file m
60. character All special characters within a string of Enclose the whole string in single quotes characters All special characters within a string Enclose the whole string in double quotes except for and For example these commands search for all occurrences of the string realtime OS in the chapter1 html file grep realtime OS chapterl html grep realtime OS chapterl html grep realtime OS chapterl html Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 63 Using the Command Line However note that grep realtime OS chapterl html doesn t do what you might expect as it attempts to find the string realtime in the files named Os and chapter1 html Depending on the complexity of a command you might have to nest the quoting For example find name html xargs grep 1l realtime OS less This command lists all the HTML files that contain a string consisting of realtime followed by any characters followed by OS The command line uses find to locate all of the files with an extension of html and passes the list of files to the xargs command which executes the given grep command on each file in turn All of the output from xargs Is then passed to less which displays the output one screenful ata time This command uses quoting in various ways to control when the special characters are processed and by which process 64 If you don t put quotes around the html the sh
61. completely unrecoverable you might be able to use spatch see above to patch your files and directories In some cases you may need to reinstall QNX Neutrino and restore your disk from your backup files If significant portions of the filesystem are irreparably damaged or important files are lost then restoring from backup might be your best alternative If the filesystem is intact If your filesystem is intact yet the machine still refuses to boot from hard disk then either of the following is probably damaged e the partition loader program in physical block 1 e the QNX Neutrino loader in the first block of the QNX 4 partition To rewrite a partition loader use fdisk fdisk dev hd0 loader To rewrite the QNX loader use dinit dinit b dev hd0t79 You should now be able to boot your system Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 305 Chapter 16 Securing Your System Now that more and more computers and other devices are hooked up to insecure networks security has become a very important issue The word security can have many meanings but in a computer context it generally means preventing unauthorized people from making your computer do things that you don t want it to do There are vast tracts of security information in books and on the Internet This chapter provides a very brief introduction to the subject of security points you toward outside information and resources and discusses security issues that
62. console Printers that reside on remote hosts should have an empty 1p entry For example the following etc printcap entry directs output to the printer named lp on the machine named ucbvax lp default line printer 1p rm ucbvax rp 1p sd usr spool vaxlpd The rm entry is the name of the remote machine to connect to this name must be a known hostname for a machine on the network The rp capability indicates that the name of the remote printer is 1p you can leave it out in this case because this is the default value The sd entry specifies usr spool vax1pd as the spooling directory instead of the default pathname usr spool output 1pa Filters are used to handle device dependencies and accounting functions The filters include the following Output filters Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Printing with lpr Used when accounting isn t needed or when all text data must be passed through a filter An output filter isn t suitable for accounting purposes because it s started only once all text files are filtered through it it doesn t pass owners login names and it doesn t identify the beginnings and ends of jobs Input filters Started for each file printed they do accounting if there s an af field in the printer s printcap entry If there are fields for both input and output filters the output filter is used only to print the banner page it s then stopped to allow input filters to access the printer
63. dev io usb io usb 4 HARA AT ARE AE AEA EA AA AEA A AEA A HA AEE AEA AEA AEA AEA AEE AEE AE EA HEA AEE AEE EEA EA EAH AE EEA EA E These env variables are inherited by all the programs which follow FERRET HAART HH RA AE FE AE AE AE HAE HAA HAA HAA HAA TH AAT HAA HH RAE ERAT HR SYSNAME nto TERM qansi PATH proc boot bin sbin usr bin usr sbin LD_LIBRARY_PATH proc boot lib usr lib 1ib d11 FEAE AE AE AE AAT AE AE AE AEE AEE AE AEE AE AE AE AE AEA AE AREA AEE AE AREA AEE AE AEE AEE AEE AE AEA AEE AEE REA ER EE NFS_REMOTE_FILESYSTEM This section is dependent on the NETWORK driver Don t forget to properly configure and run the nfsd daemon on the E remote file server substitute the hostname or IP address of your NFS server for nfs_server The server must be exporting HH usr qnx630 target qnx6 armle v7 HARA AT ARE AA A AEA EA HEAT AEA AE AEA A AAT AEA AEE AEA AEA HEAT AEA AE AEA AAA display_msg Mounting NFS filesystem waitfor dev socket 4 fs nfs3 nfs_server usr qnx630 target qnx6 armle v7 mnt session ksh type link bin sh proc boot ksh type link dev console dev serl type link tmp dev shmem HARA AT AE ARE AEA EA AEA E FE AEE AEE AE EA AEA AAT AEE AEE AEA HEA AEA AEE AEE EA AEA AAT AEE AEE AEA EA AEA AEE AEE EEA EA E uncomment for NFS_REMOTE_FILESYSTEM HAA AAT AAT AEE AE AEA EAE HEAT AEA AEE EE A EA AEA EAE AEE EEA EA AEA AEA AAA type link bin mnt bin type link sbin
64. directory shell The initial command to start after Login The default is bin sh La You can t specify any arguments to the login program Here s an sample entry from etc passwd fred x 290 120 Fred L Jones home fred bin sh etc group This file stores information about the groups on your system Each line in etc group is in this format groupname x group_ID username username The fields are separated by colons and include groupname The name of the group Like a user s name this can contain any characters except a colon but you should probably avoid any of the shell s special characters For more information see Quoting special characters p 63 in Using the Command Line The password for the group QNX Neutrino doesn t support group passwords group_ID The numeric group ID usernamel username Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 37 Managing User Accounts The user names of the accounts that belong to this group separated by commas Here s a sample entry techies x 123 michel ali sue jake etc shadow This file stores encrypted passwords Each line in etc shadow Is in this format username password 0 0 The fields are separated by colons and include username The user s login name password The user s encrypted password etc pwlock The passwd utility creates etc pwlock to indicate to other instances of passwd that the pas
65. dot dot The current directory dot dot The directory that this directory appears in So for example you could list the contents of the directory above your current working directory by typing LS s If your current directory is home fred my_apps favs you could list the contents of the root directory by typing E db A but the absolute path is much shorter and you don t have to figure out how many dot dots you need 0 Flash filesystems don t support and entries but the shell might resolve them before passing the path to the filesystem You can also set up hard links with these names on a flash filesystem A note about cd In some traditional UNIX systems the cd change directory command modifies the pathname given to it if that pathname contains symbolic links As a result the pathname of the new current working directory which you can display with pwd may differ from the one given to cd In QNX Neutrino however cd doesn t modify the pathname aside from collapsing references For example cd home dan test doc would result in a current working directory of home dan doc even if some of the elements in the pathname were symbolic links Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 81 Working with Files 82 No drive letters Unlike Microsoft Windows which represents drives as letters that precede pathnames e g C QNX Neutrino represents disk
66. drive Keep the backup in a safe location Ghost Images Some QNX Neutrino users have used ghost images for backups but we don t recommend them Partition information might not be restored properly causing filesystems to not boot correctly If you run fdisk again on the drive the drive reports incorrect information and fdisk writes incorrect data to the drive Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 287 Backing Up and Recovering Data Remote backups Remote backups are generally a much safer solution than storing a backup on a local system because a remote server is generally more reliable as the saying goes don t put all your eggs in one basket Depending on your situation it might make sense to buy a good system with lots of server grade hardware and then buy regular systems to develop on Make regular backups of your server Remote filesystems Storing a second backup on a remote system is often a simple yet effective way to prevent the loss of data For example if you have a basic archive of your code in a separate directory on your local system and then the hard disk breaks down for some unforeseen reason you ve lost your local backup as well Placing a copy on a remote filesystem effectively lowers the chance of losing data we highly recommend it If you place a file on a non QNX Neutrino filesystem you might lose the file s permissions Files under QNX Neutrino like other UNIX 9 systems have spe
67. drives as regular directories within the pathname space Directories that access another filesystem such as one on a second hard disk partition are called mountpoints Usually the primary disk based filesystem is mounted at the root of the pathname space A full QNX Neutrino installation mounts all additional disk filesystems automatically under the fs directory For example cdO hd0 qnx4 2 So while in a DOS based system a second partition on your hard drive might be accessed as D in a QNX Neutrino system you might access the second QNX 4 filesystem partition on the first hard drive as s hd0 qnx4 2 For more information on where to find things in a typical QNX Neutrino pathname space see Where everything is stored p 85 later in this chapter To learn more about mounting filesystems see Working with Filesystems p 145 Pathnames that begin with a dot Extensions When you list the contents of a directory the 1s utility usually hides files and directories whose names begin with a period Programs precede configuration files and directories with a period to hide them from view The files not surprisingly are called hidden files Other than the special treatment by 1s and some other programs nothing else is special about hidden files Use 1s a to list all files including any hidden ones Filename extensions something at the end of a filename tell programs and users what type of data a fil
68. e SS p 271 e Data server p 272 The embedded web server supports the Common Gateway Interface CGI 1 1 a readily available means of handling dynamic data The downside of CGI is that it s resource heavy because it often involves an interpreted language If you re using the CGI method you need to decide where to locate your cgi bin directory which contains all your CGI scripts To tell the embedded web server that you want to use the CGI method you need to use the HTTPD_SCRIPTALIAS environment variable to tell it where to find the CGI scripts and executables For example export HTTPD_SCRIPTALIAS usr www cgi bin If you define HTTPD_SCRIPTALIAS anybody can run scripts or processes that reside in that directory on your machine Therefore make sure you create a separate directory for these scripts to reside in Not defining HT TPD_SCRIPTALIAS turns CGI functionality off causing all CGI requests to fail Don t use bin or usr bin as your CGI directory Don t place any sensitive files in the cgi bin directory because doing so exposes them to anyone who uses the web server A Make sure that the files in the cgi bin directory can be executable by anybody but modifiable only by root by running chmod 755 on the files in the directory For example suppose HTTPD _SCRIPTALIAS contains usr www cgi bin as the name of the directory If Slinger gets a request for the resource www gqnx com cgi bin get_data cgi foo the get_data
69. entry Link to an entry in inodes which should be used The first directory entry is always for the dot link and includes a directory signature I QNX The hexadecimal equivalent of the character is 0x03 This entry refers to the directory itself by pointing to the entry within the parent directory that describes this directory The second entry is always for the dot dot link This entry refers to the parent directory by pointing to the first block of the parent directory 292 Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Links Extent blocks QNX 4 disk structure Every directory entry either defines a file or points to an entry within the inodes file Inode entries are used when the filename exceeds 16 characters or when two or more names are linked to a single file If you ve enabled support for long filenames the root directory of the filesystem also includes the 1ongfilenames file which stores information about files whose names are longer than 48 characters The first extent if any of a file is described in the directory inode entry Additional file extents require a linked list of extent blocks whose header is also in the directory inode entry Each extent block can hold location information for up to 60 extents Files with names greater than 16 characters and files that are inks to other files are implemented with a special form of directory entry These entries have the ONX4
70. few iterations show that html index a program that creates the keyword index for our online documentation gets up to 96 of the CPU When html index finishes running procnto and devb eide use the CPU while the HTML files are written Eventually procnto including the idle thread gets almost all of the CPU You might be alarmed that html index takes up to 96 of the CPU but it s actually a good thing if you re running only one program it should get most of the CPU time If your system is running several processes at once hogs could be more useful It can tell you which of the processes is using the most CPU and then you could adjust the priorities to favor the threads that are most important Remember that in QNX Neutrino priorities are a property of threads not of processes For more information see Priorities p 69 in the Using the Command Line chapter Here are some other tips to help you improve your system s performance e You can use pidin to get information about the processes that are running on your system For example you can get the arguments used when starting the Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 317 Fine Tuning Your System process the state of the process s threads and the memory that the process is using e The number of threads doesn t effect system reaction time as much as the number of threads at a given priority The key to performing realtime operations properly is to set up your
71. filesystem itself doesn t support hard or soft links or directories you can create a link to it by using process manager links For example you could create a link to a RAM based tmp directory In sP dev shmem tmp This tells procnto to create a process manager link to dev shmem known as tmp Most application programs can then open files under tmp as if it were a normal filesystem In order to minimize the size of the RAM filesystem code inside the process manager this filesystem specifically doesn t include big filesystem features Le such as e file locking e directories Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 149 Working with Filesystems e and entries for the current and parent directories e hard or soft links e protection from overwriting running executables A real filesystem gives an error of EBUSY if you try this in dev shmem the running executable will likely crash This is because being able to write to a shared memory object while somebody else has it open is the whole point of shared memory 150 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited QNX 4 filesystem QNX 4 filesystem The QNX 4 filesystem uses the same on disk structure as in the QNX 4 operating system This filesystem is implemented by the s qnx4 so shared object and is automatically loaded by the devb drivers when mounting a QNX 4 filesystem You can create a QNX disk partition by using the fdisk and d
72. following table lists possible set flags Has a set value of Card in Battery low Scheduled to be configured Not enough resources to configure card I O card or memory card Not configured Window is part of previous configuration Window is an unlockable window Window is a temporary window Machine booted from this device Locked exclusive locked read write Wide 16 bit memory access CONS CESTO PID The process ID of the process attached to the PC Card driver devp pcecard Base The base address of the PC Card This information is useful for starting device drivers Size The number of bytes in the I O port range IRQ 244 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited PCCARD and PCMCIA cards The PC Card s IRQ This information is useful when starting the driver manually Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 245 Connecting Hardware USB devices A Universal Serial Bus USB provides a hot swappable common interface for USB devices e g network input character I O audio and hubs For more information on USB USB specifications and a list of frequently asked questions see www usb org If you don t know what kind of USB device you re using you can use the usb utility to identify it usb vvv less The output from this command looks like this Device Address 2d Vendor 0x05c7 QTRONIX Product 0x2011 USB Keyboard and Mouse Device Release EL 2 USB Spec R
73. in the numeric user ID of your running programs and system resources determines your programs ability to access resources and perform operations such as sending signals to other processes Textual names are used only by utilities and applications that need to convert between names and numeric IDs 9 Changing user names groups user IDs and so on in the account database has no effect on your permission to access files etc until you next log in The root user user ID O has permission to do nearly anything to files regardless of their ownership and permission settings For more information see File ownership and permissions p 97 in Working with Files Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited What does a user account do When the shell interprets a username pathname it gets the user s home directory from etc passwad If you remove or change a user s account any shell running in the system that had previously accessed that user s home directory via username may be using the old home directory information to determine the actual path because the shell caches the data a New shells read the data afresh from etc passwd This may be a problem if a shell script that uses username invokes another shell script that also uses this feature the two scripts would operate on different paths if the home directory information associated with the user name has changed since the first shell looked the info
74. in a controlled fashion over a LAN File access calls from a client are converted to CIFS protocol requests and are sent to the server over the network The server receives the request performs the actual filesystem operation and then sends a response back to the client CIFS runs on top of TCP IP and uses DNS The fs cifs filesystem manager is a CIFS client operating over TCP IP To use it you must have an SMB server and a valid login on that server The fs cifs utility is primarily intended for use as a client with Windows machines although it also works with any SMB server such as OS 2 Peer LAN Manager and SAMBA The fs cifs filesystem manager requires a TCP IP transport layer such as the one provided by io pkt For information about passwords and some examples see fs cifs in the Utilities Reference If you want to start a CIFS filesystem when you boot your system put the appropriate command in etc host_cfg SHOSTNAME rc d rc local or etc rc d rc local Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 165 Working with Filesystems NFS filesystem Setting up NFS NFS server 166 The Network File System NFS protocol is a TCP IP application that supports networked filesystems It provides transparent access to shared filesystems across networks NFS lets a client workstation operate on files that reside on a server across a variety of NFS compliant operating systems File access calls from a client are conve
75. in addition to UDF For information about UDF see Y Universal Disk Format UDF filesystem p 169 later in this chapter 162 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Linux Ext2 filesystem Linux Ext2 filesystem The Ext2 filesystem provided in QNX Neutrino provides transparent access to Linux disk partitions Not all Ext2 features are supported including the following file fragments subblock allocation large files greater than 2 GB filetype extension compression B tree directories The fs ext2 so shared object provides filesystem support for Ext2 This shared object is automatically loaded by the devb drivers when mounting an Ext2 filesystem Although Ext2 is the main filesystem for Linux systems we don t recommend that you use fs ext2 so as a replacement for the QNX 4 filesystem Y Currently we don t support booting from Ext2 partitions Also the Ext2 filesystem relies heavily on its filesystem checker to maintain integrity this and other support utilities e g mke2fs aren t currently available for QNX Neutrino If an Ext2 filesystem isn t unmounted properly a filesystem checker is usually responsible for cleaning up the next time the filesystem is mounted Although the fs ext2 so module is equipped to perform a quick test it automatically mounts the filesystem as read only if it detects any significant problems which should be fixed using a filesystem checker This fi
76. in doubt try all ser entries with qtalk For more information see Testing Modems p 265 below If the modem isn t detected seek out the isapnp utility to configure the modem s 1 0 port and IRQ and then specify them when you start devc ser8250 If you start a serial driver for a UART or modem when another serial driver is already running you need to use the u option to give the new driver a number to append to the device name so that it doesn t conflict with any existing dev ser entry PCl based modems The devc ser8250 driver should automatically detect the modem which should appear in the dev directory as serx where x is an integer If no entry is created check the output from pci vvv and see what I O port and IRQ are assigned to the modem Use the correct I O port and IRQ from pci vvv to start devc ser8250 When you use the appropriate I O port and IRQ the dev directory entry gets created for you External modems External modems are easy to set up Look in the dev directory for the serial port that the modem is attached to You ll attach this at the back of the system If you know the modem is attached to serial port 1 then look in the dev directory for ser1 Testing modems You can use qtalk to test your modem 1 Make sure the modem is plugged into the phone line Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 265 Connecting Hardware 2 Use the stty command to set the modem s baud rate
77. instead For example devb eide options anx4 options amp This should create a block special file called dev hd0 that represents the entire hard disk 3 Run fdisk Running the fdisk utility will immediately give you useful information about the state of your hard disk The fdisk utility might report one of several types of problems Problem Probable cause Error reading block 1 Either the disk controller If the disk is good or the hard disk itself has replacing the controller failed card might let you continue using the disk Otherwise you ll have to replace the hard drive reinstall QNX Neutrino 302 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Wrong disk parameters Bad partition information What to do if your system will no longer boot Probable cause Your hardware has probably lost ts information about this hard drive likely because the battery for the CMOS memory is running low If the disk size is reported correctly by fdisk but the partition information is wrong then the data in and restore your files from backup Rerunning the hardware setup procedure or the programmable option select procedure on a PS 2 will normally clear this up Of course replacing the battery will make this a more permanent fix Use fdisk to recreate the correct partition information It s a good idea to write down or print block 1 of the physical out a hard copy of the disk has
78. interpret it in turn 1 The driver for your character device interprets such keys as Backspace and Ctrl C 2 The command interpreter or shell breaks the command line into tokens interprets them and then invokes any utilities 3 The utilities parse the command line that the shell passes to them and then they perform the appropriate actions 50 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Character device drivers Character device drivers When you type a command the first process that interprets it is the character device driver The driver that you use depends on your hardware for more information see the entries for the devc character I O drivers in the Utilities Reference O Some keys may behave differently from how they re described here depending on how you configure your system For more information see Character I O in the System Architecture guide Input modes Character device drivers run in either raw input mode or canonical or edited input mode In raw input mode each character is submitted to an application process as it s received in edited input mode the application process receives characters only after a whole line has been entered usually signalled by a carriage return Terminal support Some programs such as vi need to know just what your terminal can do so that they can move the cursor clear the screen and so on The TERMenvironment variable indicates the type of termin
79. is used in setting up proper ownership of files in the spooling area for 1prrm Users can t modify control files Control files in a spooling area are made with daemon ownership and group ownership daemon Their mode is 0660 This ensures that users can t modify control files and that no user can remove files except through lprrm Users may alter files in the spool directory only via the print utilities The spooling programs 1pd lprq and 1prrm run setuid to root and setgid to group dae mon to access spool files and printers Local access to queues is controlled with the rg entry in the etc printcap file rg lprgroup Users must be in the group 1prgroup to submit jobs to the specified printer The default is to allow all users access Note that once the files are in the local queue they can be printed locally or forwarded to another host depending on the configuration The print manager authenticates all remote clients The method used is the same as the authentication scheme for rshd see the Utilities Reference The host on which a client resides must be present in etc hosts equiv or etc hosts 1pd and the request message must come from a reserved port number Other utilities such as rlogin also use etc hosts equiv to determine which hosts are equivalent The etc hosts 1pd file is used only to control which hosts have access to the printers To allow access only to those remote users with accounts on the l
80. last Sunday in The first Sunday in October November While the standard rule changed across all states US states still have the right not to observe daylight saving time as per the Uniform Time Act of 1966 For information about American time zones see http www time gov Canada changed its time zones in a similar way for more information see http www nrc cnrc gc ca eng services time index html The calculation of local time in QNX Neutrino isn t sophisticated enough to apply the old rules before March 1 2007 and the new rules after that The setting you use for TZ applies to a local times The library interprets a short time zone specification e g EST5EDT according to the new rules Let s look at some examples of time zones As mentioned above the library interprets the short specifications of North American time zones according to the rules that went into effect March 1 2007 Eastern time Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Setting the time zone The default time zone is Eastern time the short specification is ESTS5EDT The full specification is EST5EDT4 M3 2 0 02 00 00 M11 1 0 02 00 00 Both are interpreted as follows e Eastern Standard Time is 5 hours earlier than Coordinated Universal Time UTC Standard time and daylight saving time both apply to this locale e By default Eastern Daylight Time EDT is one hour ahead of st
81. lastlogin 91 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited QNX Neutrino RTOS lock 206 longfilenames 152 153 293 profile 113 118 354 example of 354 pwlock 36 38 43 rhosts 194 63 140 63 061 61 80 82 85 pathname separator 80 root directory 80 82 85 dev 83 etc directory 90 See also individual files 59 63 137 gt gt gt redirection 62 62 67 140 pipe 62 140 utility syntax 67 34 59 home directory 34 59 60 60 1 file extension 104 1003 1e and 1003 2c POSIX drafts withdrawn 100 A a file extension 104 absolute pathnames 80 Access Control Lists ACLs 100 account center myQNX 345 accounts user 27 33 41 43 adding 41 managing 41 removing 43 ACL_GROUP 100 ACL_GROUP_OBJ 100 ACL_MASK 100 ACL_OTHER 100 ACL_USER 100 ACL_USER_OBJ 100 ACLs Access Control Lists 100 address space 93 342 344 limits 342 344 adduser UNIX command 20 administrator system 28 AH Authentication Header 312 aliases 59 119 355 examples 355 setting 119 altboot file 85 290 291 379 Index ansi terminal type 51 Apple Macintosh HFS and HFS Plus 170 340 applications 28 profiling 28 ar 104 archives 70 104 281 282 283 compressing 283 creating 70 281 decompressing 283 extracting from 282 library 104 arithmetical expressions 60 ARM 86 344 directories 86 limits 344 arrow keys 52 65 as 104 ASC_MEDIA_NOT_PRESENT 234 ASCII text files 104 assembly language
82. limited to 2 GB 1 bytes This in turn limits the size of a directory because the file that stores the directory s information is limited to 2 GB 1 bytes Querying filesystem limits You can query the path specific configuration limits to determine some of the properties and limits of a specific filesystem _PC_LINK_MAX Maximum value of a file s link count _PC_MAX_ CANON Maximum number of bytes in a terminal s canonical input buffer edit buffer _PC_MAX_INPUT Maximum number of bytes in a terminal s raw input buffer _PC_NAME_MAX Maximum number of bytes in a filename not including the terminating null _PC_PATH_MAX Maximum number of bytes in a pathname not including the terminating null _PC_PIPE_BUF Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 333 Understanding System Limits Maximum number of bytes that can be written atomically when writing to a pipe _PC_CHOWN_RESTRICTED If defined not 1 indicates that the use of the chown function is restricted to a process with appropriate privileges and to changing the group ID of a file to the effective group ID of the process or to one of its supplementary group IDs _PC_NO_TRUNC If defined not 1 indicates that the use of pathname components longer than the value given by _PC_NAME_MAX will generate an error _PC_VDISABLE If defined not 1 this is the character value that can be used to individually disable special control characters in
83. limits on 343 consoles 29 51 53 76 87 130 253 driver starting 53 mounting 87 switching 53 terminal type setting 51 76 130 virtual 53 control characters disabling 334 controllers 230 type determining 230 conventions 67 177 node names 177 utility syntax 67 Coordinated Universal Time See UTC copy DOS command 71 copy on write COW 157 copying command line 57 382 cp 61 70 103 281 355 and access control lists ACLs 103 interactive mode 355 cpio 277 281 cpp file extension 104 CPU 316 317 344 limits 344 usage by processes 316 317 CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check 180 263 301 creat 321 cron 20 css file extension 104 ctime ctime_r 129 current directory 58 66 70 81 153 292 PATH 66 changing 70 determining 58 70 cursor 52 moving 52 cut 173 cutting command line 57 cyberattacks 308 Cyclic Redundancy Check See CRC D daemons 193 194 206 file transfer 193 trivial 193 Internet 193 Internet boot protocol 194 Internet domain names 194 line printer 194 login remote 193 network routing tables 194 NFS server 194 printer 206 shell remote 193 system status tables 194 terminal session remote 193 data 277 299 ensuring integrity of 277 299 recovering 299 data server 272 data sharing 272 date 71 124 DOS version 71 DATE DOS variable 73 date setting 124 daylight 129 daylight saving time 129 days leap 125 dcheck 297 dcmd_blk h 324 DCMD_FSYS_FILE_FLAGS 159 DCMD_FSYS_PREGROW_
84. obvious limit is misleading describing all of the interactions can be complicated The key thing to remember while reading this chapter is that there can be many factors behind a limit Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 331 Understanding System Limits Configurable limits 332 When you re trying to determine your system s limits you can get the values of configurable limits special read only variables that store system information QNX Neutrino also supports configuration strings which are similar to and frequently used in conjunction with environment variables For more information see the Configuring Your Environment p 115 chapter You can use the POSIX get conf utility to get the value of a configurable limit or a configuration string Since getconf is a POSIX utility scripts that use it instead of hard coded QNX Neutrino specific limits can adapt to other POSIX environments Some configurable limits are associated with a path their names start with _PC_ When you get the value of these limits you must provide the path see Filesystem limits p 333 below For example to get the maximum length of the filename type getconf _PC_NAME MAX pathname Other limits are associated with the entire system their names start with _SC_ You don t have to provide a path when you get their values For example to get the maximum number of files that a process can have open type getconf _SC
85. of 64 bytes If possible you should use fs nfs3 instead of fs nfs2 The fs nfs2 or fs nfs3 filesystem manager is also the NFS 2 or NFS 3 client daemon operating over TCP IP To use it you must have an NFS server and you must be running a TCP IP transport layer such as that provided by io pkt It also needs socket so and libc so You can create NFS mountpoints with the mount command by specifying nfs for the type and o ver3 as an option You must start fs nfs3 or fs nfs3 before creating mountpoints in this manner If you start s nfs2 or fs nfs3 without any arguments it runs in the background so you can use mount To make the request the client uses the mount utility as in the following examples e Mount an NFS 2 client filesystem s nfs2 must be running first mount t nfs 10 1 0 22 home mnt home Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 167 Working with Filesystems e Mount an NFS 3 client filesystem s nfs3 must be running first mount t nfs o ver3 server_node qnx_bin bin In the first example the client requests that the home directory on an IP host be mounted onto the local namespace as mnt home In the second example NFS protocol version 3 is used for the network filesystem Here s another example of a command line that starts and mounts the client fs nfs3 10 7 0 197 home bob homedir Although NFS 2 is older than POSIX it was designed to emulate UNIX fil
86. of a directory or some other critical block Again the utilities we ve provided can help you determine the extent of such damage You can often rebuild the filesystem in such a way as to avoid the damaged areas In this case some data will be lost but with some effort you can recover a large portion of the affected data 278 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Backup strategies Backup strategies Your backup strategy will consist of making one or more backups on a periodic or triggered basis For each backup you incorporate in your strategy you have to choose e the storage media and location of the backup data e how to archive and optionally compress your data e the contents and frequency or trigger condition of the backup e automated versus manual backup e local versus remote control of the backup Often a comprehensive backup strategy incorporates some backups on the local side i e controlled and stored on the same machine that the data is located on and others that copy data to a remote machine For example you might automatically back up a developer s data to a second hard drive partition on a daily basis and have a central server automatically back up the developer s data to a central location on a weekly basis Choosing backup storage media and location Early in the process of determining your backup strategy you re likely to choose the location of your data backups and the media to store th
87. on multicore systems with up to 32 processors for more information see the Multicore Processing User s Guide QNX Neutrino also features the Qnet protocol which provides transparent distributed processing you can access the files or processes on any machine on your network as if they were on your own machine A resource manager is a server program that accepts messages from other programs and optionally communicates with hardware All of the QNX Neutrino device drivers and filesystems are implemented as resource managers QNX Neutrino resource managers are responsible for presenting an interface to various types of devices This may involve managing actual hardware devices such as serial ports parallel ports network cards and disk drives or virtual devices such as dev nul1 the network filesystem and pseudo ttys The binding between the resource manager and the client programs that use the associated resource is done through a flexible mechanism called pathname space mapping In pathname space mapping an association is made between a pathname and a resource manager The resource manager sets up this mapping by informing the QNX Neutrino process manager that it s responsible for handling requests at or below in the case of filesystems a certain mountpoint This allows the process manager to associate services i e functions provided by resource managers with pathnames Once the resource manager has established its pathname
88. open file to remain in use even though it has been completely unlinked This behavior is part of that stipulated by POSIX and common UNIX practice Directory links Although you can t create hard links to directories each directory has two hard coded links already built in e dot e dot dot The filename dot refers to the current directory dot dot refers to the previous or parent directory in the hierarchy Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 153 Working with Filesystems Note that if there s no predecessor dot dot also refers to the current directory For example the dot dot entry of is simply you can t go further up the path There s no POSIX requirement for a filesystem to include or entries some filesystems including flash filesystems and dev shmem don t Symbolic links A symbolic link or symlink is a special file that usually has a pathname as its data When the symbolic link is named in an I O request by open for example the link portion of the pathname is replaced by the link s data and the path is reevaluated Symbolic links are a flexible means of pathname indirection and are often used to provide multiple paths to a single file Unlike hard links symbolic links can cross filesystems and can also link to directories You can use the 1n utility to create a symlink In the following example the directories net node
89. pci bios devb eide slogger ksh devc con mount Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 353 Examples profile The system runs your profile whenever you log in When you create a new user account the user s initial profile is copied from etc skel profile see Managing User Accounts p 33 Here s what s in that file default profile if test S tty not a tty then echo edit the file profile if you want to change your environment fi This profile runs the tty utility to get the name of the terminal that s open as standard input If there is a terminal profile simply displays a helpful hint You might want to set some environment variables EDITOR The path to your favorite editor the default is vi ENV The name of the profile that ksh should run whenever you start a shell 354 Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Kkshrc kshrc Here s an example of a profile that ksh runs if you set the ENV environment variable as described above for profile alias rm rm i alias 11 l1s 1 export PS1 pwd This profile does the following e Uses an alias to turn on interactive mode for the rm command In interactive mode rm asks you for confirmation before it deletes the file The cp and mv commands also support this mode e Creates an alias 11 that runs 1s with the I set This gives a long listing that includes the size of the files the permissions and s
90. ping utility to determine if you re connected to other hosts For example ping isp com On success ping displays something like this PING isp com 10 0 0 1 56 data bytes 64 bytes from 10 0 0 1 icmp_seq 0 ttl 255 time 0 ms 64 bytes from 10 0 0 1 icmp_seq 1 ttl1 255 time 0 ms 64 bytes from 10 0 0 1 icmp_seq 2 tt1 255 time 0 ms 64 bytes from 10 0 0 1 icmp_seg 3 ttl 255 time 0 ms 64 bytes from 10 0 0 1 icmp_seq 4 ttl 255 time 0 ms 64 bytes from 10 0 0 1 icmp_seg 5 ttl 255 time 0 ms 64 bytes from 10 0 0 1 icmp_seq 6 ttl 255 time 0 ms This report continues until you terminate ping for example by pressing Ctrl C Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Troubleshooting How do display information about an interface controller Use the nicinfo command usr sbin nicinfo device If you aren t logged in as root you have to specify the full path to nicinfo This utility displays information about the given network interface connection or dev io net eno if you don t specify one The information includes the number of packets transmitted and received collisions and other errors as follows 3COM 90xC 10BASE T 100BASE TX Ethernet Controller Physical Node ID 14544485 20020020 000103 E8433F Current Physical Node ID miii 000103 E8433F Media Rate e o A 10 00 Mb s half duplex UTP M O 2 1514 NE 0 1 0 Port Range emos eies egiie ei 0xA800 gt 0xA87F Hardware IMESPEUDE ceseco 0x7 Pronit u
91. shell does the following substitutions in this order directories tilde expansion parameters commands arithmetical expressions braces Aut WY filename generation Let s look at these in more detail Directories tilde expansion The shell interprets the tilde character as a reference to a user s home directory The characters between the tilde and the next slash if any are interpreted as the name of a user Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 59 Using the Command Line For example mary some_file refers to some_file in the home directory of the user named mary If you don t specify a user name it s assumed to be yours so some_file refers to some_file in your home directory Your home directory is defined in your entry in the password database see the description of etc passwd p 36 in Managing User Accounts Parameters To include the value of a parameter on the command line put a dollar sign before the parameter s name For example to display the value of your PATH environment variable type echo PATH Commands Sometimes you might want to execute a command and use the results of the command in another command You can do it like this command or with the older form using backquotes command For example to search all of your C files for a given string type grep string find name c The find command searches the given d
92. should however establish benchmarks for key activities in your environment and then adjust these values for optimal performance 328 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited How small can you get How small can you get How can you reduce the size of your system The best way to reduce the size of your system is to use our IDE to create an OS image The System Builder perspective includes a tool called the Dietician that can help slim down the libraries included in the image For more information see the IDE User s Guide as well as Building Embedded Systems Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 329 Chapter 18 Understanding System Limits Resources on a system tend to be finite alas and some are more limited than others This chapter describes some of the limits on a QNX Neutrino system Let s start by considering the limits on describing limits QNX Neutrino is a microkernel OS so many things that might be a core limit in some operating systems instead depend on the particular manager that implements that service under QNX Neutrino especially for filesystems where there are multiple possible filesystems Many resources depend on how much memory is available Other limits depend on your target system For example the virtual address space for a process can vary by processor it s 2 GB on ARM and 3 5 GB on x86 Some limits are a complex interaction between many things To quote the simple
93. somehow been correct partition damaged information in case you ever have to do this step 4 Mount the partition and the filesystem At this point you have verified that the hardware is working at least for block 1 and that a valid partition is defined for the QNX Neutrino RTOS You now need to create a block special file for the QNX 4 partition itself and to mount the block special file as a QNX 4 filesystem mount e dev hd0 mount dev hd0t79 hd This should create a volume called dev hd0t 79 Depending on the state of the QNX 4 partition the mount may or may not fail If the partition information is correct there shouldn t be any problem Since the root already exists on a CD or on a remote disk on the network we ve mounted the local hard disk partition as a filesystem with the name hd Your goal now would be to run the chkfsys utility on the disk to examine and possibly fix the filesystem If you booted from CD and you don t suspect there s any damage to the filesystem on your hard disk e g the system was unable to boot because of a simple error introduced in the boot file or system initialization file you can Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 303 Backing Up and Recovering Data see up a symbolic link to your hard disk partition in the process manager s in memory prefix tree ln sP hd If you run this command you can skip the rest of this section If the mount fails
94. that with frames smaller than 64 bytes the NIC can t detect the error Generally if you experience late collisions with large frames on your network you re very likely also experiencing late collisions with small frames These types of errors are generally caused by Ethernet cables that are longer than that allowed by the IEEE 802 3 specification or are the maximum size permitted by the particular type of cable or by an excessive amount of repeaters on the network between the two nodes Another thing to note is that these errors may actually be caused by a node on the network that has faulty hardware and is sending damaged frames that look like collision fragments These damaged frames can sometimes appear to a network card to be a late collision Transmits aborted excessive collisions This error occurs if there are excessive collisions on the network The network card gives up on transmitting the frame after 16 collisions This generally means that the network is jammed and is too busy Routers also give up on transmitting a frame if they experience excessive collisions but instead of alerting the original transmitter routers simply discard pe the frame Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 261 Connecting Hardware 262 If these sort of errors are being experienced see if the network can be reduced or introduce a strategically placed switch into the network to help eliminate the number of packets that
95. the appropriate command in etc host_cfg SHOSTNAME rc d rc local or etc rc d rc local An NFS server handles requests from NFS clients that want to access filesystems as NFS mountpoints For the server to work you need to start the following programs Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited NFS filesystem Purpose Remote procedure call RPC server NFS server and mount d daemon The rpcbind server maps RPC program version numbers into TCP and UDP port numbers Clients can make RPC calls only if rpcbind Is running on the server The nfsd daemon reads the etc exports file which lists the filesystems that can be exported and optionally specifies which clients those filesystems can be exported to If no client is specified any requesting client is given access The nfsd daemon services both NFS mount requests and NFS requests as specified by the exports file Upon startup nfsd reads the etc exports hostname file or if this file doesn t exist etc exports to determine which mountpoints to service Changes made to this file don t take affect until you restart nfsd NFS client An NFS client requests that a filesystem exported from an NFS server be grafted onto its local namespace For the client to work you need to first start the version 2 or 3 of the NFS filesystem manager fs nfs2 or fs nfs3 The file handle in version 2 is a fixed size array of 32 bytes With version 3 it s a variable length array
96. the data that you want to burn to a CD You can do this with mkisofs a utility that s included with cdrecord Before you can create an ISO image you need to arrange the files into the directory structure that you want to have on the CD Then use mkisofs like this mkisofs 1 f f joliet quiet V My Label o my_iso_image iso This command creates an ISO image named my_iso_image iso with the label My Label using the Joliet file format allowing full 31 character filenames 1 following all symbolic links when generating the filesystem f and generating SUSP and RR records using the Rock Ridge protocol r Once you ve created the ISO image you can send the image to a system that can burn an ISO image or you can burn it using cdrecord cdrecord v speed 2 dev dev cd0 my_iso_image iso This command burns a CD at dual speed 2 using the CD burner called cdo from the ISO image called my_iso_image iso For more information see the documentation for cdrecord For a list of supported CD drives see the README file that comes with the cdrecord source code Bootable CDs You can also make the CD bootable using cdrecord and its associated utilities as follows Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 285 Backing Up and Recovering Data 286 Create a bootable floppy that calls the needed scripts and includes the needed binaries in the image Make an image of the floppy using the dd
97. the minimum necessary amount of initialization After gathering information about the system the startup code transfers control to the OS static linking The process whereby you combine your programs with the modules from the library to form a single executable that s entirely self contained The word static implies that it s not going to change a the required modules are already combined into one Contrast runtime loading superuser The root user which can do anything on your system The superuser has what Windows calls administrator s rights symbolic link A special file that usually has a pathname as its data Symbolic links are a flexible means of pathname indirection and are often used to provide multiple paths to a single file Unlike hard links symbolic links can cross filesystems and can also create links to directories system page area An area in the kernel that is filled by the startup code and contains information about the system number of bytes of memory location of serial ports etc This is also called the SYSPAGE area thread The schedulable entity under QNX Neutrino A thread is a flow of execution it exists within the context of a process timer Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited A kernel object used in conjunction with time based functions A timer is created via timer_create and armed via timer_settime A timer can then deliver an event either periodically or on a one
98. the printer can t be opened Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Printing with lpr or the destination machine can t be reached the job remains queued until the work can be completed 1prg show printer queue The 1prq program works recursively backwards displaying the queue of the machine with the printer and then the queue s of the machine s that lead to it This utility has these forms of output e short format the default gives a single line of output per queued job e long format if you specify the I option shows the list and sizes of files that comprise a job lprrm remove jobs from a queue The lprrm command deletes jobs from a spooling queue If necessary lprrm first kills a running daemon that s servicing the queue and restarts it after the required files are removed When removing jobs destined for a remote printer 1prrm acts like lpra except it first checks locally for jobs to remove and then tries to remove files in queues off machine You can remove only your own print jobs from the queue 1prc printer control program The lprc program is used to control the operation of the line printer system For each printer configured in etc printcap 1pre may be used to e disable or enable a printer e disable or enable a printer s spooling queue e rearrange the order of jobs in a spooling queue e find the status of printers and their associated spooling queues and printer daemons
99. the system in text mode use the shutdown command You can do this only if you re logged in as root This utility has several options that let you e name the node to shut down default is the current node e specify the type of shutdown default is to reboot e shut down quickly e list the actions taken while shutting down i e be verbose Before the shutdown program shuts down the system it sends a SIGTERM signal to any running processes to give them the opportunity to terminate cleanly For more information see the Utilities Reference Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Chapter 3 Managing User Accounts This chapter explains how user accounts work how users can change their password by using the passwd utility and how system administrators can use the passwd utility and edit account database files to create and maintain users accounts In embedded systems the designer may choose to eliminate the account related files from the system disabling logins and references to users and groups by name even though the system remains fully multiuser and may have multiple 9 numeric user IDs running programs and owning system resources If your system is configured this way most of this chapter won t be relevant to you Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Managing User Accounts What does a user account do A user account associates a textual user name with a numeric user ID and group ID
100. the termios control structure For more information see Configurable limits p 332 above QNX 4 filesystem The limits for QNX 4 filesystems include Filename length 48 bytes or 505 if 1longfilenames exists before mounting see Filenames p 152 in the description of the QNX 4 filesystem in Working with Filesystems Pathname length 1024 bytes File size 2GB 1 Directory size No practical limit although the files that the directory uses to manage its contents are limited to 2 GB 1 bytes which works out to approximately 33 million files in a single directory You wouldn t want to do that though as directory scans are linear they d be very slow Filesystem size 2 GB x 512 limited by the disk driver Disk size 334 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Filesystem limits ges bytes limited by the disk driver Maximum user and group ID for chgrp or chown 65534 Power Safe s qnx6 so filesystem The limits for Power Safe filesystems supported by fs qnx6 so include Physical disk sector 32 bit 2 TB using the devb API Logical filesystem block 512 1024 2048 or 4096 set when you initially format the filesystem Maximum filename length 510 bytes UTF 8 If the filename is less than 28 bytes long it s stored in the directory entry if it s longer it s stored in an external file and the directory entry points to the name Maximum file size 64 bit addressing
101. this node in the network A hostname can consist only of letters numbers and hyphens and must not start or end with a hyphen For more information see RFC 952 If you change this configuration string be sure you also change the HOSTNAME environment variable The hostname utility always gives the value of the _CS_HOSTNAME configuration string _CS_HW_PROVIDER The name of the hardware s manufacturer 122 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Configuration strings _CS_HW_SERIAL The serial number associated with the hardware _CS_LIBPATH The default path for locating shared objects For more information see Setting PATH and LD LIBRARY PATH p 120 _CS_LOCALE The locale string _CS_MACHINE The type of hardware the OS is running on _CS_PATH The default path for finding system utilities For more information see Setting PATH and LD LIBRARY PATH p 120 _CS_RELEASE The current release level of the OS _CS_RESOLVE An in memory version of the etc resolv conf file excluding the domain name _CS_SRPC_DOMAIN The secure RPC Remote Procedure Call domain _CS_SYSNAME The name of the OS _CS_TIMEZONE An alternate source to the TZ for time zone information For more information see Setting the time zone p 124 below _CS_VERSION The version of the OS Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 123 Configuring Your Environment Setting th
102. to a given location and read data These operations must be performed in an atomic manner otherwise another thread could preempt the original thread and move the file position to a different location thus causing the original thread to read data from the second thread s position BIOS ROM Monitor extension signature A certain sequence of bytes indicating to the BIOS or ROM Monitor that the device is to be considered an extension to the BIOS or ROM Monitor control is to be transferred to the device by the BIOS or ROM Monitor with the expectation that the device will perform additional initializations On the x86 architecture the two bytes 0x55 and 0xAA must be present in that order as the first two bytes in the device with control being transferred to offset 0x0003 budget In sporadic scheduling the amount of time a thread is permitted to execute at its normal priority before being dropped to its low priority buildfile A text file containing instructions for mkifs specifying the contents and other details of an image or for mkefs specifying the contents and other details of an embedded filesystem image canonical mode Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 363 Glossary 364 Also called edited mode or cooked mode In this mode the character device library performs line editing operations on each received character Only when a line is completely entered typically when a carriage return
103. to escape the meaning of the special characters e g less my file orless my file For information about the other characters that you need to quote see Quoting special characters p 63 How do I work with a file whose name starts with a hyphen QNX Neutrino utilities use the hyphen to denote an option e g head n 10 some_file If you create a file whose name starts with a hyphen and you pass that filename as an argument to a utility the utility parses the filename as one or more options Most utilities recognize a double hyphen to mean end of options Put this before your filename head my_file For more information see the Utility Conventions chapter in the Utilities Reference Why do I get a Unrecognized TERM type message when start programs such as vi Either your TERM environment variable isn t set correctly or there isn t an entry for your terminal type in usr lib terminfo or possibly etc termcap see Terminal support p 51 earlier in this chapter Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Chapter 5 Working with Files In a QNX Neutrino system almost everything is a file devices data and even services are all typically represented as files This lets you work with local and remote resources easily from the command line or through any program that works with files This chapter concentrates on working with files in the Power Safe filesystem fs q
104. to pregrow the inodes file which eliminates the runtime window of manipulating its metadata during a potential power loss e Big directories are slower than small ones because the filesystem uses a linear search Performance and robustness When you design or configure a filesystem you have to balance performance and robustness e Robustness involves synchronizing the user operations to the implementation of that operation to the successful response to the user For example the creation of a new file via creat may perform all the physical disk writes that are necessary to add that new filename into a directory on the disk filesystem and only then reply back to the client e Performance may decouple the actual implementation of the operation from the reply For example writing data into a file via write might immediately reply to the client but leave the data in a write behind in memory cache in an attempt to merge with later writes and construct a large contiguous run for a single sequential disk access but until that occurs the data is vulnerable to loss if the power fails You must decide on the balance between robustness and performance that s appropriate for your installation expectations and requirements Metadata updates Metadata is data about data or all the overhead and attributes involved in storing the user data itself such as the name of a file the physical blocks it uses modification and access
105. underlying filesystems A desktop QNX Neutrino system starts the appropriate block filesystems on booting you start other filesystems as standalone managers The default block filesystem is the Power Safe filesystem p 157 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 145 Working with Filesystems Setting up starting and stopping a block filesystem When you boot your machine the system detects partitions on the block I O devices and automatically starts the appropriate filesystem for each partition You aren t likely ever to need to stop or restart a block filesystem if you change any of the filesystem s options you can use the e or u option to the mount command to update the filesystem If you need to change any of the options associated with the block I O device you can slay the appropriate devb driver being careful not to pull the carpet from under your feet and restart it but you ll need to explicitly mount any of the filesystems on it To determine how much free space you have on a filesystem use the df command For more information see the Utilities Reference Some filesystems have the concept of being marked as dirty This can be used to skip an intensive filesystem check the next time it starts up The QNX 4 and Ext2 filesystems have a flag bit the DOS filesystem has some magic bits in the FAT By default when you mount a filesystem as read write that flag is set when you cleanly unmount the file
106. usb has appeared before you start the driver For example io usb dohci waitfor dev io usb io usb devu prn 3 When the stack is running start the device drivers as described below USB hubs don t need a driver the stack itself supports them For a USB printer start the USB stack and then devu prn For example io usb dohci waitfor dev io usb io usb devu prn Once you ve done this follow the instructions in the Printing p 203 chapter in this guide For USB touchscreens start the USB stack then io hid loading the devh usb so driver Then start devi microtouch io hid dusb devi microtouch microtouch touchusb Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited USB devices Ethernet adapters For Ethernet adapters start the USB stack then io pkt loading the appropriate driver For example to start the driver for a Kawasaki based USB Ethernet adapter do the following io usb dohci waitfor dev io usb io usb io pkt v4 dklsi options Mass storage devices The devb umass driver supports devices that follow the Mass Storage Class Specification You can determine that the device is suitable by looking for the following information in the output from usb vv Mass Storage Class 08h SubClass Code Command Block Specification 01h Reduced Block Command RBC 02h SFF 8020i MMC 2 ATAPI 04h UFI 05h SFF 8070i 06h SCSI transparent Protocol Code Protocol Implementation 0
107. use the VISUAL or EDITOR environment variable or both to determine which editor to use the default is vi Historically you used EDITOR to specify a line oriented editor and VISUAL to specify a fullscreen editor Applications might use one or or both of these variables Some applications that use both use VISUAL in preference to EDITOR when a fullscreen editor is required or EDITOR in preference to VISUAL when a line oriented editor is required Few modern applications invoke line oriented editors and few users set EDITOR to one so you can t rely on applications to give preference one way or the other For most uses we recommend that you set VISUAL and EDITOR to the same value Once you ve tried various editors you can set these environment variables so that your favorite editor becomes the default At the command line prompt type export VISUAL path export EDITOR path where path is the path to the executable for the editor To check the value of the EDITOR environment variable type echo SEDITOR You ll likely want to set these variables in your profile SHOME profile so that they re set whenever you log in For more information see SHOME profile p 118 in Configuring Your Environment Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 113 Chapter 7 Configuring Your Environment The Controlling How QNX Neutrino Starts chapter describes what happens when you boot your system and what you can do to
108. you recall commands that you ve previously entered use the up and down arrows to move through the history buffer You can edit the command if you wish and then press Enter to reexecute it The shell also includes a builtin c command that you can use to display and edit previous commands as well as an r alias to fc that reexecutes a previous command For example E string reexecutes the last command that starts with the given string Shell scripts You can enter shell commands into a text file called a shell script and then invoke the commands in batch mode by executing or shelling the file For more information see the Writing Shell Scripts chapter in this guide Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 65 Using the Command Line Utilities Once the shell has processed all of its special characters what remains typically consists of commands and the arguments to them Most commands correspond to executable files somewhere on your system although some such as cd are built into the shell Give us the tools and we will finish the job Sir Winston Churchill It s possible for you to have more than one executable file with the same name on your system The shell uses the PATH environment variable to determine which version to use The value of PATH is a list of directories separated by colons in the order in which you want the shell to search for executables To see the value of your PATH
109. 0h Control Bulk Interrupt with command completion interrupt 01h Control Bulk Interrupt with no command completion interrupt 50h Bulk Only Transport To use a USB mass storage device on a QNX Neutrino system start io usb as described above then the devb umass driver By default this driver creates an entry for disk based devices in dev in the form dev hdn where n is the drive number Once you ve started the driver you can treat the device like a disk For example for a mass storage device that uses the UHCI controller type io usb d uhci devb umass cam pnp Troubleshooting No device is created in dev The device might not conform to the Mass Storage Class Specification Check the output from usb vv No an device was created in dev for a floppy drive Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 249 Connecting Hardware The default name is dev hdn You can use the name command line option to cam disk so to override the prefix 250 Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Character devices Character devices General serial adapters By default a serial port driver automatically detects the I O port and IRQ A standard PC system uses the devc ser8250 driver the BSP documentation indicates the drivers specific to your target hardware If the driver doesn t detect all the serial ports ensure that the ports are enabled in the BIOS If the ports are enabled try specifying the I O port and I
110. 131 profiles 92 110 113 118 119 131 profile 113 118 default 92 ksh 119 131 troubleshooting 131 vi exrc 110 Programmed Input Output See PIO promiscuous mode 258 PROMPT DOS variable 73 prompt command line 28 355 default 28 setting 355 ps 316 PS1 PS2 73 355 Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited pseudo terminals 88 pterm 51 76 130 terminal type setting 51 76 130 putenv 128 pv 104 pwd 58 70 73 PWD 73 pwlock file 36 38 43 python 134 Q QCC qcc 104 qconn security 311 qde 95 Qnet 68 92 94 175 179 180 184 185 203 222 312 customizing 180 diagnostic information 94 185 printing over 203 222 protocol stack 179 remote execution 68 security 312 software components 179 starting 92 180 troubleshooting 184 qnetstats 94 185 QNX 4 filesystems 84 151 152 156 240 289 334 consistency checking for 156 devb ram 240 disk structure 289 filenames 152 QNX 6 filesystem See Power Safe filesystem QNX4FS_FILE_LINK bit 293 QNX6FS_SNAPSHOT_HOLD 159 qnxbasedma build 351 qtalk 264 265 query DOS command 71 quoting 63 140 R RAID Redundant Arrays of Independent Disks 237 RAM 149 240 320 344 dev shmem pseudo filesystem 149 disks 240 system 320 344 effect on cache for block 1 0 drivers 320 limits 344 random 88 RANDOM 73 DOS version 73 raw copies 286 raw disks browsing 298 raw input mode 51 333 buffer 333 rc d 92 rc local 206 read permission 97 read 320 323 32
111. 286 backing up 286 filesystems 93 mounting 87 hardware 92 131 229 251 258 345 clock UTC or local time 131 detecting 92 flow control 251 interrupts 258 supported 229 345 hd 20 help 68 345 documentation online 345 technical support 345 usage messages 68 help DOS command 71 HFS and HFS Plus 170 340 hidden files 61 75 82 wildcard characters and 61 hogs 316 317 HOME environment variable 35 73 117 Home key 52 home directory 34 35 37 41 42 59 93 94 117 root 94 HOMEDRIVE DOS variable 73 HOMEPATH DOS variable 73 Host Signal Processor modems See HSP modems hostname 122 184 186 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited QNX Neutrino RTOS HOSTNAME 73 118 122 hosts 186 188 200 connections 200 checking 200 IP addresses 200 mapping 200 names 186 must be unique 186 TCP IP 188 hosts hostname database file 90 188 200 hosts equiv 194 209 hosts Ipd 209 HSP Host Signal Processor modems 266 HTML 267 270 271 272 dynamic 267 270 271 272 HTTP 267 HTTP_ROOT_DOC 268 HTTPD_ROOT_DIR 268 HTTPD_SCRIPTALIAS 270 hubs USB 248 1 0 62 258 323 324 326 aperture 258 standard 62 323 326 performance 323 326 redirecting 62 synchronous 324 icons 95 IDE Integrated Development Environment 49 95 104 112 311 316 329 command line alternative to 49 documentation 104 editor 112 security 311 system fine tuning 104 316 329 idle thread 317 IDs 34 41 42 44 45 group 34 42
112. 3 the last SCSI hard drive detected When the driver starts it sends debugging information to the system log which you can view using sloginfo This information is often very helpful when you re trying to debug a problem with a SCSI adapter or device If the driver doesn t correctly detect a device check the following e Is the SCSI chain terminated correctly This is frequently the problem when a device doesn t show up correctly shows up and then disappears or doesn t show up at all e Is the SCSI adapter supported Even if an adapter claims to be compatible with a supported adapter that doesn t mean that the driver will work with it correctly Compatible doesn t mean identical To be certain look for the device ID on our website see the Community area of our website http www qnx com e Does the SCSI BIOS see all the devices correctly 236 Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Hard disks If it does then all the devices are set up correctly and don t have any conflicting SCSI IDs You can also check this by using another operating system if it detects the devices correctly and doesn t display any problems the setup is correct Remember that if a SCSI chain isn t terminated correctly a device may appear on the chain but will likely have problems after some use Each device on a SCSI chain needs to have a unique ID number between 1 and the maximum value supported by the adapter check the user manual for the adapt
113. 3 valid characters 152 161 162 163 166 CD ROM 162 DOS 161 Ext2 163 NFS 166 QNX 4 152 wildcards 61 140 fileno 323 files 43 60 61 70 75 77 78 81 82 85 94 97 99 106 107 118 140 149 151 152 172 173 193 213 220 277 281 282 283 288 293 294 296 297 298 299 300 323 327 332 333 334 355 dev shmem under 149 about 77 archiving 70 281 282 backing up 277 blocks examining and restoring 300 checking integrity 296 299 compressing 172 283 concatenating 70 contents searching 60 140 converting for printing 213 220 copying 61 70 355 decompressing 172 283 deleting 70 99 297 355 permissions 99 without returning used blocks 297 displaying one screenful at a time 70 extents 151 293 finding 60 70 140 former users 43 group ownership 97 hidden 61 75 82 wildcard characters and 61 inodes 152 293 links 152 293 333 maximum number of 333 listing 70 locations 85 maintenance utilities for 296 297 298 299 chkfsys 297 299 dcheck 297 dinit 296 fdisk 296 spatch 298 zap 297 maximum open per process 332 moving 70 385 Index files continued names 152 333 maximum length 333 ownership 97 152 permissions 97 99 118 288 334 default setting 99 118 restricting the changing of 334 pregrowing 323 327 recovering 297 298 lost 298 zapped 297 remapping bad disk blocks 297 renaming 70 structure 294 temporary 94 transfer daemon 193 troubleshooting 107 173 types 78
114. 4 shell 55 134 systems 33 86 148 149 164 338 flash filesystems 164 338 OS images 86 148 temporary storage in 149 user accounts 33 web server 267 273 security 273 Embedded Transaction filesystem ETFS 338 Encapsulated Security Payload See ESP encryption 36 passwords 36 End key 52 end of input 52 end of options 68 76 end of line characters converting 22 143 Enhanced Host Controller Interface See EHCI Enter 52 enum 92 enum devices 92 enumerators 92 env 124 ENV 119 environment 115 131 customizing 115 troubleshooting 131 environment variables 35 51 60 66 73 75 76 113 117 118 119 120 122 124 130 195 215 268 270 271 320 355 CMD_INT 271 COLUMNS 120 configuration strings compared to 122 EDITOR 113 ENV 119 HOME 35 73 117 HOSTNAME 73 118 122 HTTP_ROOT_DOC 268 HTTPD_ROOT_DIR 268 HTTPD_SCRIPTALIAS 270 LD_LIBRARY_PATH 120 LOGNAME 35 73 PATH 66 73 75 118 120 271 DOS version 73 security 66 PATH_INFO 270 preserving across logins 120 PRINTER 215 PROCESSOR 118 PS1 PS2 73 355 PWD 73 RANDOM 73 DOS version 73 setting 120 SHELL 35 73 SOCK 195 STDIO_DEFAULT_BUFSIZE 320 SYSNAME 118 TERM 51 76 130 TMPDIR 73 118 120 TZ 124 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited environment variables continued value displaying 60 VISUAL 113 erase DOS command 71 errno 159 error messages 62 87 89 224 discarding 62 lpr 224 redirecting 62 system logging 87 89 ERRORLEVEL
115. 42 43 46 91 etc pwlock 38 43 etc group 37 43 users removing 43 etc passwd 36 43 users removing 43 etc shadow 38 43 users removing 43 access permissions 36 backup files 46 91 changing 39 42 characteristics of 39 database 36 forgotten 39 groups not supported 37 protecting encrypted 36 removing 43 pasting command line 57 PATH 66 73 75 118 120 271 DOS version 73 security 66 path DOS command 71 PATH_INFO 270 pathconf 332 PATHEXT DOS variable 73 pathnames 24 70 80 83 154 333 334 about 80 absolute 80 indirection 70 154 mapping 24 83 maximum length 333 relative 80 truncating 334 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited QNX Neutrino RTOS pattern matching 60 134 140 gawk 134 grep 60 140 perl 134 python 134 pax 70 277 281 282 PC Cards 243 information displaying 243 PC character set 84 pci 195 230 PCI 88 195 242 265 cards 242 indexes 195 modems 265 server 88 pci bios 258 PCMCIA 243 pdebug security and 311 performance improving 99 317 perl 134 138 274 scripts 138 274 permissions 34 36 44 45 97 99 118 136 152 288 etc pwlock 36 etc group 36 etc passwd 36 etc shadow 36 account database 36 default setting 99 118 groups 34 44 45 root 34 setting 44 136 152 pg UNIX command 20 phf file extension 104 phfont 104 phuser 39 physical 53 88 253 256 342 address space limits 342 console 53 253 memory 88 node IDs 256 id process I
116. 5 73 shells 34 35 37 41 43 55 57 58 59 61 62 63 65 66 75 118 119 133 134 139 140 141 143 193 355 34 aliases 59 119 355 setting 119 355 command completion 57 command line interpreting 55 commands 58 65 66 builtin 66 finding 66 multiple 58 recalling 65 configuring 118 dot file 143 embedded 55 134 fat embedded 55 134 filename completion 57 functions 59 login program 35 37 41 43 micro embedded 55 134 prompt setting 355 quoting 63 140 redirection 62 remote 193 daemon 193 scripts 65 133 141 return codes 141 substitutions 59 test 75 variables 139 wildcard characters 61 140 shmem 149 shtml file extension 271 shutdown 32 71 DOS version 71 shutting down 32 85 unexpectedly 85 signals 32 213 SIGINT 213 SIGTERM 32 skel 92 Slinger 267 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited slogger 20 87 89 sloginfo 20 89 Small Computer Systems Interface See SCSI SMB Server Message Block protocol 165 SMM System Management Mode 24 don t use it 24 SMP Symmetric Multiprocessing 24 snapshot Power Safe filesystem 157 158 159 disabling 159 so file extension 104 SOCK 195 socket so 167 NFS 167 sockets 79 89 343 TCP IP 89 343 limits 343 soft links See symbolic links soft modems 266 software 104 112 134 251 345 flow control 251 free 345 third party 104 112 134 editors 112 man 104 perl 134 troff 104 sort 63 71 173 DOS version 71 space determining amount fre
117. 7 Connecting Hardware 258 Hardware Interrupt DMA Channel I O Aperture Memory Aperture ROM Aperture Promiscuous Mode The hardware interrupt is the network card s interrupt request line IRQ How an IRQ is assigned depends on whether the card is a PCI or an ISA card In the case of a PCI card pci bios assigns the IRQ for an ISA card the IRQ is hard wired Two ISA devices can t share the same IRQ but two PCI devices can This is the DMA channel used for the card This varies depending on the card and on the channels it has available The I O aperture is a hexadecimal value that shows the address in I O space where the card resides The I O aperture uses the I O address between the given values to locate and map the I O ports The range depends on the platform The memory aperture is a hexadecimal value that shows the address in memory where the card s memory is located The memory aperture uses the memory address between the given values to locate and map memory The range depends on the platform The ROM aperture is a hexadecimal range that shows the address of the card s ROM The ROM aperture uses the memory address between the displayed values to locate and map memory When a card is placed in promiscuous mode the card accepts every Ethernet packet sent on the network This is quite taxing on the system but is a common practice for debugging purposes Also when a card is placed in promiscuous mod
118. 7 readlink 155 realloc 343 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited QNX Neutrino RTOS rebooting 32 103 299 ACLs don t persist across 103 recovering from unexpected 299 receive alignment errors 262 record size 325 recovering 297 298 a zapped file 297 blocks 297 lost files directories 298 recursive make 104 redirection 62 Redundant Arrays of Independent Disks See RAID regular files 78 149 relative pathnames 80 rem DOS command 71 remote execution 68 Remote Procedure Call See RPC remounting mount u 147 rename DOS command 71 replace DOS command 71 resolv conf 92 189 199 resolver 92 178 configuration files 92 Qnet 178 resource managers 24 172 defined 24 inflator 172 return codes from shell scripts 141 rhosts 194 right arrow 52 RIP Routing Information Protocol 190 194 RLIMIT_AS 343 344 RLIMIT_DATA 343 RLIMIT_NOFILE 343 rlogind 193 rm 70 355 interactive mode 355 rmdir 70 root 28 34 41 75 94 97 309 342 home directory 94 ownership 97 PATH 75 permissions 34 97 privileged priorities 342 prompt default 28 security 309 user accounts managing 41 root block QNX 4 filesystem 290 296 297 creating 296 restoring 297 root directory QNX 4 filesystem 290 296 creating 296 route 189 191 routed 190 194 Routing Information Protocol See RIP routing protocols 190 routing tables 192 194 daemon 194 routing TCP IP 189 RPC Remote Procedure Call 166 rpcbind 166 RS 232 protocol
119. 8 Execute permission For a directory this is permission to list or search the directory sors Setuid or setgid p 98 see below t or T Sticky bit p 99 see below For example if you list your home directory using 1s al1 you might get output like this total 94286 drwxr xr x 18 barney techies 6144 Sep 26 06 37 drwxrwxr x 3 root root 2048 Jul 15 07 09 ArWx 2 barney techies 4096 Jul 04 11 17 AbiSuite rw rw r 1 barney techies 185 Oct 27 2000 Sig 1 W 1 barney techies 34 Jul 05 2002 cvspass drwxr xr x 2 barney techies 2048 Feb 26 2003 ica rw rw r 1 barney techies 320 Nov 11 2002 kshrc rw rw r 1 barney techies 0 Oct 02 11 17 lastlogin drwxrwxr x 3 barney techies 2048 Oct 17 2002 mozilla drwxrwxr x 11 barney techies 2048 Sep 08 09 08 ph rwe r r 1 barney techies 254 Nov 11 2002 profile drwxrwxr x 2 barney techies 4096 Jul 04 09 06 ws rw rw r 1 barney techies 3585 Dec 05 2002 123 html The first column is the set of permissions A leading d indicates that the item is a directory see Types of files p 78 earlier in this chapter If the permissions are followed by a plus sign the file or directory has an access control list that further specifies the permissions For more information see Access Control Lists ACLs p 100 below S You can also use octal numbers to indicate the modes see chmod in the Utilities Reference Some program
120. 8 buildfiles 348 filesystem 166 337 server daemon 194 nfsd 166 194 NIC Network Interface Card 254 nice 69 nicinfo 185 201 255 Node Discovery Protocol NDP 178 node IDs physical 256 nodes 68 177 182 186 domain 177 names 177 186 fully qualified 177 remote 182 Qnet contacting via 182 nsswitch conf 91 NTFS fs nt so 171 341 NTP Network Time Protocol 194 ntpd 194 null 62 88 0 o file extension 104 O_SYNC 324 OHCI Open Host Controller Interface 247 on 69 182 opasswd 46 91 open 320 323 optical drives 238 options command line 67 68 end of 68 ORB drives 238 OS DOS variable 73 OS images 86 104 148 290 348 351 353 buildfiles 104 348 351 353 creating 148 oshadow 46 91 output 52 62 70 140 displaying one screenful at a time 70 140 redirecting 62 stopping and resuming 52 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited ownership 97 P packets 259 260 263 broadcast 259 dropped 263 multicast 259 oversized 263 received 260 transmitted 259 parallel ports 88 252 parameter substitution 60 parent directory 81 153 292 partitions 151 282 289 290 296 297 299 archiving 282 blocks 289 290 296 checking directory structure 297 creating 151 key components on disk 289 root directory 290 scanning for consistency 299 passwd command 20 39 41 42 43 configuring 42 users removing 43 passwd file 36 43 entries 36 users removing 43 passwords 36 37 38 39
121. 81 106 determining 81 106 Filesystem Hierarchy Standard 85 filesystems 70 84 92 93 145 146 147 148 149 151 156 157 161 162 163 164 165 166 169 170 171 172 231 240 288 289 299 320 321 322 325 326 334 335 336 337 338 340 341 Apple Macintosh HFS and HFS Plus 170 340 CD ROM 84 93 162 337 CIFS 165 337 commit level 325 dirty 146 DOS 84 161 double buffering 326 Embedded Transaction filesystem ETFS 338 embedded creating 164 Ext2 84 163 335 FAT12 FAT16 FAT32 161 336 features 145 fine tuning 320 flash 164 338 floppy disk 93 free space determining 70 146 hard disk 93 international characters 84 ISO 9660 231 metadata 321 mounting 147 mountpoints 92 NFS 166 337 NTFS fs nt so 171 341 OS image using as 148 Power Safe fs qnx6 so 84 157 335 QNX 4 84 151 156 240 334 consistency checking for 156 devb ram 240 RAM 149 read only 147 record size 325 remote 288 restoring 299 storing data on disk 289 structure 289 throughput 322 386 filesystems continued type default 145 Universal Disk Format UDF 84 169 231 340 unmounting 147 virtual 172 filters 63 212 220 printing 212 220 utilities 63 find 44 60 64 70 71 140 173 281 DOS version 71 firewalls 313 flash filesystems 164 173 338 read only 173 flashctl 173 floppy disks 87 93 232 DOS formatting 232 driver 232 filesystems 87 93 mounting 87 flow control 251 fonts 91 104 file extensions 104 maps
122. A shared printer password SAMBA password workgroup SAMBA workgroup server SAMBA server name printer SAMBA shared printer name Form for smb command used with smbspool which is set in DEVICE_URI No Username and password required DEVICE_URI smb server printer 4 DEVICE_URI smb workgroup server printer Username and password required DEVICE_URI smb username passwordlserver printer DEVICE_URI smb username password workgroup server printer Where username SAMBA username Use of DEVICE_URI environment variable allows you to set this entry for the smbspool to automatically look for it when it isn t included in the Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 357 Examples 358 command line Filter ps d smbspool 1 NULL none 1 1 Filter phs ps phs to ps Supported Resolution 300 300 600 600 1200 1200 Supported PaperSize 8500 11000 Letter 8500 14000 Legal Supported Orientation 0 Portrait 1 Landscape Supported Intensity 0 Min 100 Max Supported InkType 1 B amp W 3 1 Color CMY 4 Color CMYK Resolution 600 600 PaperSize 8500 11000 Letter Orientation 0 Portrait Intensity 50 InkType 4 5 Color CMYK NonPrintable 500 Left 500 Top 500 Right 500 Bottom a e 1 1 i a a a e 5 5 1 a a a a a a a a a e a a a a ii ia if PNPID HEWLETT PACKARDHP_850DDE PNPSTR MFG HEWLETT PAC
123. CL entry match Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 101 Working with Files 102 e f the ACL has a mask entry its permissions match the group file permissions In this case the owning group ACL entry s permissions aren t necessarily the same as the group file permissions Let s continue with the same sample file Now let s have mabel use chmod to remove write permission for the group chmod g w file txt getfacl q file txt user rw user frank rw effective r groupiir mask r other r ls 1 file txt rw r r 1 mabel techies 50 Sep 27 21 22 file txt The entry for frank still lists read and write permission but a comment warns us that his effective permissions are read only because we explicitly removed write permission from the mask The following pseudo code shows the algorithm for checking the access to a file or directory if the process s effective user ID matches the object owner s user ID The matched entry is the owner ACL entry else if the process s effective user ID matches the user ID specified in any named user ACL entry The matched entry is the matching named user entry else if the process s effective group ID or any of its supplementary group IDs matches the group ID of the object or matches the group ID specified in any named group entry if the requested access modes are granted by at least one entry matched by the process s eff
124. Components of a QNX 4 filesystem in a disk partition These structures are created when you initialize the filesystem with the dinit utility Loader block The first physical block of a disk partition is the loader block It contains the bootstrap code that the BIOS loads and then executes to load an OS from the partition If a disk hasn t been partitioned e g it s a floppy this block is the first physical block on the disk Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 289 Backing Up and Recovering Data Root block The root block is the second block of a QNX 4 partition It s structured as a standard directory and contains a label field and the inode information for these special files e the root directory of the filesystem usually e inodes e boot e altboot The files boot and altboot contain images of the operating system that can be loaded by the QNX bootstrap loader Normally the QNX loader loads the OS image stored in the boot file But if the altboot file isn t empty you can load the image stored in it Bitmap blocks Several consecutive blocks follow the root block The bitmap blocks form the bitmap for the QNX 4 partition One bit exists for each block on the partition thus one bitmap block is used for every 4096 disk blocks corresponding to 2 MB of disk space If the value of a bit is zero the corresponding block is unused Unused bits at the end of the last bitmap block for which ther
125. D 20 93 317 proc directory 93 procnto 317 pidin 20 69 173 182 184 199 316 318 pin 243 ping 200 PIO Programmed Input Output 233 p p yo pe 88 ipes 63 140 334 bytes writing atomically 334 platforms 24 86 directories 86 supported 24 ug and Play modems 265 Point to Point Protocol See PPP Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet See PPPoE Portable Archive Exchange 281 ports 78 88 252 parallel 88 252 serial 78 88 252 multiport 252 performance 252 zu 391 Index POSIX 20 100 1003 1e and 1003 2c drafts withdrawn 100 power failures 157 power outage recovering from 299 Power Safe fs qnx6 so filesystem 84 157 335 power turning off don t 32 PPP Point to Point Protocol 196 197 359 pppd 359 PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet 196 preferences 113 default editor 113 prefix space limits 342 prime meridian 125 print DOS command 71 printcap 203 210 214 examples 214 PRINTER 215 printers 91 printing 194 203 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 218 220 221 222 224 248 356 357 access control 209 accounting information 213 burst headers suppressing 211 files converting for 213 220 filters 212 220 jobs 206 207 canceling 207 starting 206 Ipr 205 356 managing 207 Ipre 207 NCFTP over 203 356 overview 203 printer capabilities 210 Qnet over 203 222 queue managing 207 remotely 212 SAMBA over 203 357 serial lines 211 spooler 356 configurat
126. DOS variable 73 Esc 58 Esc Esc 57 EscB 57 EscD 57 EscF 57 esh 55 57 134 ESP Encapsulated Security Payload 312 ETFS Embedded Transaction filesystem 338 Ethernet 248 263 headers 263 hubs USB 248 Ethernet adapters 249 USB 249 ex 110 executables 66 98 99 137 finding 66 keeping loaded in memory 99 running as a specific user or group 98 137 execute permission 98 136 execution remote 68 exit 31 54 exploits 308 export 119 120 124 exports 167 exports hostname 167 expressions arithmetical 60 exrc file 110 Ext2 filesystem 84 163 335 extended Access Control Lists ACLs 101 Extensible Markup Language XML files 104 extensions filename 82 104 extents 151 293 294 locating extent blocks 293 structure 294 external modems 265 F fat embedded shell fesh 55 134 FAT12 FAT16 FAT32 filesystems 161 336 fe DOS command 71 FCS Frame Check Sequence 262 fdisk 151 287 296 302 reporting errors 302 fesh 55 134 fiber cables 257 FIFO special files 78 file 81 106 file descriptors maximum 343 FILE variables 323 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited QNX Neutrino RTOS filenames 57 61 76 80 82 83 84 104 140 152 161 162 163 166 293 332 about 80 completing 57 extensions 82 104 generating 61 140 hyphen starting with 76 international characters 84 long enabling 152 longer than 16 characters 293 maximum length 152 332 relationship to inode entries 293 rules 8
127. E AE AE E FE A FE AE AE E FE AEA EA E AE AEA AE AEA EA FE AE AEE FE AE AE E AE EA FE AE AEE AE EAA A 350 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited anxbasedma build qnxbasedma build Here s the buildfile for boot on an x86 platform qnxbasedma build 9 In a real buildfile you can t use a backslash to break a long line into shorter pieces but we ve done that here just to make the buildfile easier to read The buildfile for QNX Neutrino booting on a PC virtual x86 bios compress boot Reserve 64 KB of video memory to handle multiple video cards startup bios s64k PATH is the safe path for executables contstr CS PATH LD_LIBRARY_PATH is the safe path for libraries confstr _CS_LIBPATH i e This is the path searched for libs in setuid setgid executables PATH proc boot bin usr bin opt bin LD_LIBRARY_PATH proc boot lib usr lib lib dll opt lib procnto instr script startup script To save memory make everyone use the libc in the boot image For speed fewer symbolic lookups we point to libe so 3 instead of libc so procmgr_symlink proc boot libc so 3 usr lib ldqnx so 2 Default user programs to priority 10 other scheduler pri 100 Tell diskboot this is a hard disk boot b1 Tell diskboot to use DMA on IDE drives D1 Start 4 text consoles buy passing n4 to devc con and devc con hid o By adding e t
128. EZONE To get system information about all of the remote nodes that are listed in net use pidin with the net argument pidin net You can use pidin with the n option to get information about the processes on another machine pidin n alonzo less You can even run a process on another machine using your console for input and output by using the f option to the on command on f alonzo date When a node boots and starts Qnet along with a network driver if that node is quiet i e there are no applications on it that try to communicate with other nodes via Qnet the net directory is slowly populated by the rest of the Qnet nodes which occasionally broadcast their node information The default time interval for this is 30 seconds and is controlled by the auto_add X command line option to 1sm qnet so So 30 seconds after booting net is probably as full as it s going to get You don t have to wait 30 seconds to talk to a remote node immediately after Qnet and the network driver initialize an application on your node may attempt to communicate with a remote node via Qnet When there s an entry in the net directory all it means is that Qnet now has a mapping from an ASCII text node name to an Ethernet MAC address It speeds up the node resolution process ever so slightly and is convenient for people to see what other nodes might be on the network Entries in net aren t deleted until someone tries to use th
129. Examples iii a 347 Buildfile for an NFS mounting target ccoccccccccccccoccnonnonnnennnoncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonanonnnnnnnnnninnn 348 qnxbasedma Dull ii A A das coat AA 351 sample DuilGhle nti 2 5e 4ecctest ont a idee e ld tach lt dando ete JE cock tte 353 EOS sui ooo cbs Sees Tees ete sated A Pees a AS AAA boy oe ashe siete ceeds Tab PATS 354 KENG urala aana a a a a a en a ats Seta dt rueste ys ea a 355 Configuration files for spooler occccccccocccocncocncnnnonnnoncnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnonnnonnnonnnenanenaninoss 356 Usine Di eai eue A A dcr seen ee 356 SETAN E A E di A T E I 356 Using SAMBA coi A a i a O dt ii 357 PPP with CHAP authentication between two QNX Neutrino boxes ooccccccncnccccccnncocanonnnnninnns 359 eT AY A E 363 Table of Contents About the QNX Neutrino User s Guide The QNX Neutrino User s Guide is intended for a users of a QNX Neutrino RTOS system from system administrators to end users This guide tells you how to e Use the QNX Neutrino runtime environment regardless of the kind of computer it s running on embedded system or desktop Think of this guide as the companion how to doc for the Utilities Reference Assuming there s a system prompt waiting for input this guide is intended to help you learn how to interact with that prompt e Perform such traditional system administration topics as setting up user accounts security starting up a QNX Neutrino machine etc This User s Guid
130. FILE 324 dd 286 debugging 23 89 208 224 274 311 drivers 23 printing 208 224 security 311 Slinger 274 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited debugging continued startup code 89 def file extension 104 default 90 default Access Control Lists not implemented 103 deferred transmissions 260 deflate 172 del DOS command 71 Del key 52 Denial Of Service DOS attacks 309 devb 162 169 320 fine tuning 320 devb eide 231 233 234 troubleshooting 234 devb fdc 232 devb ram 240 devb umass 249 328 devc con devc con hid 29 53 253 devc par 252 devc pty 88 devc ser8250 251 264 265 devctl 159 324 328 devf 164 devh usb so 248 devi microtouch 248 devices 87 89 92 147 block special 147 mounting 147 enumerating 92 pathnames 87 read only 147 terminals 89 unmounting 147 devio_postcluster 340 devio_readcluster 340 devio_readtrans 340 devn klsi so 249 devnp shim so 199 devp pccard 243 devu ehci so 248 devu ohci so 248 devu prn 214 221 248 devu uhci so 248 devu xhci so 248 df 70 146 DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 90 191 196 198 dhcp client 191 dhcpd 194 dhcpd conf 90 dietician 329 Digital Subscriber Line See DSL dinit 151 152 289 290 296 321 dir DOS command 71 directories 34 35 37 41 42 58 59 66 70 78 81 83 86 97 117 153 154 155 177 208 220 281 282 290 292 297 298 355 archiving 281 282 changing 81 checking structure 297 contents of r
131. FS_FILE_LINK bit 0x08 set in the i_status field For these files a portion of the directory entry is moved into the inodes file inodes entry Directory entry gt 0 i_fname 16 0 _fhame 48 a5 16 i_size 48 _inode_blk Er 20 i_first_xtnt 52 _inode_ndx e i_xblk 53 _Ifn_block 32 i_ftime 57 _spare 6 36 i_mtime 63 _status 40 i_atime 44 i_ctime 48 i_num_xtnts longfilenames entry 50 i mode E i_uid 0 Ifn_block de 54 i_gid 4 Ifn_index a i_nlink 5 lfn_status 58 i_zero 4 6 Ifn_name 505 62 i_type 63 i_status Figure 11 An inode entry If the filename is longer than 48 characters e the fname field in the directory entry holds a 48 character truncated version of the name e the _ fn_block field points to an entry in longfilenames Extent blocks are used for any file that has more than a single extent The _xbIk field in the directory entry points to one of these extent blocks which in turn defines where the second and subsequent extents are to be found Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 293 Backing Up and Recovering Data 294 Files An extent block is exactly one 512 byte disk block with the following form 0 4 8 9 488 496 504 xblk_next_xblk xblk_prev_xblk xblk_num_xtnts xblk_spare 3 xblk_num_blocks xblk_xtnts 0 xblk_xtnts 1
132. February 28 is day 59 and March 1 is day 60 It s impossible to refer explicitly to the occasional February 29 n The zero based Julian day 0 lt n lt 365 Leap years are counted it s possible to refer to February 29 Mm n d The ath day O lt d lt 6 of week n of month m of the year 1 lt n lt 5 1 lt m lt 12 where week 5 means the last d day in month m which may occur in the fourth or fifth week Week 1 is the first week in which the dth day occurs Day zero is Sunday The time has the same format as offset except that no leading sign or is allowed The default if time is omitted is 02 00 00 125 Configuring Your Environment Caveats Examples 126 There are some things to bear in mind if you need to work with time calculations and time zones Some utilities get a list of time zones from etc timezone uc_tz_t but we don t guarantee that this file defines all of the world s time zones or that it s up to date time zones depend on local legislation and may differ from those given in this file The abbreviated names in this file above aren t necessarily standard and might not uniquely identify the time zone The USA changed its time zone rules effective March 1 2007 as part of the Energy Policy Act of 2005 The change affected when daylight saving time starts and ends Daylight Saving Time Old Starts The first Sunday in April The second Sunday in March The
133. Filenames containing UTF 8 characters are generally illegible when viewed from the command line You can also use the ISO Latin1 supplemental and PC character sets for international characters however the appearance of these 8 bit characters depends on the display settings of your terminal and might not appear as you expect in other operating systems that access the files via a network Most other operating systems including Microsoft Windows support UTF 8 Unicode characters Filenames from older versions of Microsoft Windows may be encoded using 8 bit characters with various language codepage in effect The DOS filesystem in QNX Neutrino can translate these filenames to UTF 8 representations but you need to tell the filesystem which codepage to use via a command line option For more information see fs dos so in the Utilities Reference All our disk filesystems except fs qnx4 so i e fs cd so fs dos so fs ext2 so the Power safe filesystem fs qnx6 so and fs udf so use UTF 8 encoding for presentation of their filenames attempts to specify a filename not using UTF 8 encoding will fail with an error of EILSEQ on these filesystems 84 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Where everything is stored Where everything is stored The default QNX Neutrino filesystem generally follows the Filesystem Hierarchy Standard but we don t claim to be compliant or compatible with it Thi
134. For more information see Making an OS Image in Building Embedded Systems proc dumper A special entry that receives notification when a process terminates abnormally The dumper utility watches this entry proc mount Pathname space mountpoints If you list the contents of the proc directory proc mount doesn t show up but you can list the contents of proc mount proc qnetstats If you re using Transparent Distributed Processing TDP the 1sm qnet so module places a qnet stats entry in proc If you open this name and read from it the Qnet resource manager code responds with the current statistics for Qnet proc self The address space for yourself i e for the process that s making the query root The root directory is the home directory for the root user sbin This directory contains essential system binaries The sbin directory includes the following e drivers e g devb devc dev devp devu e initialization programs e g seedres e configuration utilities e g dinit and repair utilities e g chkfsys chkdosfs e managers e g io pkt mqueue pipe tmp This directory contains temporary files Programs are supposed to remove their temporary files after using them but sometimes they don t either due to poor coding or abnormal termination You can periodically clean out extraneous temporary files when your system is idle 94 Copyright 2014 QNX So
135. KARD MDL HP Supported PaperSize 8500 8500 7250 11000 8262 5846 7000 11692 if PNPID HEWLETT PACKARDHP_25A854 PNPSTR MFG HEWLETT PACKARD MDL HP Supported PaperSize 8500 8500 7250 11000 8262 5846 7000 11692 8500 CLS PRINTER CMD POSTSCRIPT 11000 14000 10500 17000 11692 8262 9875 16524 tee FH HH OF 2500C CLS 11000 14000 10500 17000 11692 8262 9875 16524 Letter Legal Exec B A4 AS PRINTER CMD PCL MLC PML POSTSCRIPT Letter Legal Exec B AS AS B5 A3 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited PPP with CHAP authentication between two QNX Neutrino boxes PPP with CHAP authentication between two QNX Neutrino boxes The following script starts the Point to Point Protocol daemon pppa with a chat script waits for the modem to ring answers it and starts PPP services with CHAP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol authentication After PPP services have terminated or an error on modem answer occurs it restarts and waits for the next call bin sh SERIAL_PORT 1 DEFAULT_SERIAL_PORT dev serl PPPD usr sbin pppd DO_CHAT chat v ABORT BUSY ABORT CARRIER ABORT ERROR Y TIMEOUT 32000000 RING ATA TIMEOUT 60 CONNECT d d d STTY bin stty ECHO bin echo LOCAL_IP 10 99 99 1 REMOTE_IP 10 99 99 2 if SSERIAL_PORT then SERIAL_PORT SDEFAULT_SERIAL_PORT fi do some initialization STTY sane raw lt
136. Limited QNX Neutrino RTOS variables continued See also environment variables DOS equivalents for 73 shell 139 See also environment variables ver DOS command 71 vi 110 virtual address space 344 limits 344 virtual consoles 53 virtual filesystems 172 viruses 309 VISUAL 113 vnodes fine tuning 320 328 vt100 terminal type 51 W waitfor 248 wav file extension 104 wc 63 web servers 267 273 embedded 267 273 security 273 whence 67 which 66 wildcard character 61 wildcards 61 140 Win modems not supported 266 Windows Microsoft 22 51 71 73 131 143 171 173 341 commands QNX Neutrino equivalents 71 173 compared to QNX Neutrino 22 end of line characters converting 22 143 NTFS fs nt so 171 341 terminal types for telnet 51 time setting 131 variables QNX Neutrino equivalents 73 words 57 63 command line editing 57 counting 63 write UNIX command 20 write 320 321 323 327 writer permission 97 X x86 29 53 86 251 252 344 351 buildfiles 86 351 console driver 29 53 directories 86 limits 344 parallel port manager 252 serial adapter 251 xargs 64 140 173 xcopy DOS command 71 XHCI Extensible Host Controller Interface 247 xml file extension 104 397 Index Y Z years leap 125 zap 297 zero 89 zip file extension 104 Zip disks 238 398 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited
137. NS 120 command DOS command 71 command interpreters See shells command line 28 49 50 57 default prompt 28 editing 57 interpreting 50 commands 52 57 58 60 65 66 68 70 71 75 basic 70 built into shells 66 completing 57 DOS equivalents for 71 finding 66 multiple on a command line 58 recalling 52 65 remote execution 68 substituting 60 troubleshooting 75 usage messages 68 commit filesystem level 325 381 Index common access methods 231 233 238 CD_ROM devices 231 hard disks 233 optical disks 238 Common Gateway Interface See CGI Common Internet File System See CIFS comp DOS command 71 compressed archive files 104 compressing 283 COMPUTERNAME DOS variable 73 COMSPEC DOS variable 73 condvars limits 343 conf file extension 104 config 90 configurable limits 332 333 334 _PC_CHOWN_RESTRICTED 334 _PC_LINK_MAX 333 _PC_MAX_CANON 333 _PC_MAX_INPUT 333 _PC_NAME_MAX 332 333 _PC_NO_TRUNC 334 _PC_PATH_MAX 333 _PC_PIPE_BUF 334 _PC_VDISABLE 334 _SC_OPEN_MAX 332 configuration files 104 configuration strings 120 122 123 124 177 189 199 _CS_ARCHITECTURE 122 _CS_DOMAIN 122 177 _CS_HOSTNAME 122 177 _CS_HW_PROVIDER 122 _CS_HW_SERIAL 123 _CS_LIBPATH 120 123 _CS_LOCALE 123 _CS_MACHINE 123 _CS_PATH 120 123 _CS_RELEASE 123 _CS_RESOLVE 123 189 199 _CS_SRPC_DOMAIN 123 _CS_SYSNAME 123 _CS_TIMEZONE 123 124 _CS_VERSION 123 environment variables compared to 122 setting 122 confstr 122 connections
138. P 187 188 200 312 313 addresses mapping hostnames to 200 filtering 313 masquerading See NAT Network Address Translation name servers 188 security 312 IPL Initial Program Loader 87 code 87 IPSec 312 IRQ Interrupt Request line 258 ISA 241 264 cards 241 modems 264 isapnp 242 265 388 ISO images creating 285 ISO 9660 filesystem 231 ISO Latinl supplemental character set 84 J jabber 262 jar file extension 104 Java 104 archives 104 Jaz disks 238 JPEG graphical images 104 jpg file extension 104 Julian dates 125 K kernel 104 316 events 104 316 kev file extension 104 key bindings 58 knowledge base 345 ksh Korn shell 20 55 58 118 119 131 134 138 configuring 118 interactive mode 131 key bindings 58 profile 119 shell scripts 134 138 L LD_LIBRARY_PATH 120 leap days and years 125 left arrow 52 less 20 64 68 70 120 140 lib 93 95 libc so 167 NFS 167 libexec 95 libraries location of 93 95 library archives 104 limits 332 333 334 342 343 344 channels 343 configurable 332 connections 343 file descriptors 343 files 333 link count 333 names length of 333 memory allocation 342 message queues 343 path names length of 333 physical address space 342 pipes number of bytes written atomically 334 platform specific 344 prefix space 342 process groups 342 processes 342 semaphores 343 sessions 342 shared memory 343 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited limits
139. QNX Software Development Platform 6 6 QNX Neutrino RTOS User s Guide INDC 2004 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited a subsidiary of BlackBerry All rights reserved QNX Software Systems Limited 1001 Farrar Road Ottawa Ontario K2K 0B3 Canada Voice 1 613 591 0931 Fax 1 613 591 3579 Email info qnx com Web http www qnx com QNX QNX CAR Neutrino Momentics Aviage and Foundry27 are trademarks of BlackBerry Limited that are registered and or used in certain jurisdictions and used under license by QNX Software Systems Limited All other trademarks belong to their respective owners Electronic edition published Thursday February 20 2014 QNX Neutrino RTOS Table of Contents About the QNX Neutrino User s Guide oocccooccccnnnccconocenonenonnncnnnnnronancrnnnnrrrnnnrrnnnrrrnnrernnnrrnnrrrnnnes 13 Typographical CONVENTIONS dira a A da din svt 15 Technical SUPPO hai eekan a aar a a a a deere aca 17 Chapter 1 Getting to Know the OS assassssssssusssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnna 19 QNX Neutrino compared with UNIX ooooooccccnncnnnnccnnnncnnnncnnnnncnnnnncnnoncnnnoncnnnnncnnoncrnnnncnnnnnnnnnns 20 QNX Neutrino compared with Microsoft WiINdOWS occccocccncnccnnnncnnnncnnnnncnnnnncnnnnccnnnncnnnnncnnnn 22 How GNX Neutrino is UNIQUE vico aciosscitana ion an a dl A A ss a 23 RESOUICE managers ui a dd das 24 Chapter 2 Logging In Logging Out and Shuttin
140. RQ of the ports when you start the driver Use a comma to separate the I O port and the IRQ use a space to separate each port IRQ pair in the command For example devc ser8250 3f8 4 2 8 3 If you start a serial driver for a UART or modem when another serial driver is already running you need to use the u option to give the new driver a number to append to the device name so that it doesn t conflict with any existing dev ser entry The standard devc ser8250 driver supports only the RS 232 protocol The serial drivers support software and hardware flow control e To enable software flow control start the serial driver with the s option or use stty after starting the driver stty osflow isflow lt dev serl e To disable software flow control start the driver with the S option or use stty osflow isflow lt dev serl e To enable hardware flow control start the driver with the f option or use stty ohflow ihflow lt dev serl e To disable hardware flow control start the driver with the F option or use stty ohflow ihflow lt dev serl In edited mode e flow control is disabled Don t enable software and hardware flow control at the same time Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 251 Connecting Hardware Heavy serial port usage can be very taxing on some systems by default the serial adapter triggers an interrupt for each character transmitted or received You c
141. S extension This component is responsible for setting up the machine into a usable state such that the startup program can then perform further initializations The IPL is written in assembler and C See also BIOS ROM Monitor extension signature and startup code IRQ 368 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Interrupt Request a hardware request line asserted by a peripheral to indicate that it requires servicing by software The IRQ is handled by the PIC which then interrupts the processor usually causing the processor to execute an nterrupt Service Routine ISR ISR Interrupt Service Routine a routine responsible for servicing hardware e g reading and or writing some device ports for updating some data structures shared between the ISR and the thread s running in the application and for signalling the thread that some kind of event has occurred kernel See microkernel level sensitive One of two ways in which a PIC Programmable Interrupt Controller can be programmed to respond to interrupts If the PIC is operating in level sensitive mode the IRQ is considered active whenever the corresponding hardware line is active Contrast edge sensitive link A filename a pointer to the file s contents Contrast symbolic link message A parcel of bytes passed from one process to another The OS attaches no special meaning to the content of a message the data in a message has meaning for the sender of the messa
142. Systems Limited 309 Securing Your System The hosts for a virus are system call interfaces that are accessible from the point of entry an infected program such as sendmail or an HTTP server The hosts are platform specific so a virus for Linux would in all likelihood terminate the host under QNX Neutrino as soon as it tried to do anything damaging The viruses that circulate via email are OS specific generally targeted at Windows and can t harm QNX Neutrino systems since they simply aren t compatible Most UNIX style systems aren t susceptible to viruses since the ability to do much damage is limited by the host We have never heard of a true virus that could infect QNX Neutrino In addition since deployed QNX Neutrino systems are highly customized to their designated application they often don t contain the software that s open to such attacks e g logins web browsers email Telnet and FTP servers QNX Neutrino security in general QNX Neutrino is a UNIX style operating system so almost all of the general UNIX security information whether generic Linux BSD etc applies to QNX Neutrino as well A quick Internet search for UNIX or Linux security will yield plenty of papers You ll also find many titles at a bookstore or library We don t market QNX Neutrino as being either more or less secure than other operating systems in its class That is we don t attempt to gain a security certification such as is required for certai
143. TH image 0x800a0000 virtual armle v7 srec bootstrap FAR AAT HR AER TH HE RAAT AEA RAE EE FE FE AE EAE HE AE EAE EE AE AEA EE HE AEE AE EE AE AEE AE HE EAE AE EE EAE EAA AEE default frequency for 4kc is 80MHz adjust f parameter for different frequencies Hea aE aE a aE AE AR AE a aE aE AE AE AE E AE a aE aE AE AE E AE AE aE AE AE AE AE AE E EA AE A HE EA AE AE aE AE AE E AE aE HE EAE a HE EAE startup abc123 f 80000000 v PATH proc boot procnto 32 v script script procmgr_symlink proc boot libc so 3 usr lib ldqnx so 2 display_msg Welcome to the QNX Neutrino RTOS on the ABC123 board FAA AAT HE RAAT HRA HAA EH RAE HARA HE EAE AE AEE AE FE AE FE EAE AEA EAE AEA EE HE EAE EAE HAE SERIAL driver FEFE aE aE a aE AE A AE aE aE HE AE AE AE A AE aA HE aE HE AE AE AE HE aE HE AE AE AE AE aE HE AE AE A EE HE AE HEA AE a HE EAE aA EA HE AE HEA HH devc ser8250 e c1843200 b38400 0x180003 8 0x80020004 0x180002f8 0x80020003 waitfor dev serl reopen dev serl slogger amp pipe FAA ATH RAR HH RAT HARA HAA HEAT HAA HEAT HAA TH RAT HE AEA RATE ERAT HR PCI server Ha aE aE a aE AE A AE E AE HE AE AE AE AE AE AE AE HE aE aE A AE aA HE aE HE AE AE AE HE aE HE AE E AE EE HE AE HEA AE AE HE AE HAE AE HE AE HEA HH display_msg Starting PCI server pci abc123 amp waitfor dev pci 4 FAT HAART HH RAT HAART HARA EH AAT HAA TH AAT HEATH ERAT HE AEA EAA ERE HR FLASH driver FEFE aE aE AE aE AE
144. VER 265 T sting MODEMS atari a a tts e aa eea 265 Troubleshooting MOCEMS occcocccocccconcnoncnonnnnnnoninoncnoncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnninnnineninns 266 Chapter 14 Setting Up an Embedded Web Server cceseccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeesaaeeeeaeeesaaeeesaneessanes 267 Where shouldiyour put the tiles a AA EA dE 268 RUNNING Slinger sota oe seeetencaebege a enone a aaa a a a eaaa e a aenean 269 Dynamic HTML er A A e davis pena eee aeaa 270 CG Method A E A A aci 270 QNX Neutrino RTOS MOIS MOEN a A A aa 271 Data Server Method raris iiris caca can a rE ANAE a DR a ARA 272 Security precautions a ia 273 EXxamples ato de a a o do a A a e fatal 274 CONSUMO AA A A A A 274 A AN 274 Chapter 15 Backing Up and Recovering Data oonccocccnccconnnonnnnoncconncanncnnnnnnnnnnrnnnrnnannnnnrnnnrnannnnnns 277 Backup strategies iii A ta Acci 279 Choosing backup storage media and location oocccocccocccccncconcnonnnnnnnnnnonenencnnnnnnnnos 279 Choosing a backup format cccoocccocccocncnnnonnnennnoncnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnanenaninoss 280 Controlling your backup ccoccccccccocccnnnonnnonnnonnnoncnoncnoncnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenanenaniness 280 Archiving your data a A A EN 281 Creating A saz schace snd sad soadt Sanstedhd iat iu sed ad ilegeadee aea apata dad eredetet iA 281 Extracting trom an arhive is AA AA pee Niece A ee seat de 282 Compressing an archive pit tia labia ete ders 283 Decompressing the arc
145. _OPEN_MAX In general you can t change the value of the configurable limits they re called configurable because the system can set them The QNX Neutrino libraries provide various functions that you can use in a program to work with configurable limits pathconf Get the value of a configurable limit that s associated with a path sysconf Get the value of a limit for the entire system setrlimit Change the value of certain limits For example you can use this function to limit the number of files that a process can open this limit also depends on the value of the F option to procnto Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Filesystem limits Filesystem limits Under the QNX Neutrino RTOS filesystems aren t part of the kernel or core operating system they re provided by separately loadable processes or libraries This means that e There s no one set limit or rule for filesystems under QNX Neutrino the limits depend on the filesystem in question and on the process that provides access to that filesystem e You can provide your own filesystem process or layer that can almost transparently override or change many of the underlying values The sections that follow give the limits for the supported filesystems Note the following e Lengths for filenames and pathnames are in bytes not characters e Many of the filesystems that QNX Neutrino supports use a 32 bit format This means that files are
146. a AE E aE HE AE AE AE AE AE AE AE HE aE HE AEE AE AE HE aE aE AE AE AE AE aE HE AE AE AE AE AE HE EAE HEA EE HE EAE HEA AE HE HEE aA HH display_msg Starting flash driver devf abc123 amp FEFE aE aE a aE AE A AE E aE HE AE AE AE AE AE aA HE aE AE A AE AE AE HE aE AE AE AE AE AE aE HE AE AE AE AE aE HE AE aE AE aE HEE aA EAE HE AE aE AE HH NETWORK driver substitute your IP address for 1 2 3 4 Ha aE aE a aE AE FE AE FE aE HE AE AE AE A AE HAE HE AE AE HE AE AE E AE HE aE AE AE E AE AE AE HE A AE E AE HE aE HE EAE AE AE AE AE HE EAE aE AE AE HE EE HEA AH display_msg Starting on board ethernet with the v6 TCP IP stack io pkt v6 hc dpcnet waitfor dev io net en0 4 ifconfig en0 1 2 3 4 FART HAART HH AA HH AA HRA EH AAT HARA AT HEAT HAA HARA HEART RAE ERAT HR REMOTE_DEBUG gdb or Momentics 348 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Buildfile for an NFS mounting target refer to the help documentation for the gdb qconn and the IDE for more information on remote debugging the commands shown require that NETWORK be enabled too He a aE aE a aE AE A AE E aE HE AEE AE A AE AE AE HE AE AE A AE E AE HE aE AE AE aA HE aE HE AE AE AE EE HE AE AE AE AE aE aE AE AE aA HE EE HEA HH devc pty amp waitfor dev ptyp0 4 qconn port 8000 dd USB driver EAT HAART HRA HH AAT HAA EH AAT HAA HAA HAA TH AAT HAA TH HRA HEART HR display_msg Starting USB driver io usb duhci amp waitfor
147. a script that searches C source and header files in the current directory tree for a string passed on the command line bin sh tfind script to look for strings in various files and dump to less case in 1 find name ch xargs grep 1 less exit 0 good status esac echo Use tfind stuff_to_find w echo where stuff_to_find search string E echo i echo e g tfind console_state looks through all files in echo the current directory and below and displays all echo instances of console_state exit 1 bad status As described above the first line identifies the program bin sh to run to interpret the script The next few lines are comments that describe what the script does Then we see case in 1 esac The case in isa shell builtin command one of the branching structures provided by the Korn shell and is equivalent to the C switch statement The is a shell variable When you refer to a variable in a shell put a before its name to tell the shell that it s a variable rather than a literal string The shell variable IS a special variable that represents the number of command line arguments to the script The 1 is a possible value for the case the equivalent of the C case statement This code checks to see if you ve passed exactly one parameter to the shell The esac line completes and ends the case statement Both the if and case commands use the command s name
148. a small network AutolP assigns a link local IP address from the 169 254 16 network to its interface if no other host is using this address The advantage of using AutolP is that you don t need a central configuration server The hosts negotiate among themselves which IP addresses are free to use and monitor for conflicts It s common to have a host employ both DHCP and AutolP at the same time When the host is first connected to the network it doesn t know if a DHCP server is present or not If you start dhcp client with the a option apply IP address as an alias then both a link local IP address and DHCP IP address can be assigned to your interface at the same time If the DHCP server isn t present dhcp client times out leaving the link local IP address active If a DHCP server becomes available later dhcp client can be restarted and a DHCP IP address applied without interfering with any TCP IP connections currently using the link local IP address Having both a DHCP assigned address and a link local address active at the same time lets you communicate with hosts that have link local IP addresses and those that have regular IP addresses For more information see 1sm autoip so and dhcp client in the Utilities Reference Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Troubleshooting Troubleshooting If you re having trouble with your TCP IP network e g you can t send packets over the network you need to use several utilities
149. a very powerful command interpreter For more details see its entry in the Utilities Reference Editing the command line The Korn shell supports emacs style commands that let you edit the command line If you want to Press Delete the character before the cursor Ctrl H Delete from the cursor to the end of the current word Delete from the cursor to the end of the Ctrl K Paste text Ctrl Y As in emacs commands that involve the Ctrl key are keychords for commands that involve Esc press and release each key in sequence For more information see emacs interactive input line editing in the documentation for ksh In order to process these commands ksh uses the character device in raw mode but emulates all of the driver s processing of the keys Other shells such as esh use the character device in canonical edited input mode Command and filename completion You can reduce the amount of typing you have to do by using command completion and filename completion To do this type part of the command s or file s name and then press Esc twice i e Esc Esc or Tab once The shell fills as much of the name as it can you can then type the rest of the name or type more of it and then press Esc Esc or Tab again For example suppose your system has executables called my_magnificent_app and my_wonderful_app Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 57 Using the Command Line 58 Reserved words
150. abc123 flashctl HARA AT AR AE AAA EA AE AEE FE AE EEA EA AE AE AEA AEE AEE AEA AEA AEA AEE AE EEA AEA HEAT AEE AEE AEA EA AEA AEE AE EA A E uncomment for NETWORK driver HARE AE AEE AE E AE AEE AE AEE AEA AE AEE AE AEE AEA EEA AE AEE AEA EE EAE EA EE EAE AEA EE EAE AEA EE EAE aE EE EA EAE io pkt v6 hc ifconfig nicinfo netstat ping FRAT HAR HH RA HARE HAA EH AAT HAA TH RA HAA HRA AE RAE HAART HR AAT HARARE HE uncomment for USB driver Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 349 Examples FART HART HH RAH HAA HAA HAA HR AAT HH RAH HAA HAH HAA TH RAAT HHA HAAR HH io usb usb ERT HAR TH HAH AAA HAA HAA HAA TH RA HAA RAAT HARA AT AE FE AE E AE HARA HARA TH HE uncomment for NFS_REMOTE_FILESYSTEM Hea aE aE a aE AE A AE a aE HE AEE HRA AE A aE HE AE AE AE AE AE HE AE AE E AE aE HE EE HA AE a HE AE HEA AE A HE EA AE AE HEE EAE aE HE HA AE fs nfs3 FARA HARARE TH AA AAT RAE EAE AE EAE TE RAE EEA EA HE E AE AE EE AE AEE AE HE EAE AE EEE AEA EAA general commands FEFE aE aE a AE AE A AE a aE HE A AE AE E AE a aE HE AE AE E AE aE HE AE AE E AE aE HE AE AE E AE A HE AE A AE AE HE AE E AE E AE AE aE AE AE A HE EA AE ls ksh pipe pidin uname slogger sloginfo slay FE FEE AAT HR AER TH AE FEE AE AE FE AE AE EE HE AE FE FE AE AE FE FE AE FE FE FE AE FE FE FE HE FE AE FE AE FE AE E AE FE HE E AE FE EE AE FE AE AE HE FE AE E AE FEAE E AE AERE AEE EE AEE END OF BUILD SCRIPT AEA AEAEE AE FE AE AEE FE A AA AEA F
151. add embedded HTTP services and dynamic content to your embedded applications For example you can write an application that monitors a printer and uses Slinger to update a remote client that displays the printer s status Device e g a printer HTML page Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 267 Setting Up an Embedded Web Server Where should you put the files Before you start the Slinger web server and begin creating your web pages you need to determine what directory structure is appropriate and where you should put your files Be careful not to place your files in a location where your system is open to outsiders thereby exposing your system to undue risk For example don t A place your CGI scripts in the same directory as your regular system binaries because doing so could let people run any command on the machine that supports your web server Use these environment variables to configure Slinger HTTPD_ROOT_DIR The name of the directory where Slinger looks for data files The default is usr local httpd HTTP_ROOT_DOC The name of the root document When a web client requests the root document HTTPD_ROOT_DOC is appended to HTTPD_ROOT_DIR to build the full pathname of the root document The default is index html For example if HTTPD_ROOT_DOC i s defined as index html and HTTPD_ROOT_DIR is defined as usr www Slinger appends index html to usr www to bui
152. afe filesystem supported by the s qnx6 so shared object is a reliable disk filesystem that can withstand power failures without losing or corrupting data It has many of the same features as the QNX 4 filesystem as well as the following e 510 byte UTF 8 filenames e copy on write COW updates that prevent the filesystem from becoming corrupted by a power failure while writing e a snapshot that captures a consistent view of the filesystem For information about the structure of this filesystem see Power Safe filesystem in the Filesystems chapter of the System Architecture guide If the drive doesn t support synchronizing s qnx6 so can t guarantee that the filesystem is power safe Before using this filesystem on devices such as USB Flash devices other than traditional rotating hard A disk drive media check to make sure that your device meets the filesystem s requirements For more information see Required properties of the device in the entry for fs qnx6 so in the Utilities Reference To create a Power Safe filesystem use the mkqnx6fs utility For example mkgqnx6fs dev hd0t76 You can use the mkqnx6fs options to specify the logical blocksize endian layout number of logical blocks and so on Once you ve formatted the filesystem simply mount it For example mount t qnx6 dev hd0t76 mnt psfs For more information about the options for the Power Safe filesystem see fs qnx6 so in the U
153. ailable printers and how to communicate with them and it specifies the values for important items e g the spooling directory The 1pd program acts as a master server for coordinating and controlling the spooling queues configured in the etc printcap file You typically invoke 1pd at boot time from the etc rc d rc local file When it starts 1pd makes a single pass through the etc printcap database restarting any printers that have jobs In normal operation 1pd listens for service requests on a socket within the Internet domain under the printer service specification for requests for printer access The daemon spawns a copy of itself to process the request the master daemon continues to listen for new requests The daemons use simple text files as lock files for synchronization the parent daemon uses usr spool output lpd lock while its children use a lock file in the printer s spool directory as specified in the printcap file Clients communicate with 1pa using a simple transaction oriented protocol Authentication of remote clients is done based on the privileged port scheme employed by rshd See Access control p 209 below The lpr command lets you put a print job in a local queue and notifies the local 1pd daemon that new jobs are waiting in the spooling area The daemon either schedules the job to be printed locally or if printing remotely attempts to forward the job to the appropriate machine If
154. al daemon Warning printer is down The printer has been marked as being unavailable with 1prc Warning no daemon present The 1pd process overseeing the spooling queue as specified in the lock file in that directory doesn t exist This normally occurs only when the daemon has unexpectedly died Check the error log file for the printer and the syslogd log to diagnose the problem To restart an 1pa type lpre restart printer no space on remote waiting for queue to drain Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited This implies that there isn t enough disk space on the remote machine If the file is large enough there will never be enough space on the remote even after the queue on the remote is empty The solution here is to move the spooling queue or make more free space on the remote machine 225 Printing lprrm error messages lprrm printer cannot restart printer daemon This case is the same as when 1pr prints that the daemon can t be started lprc error messages couldn t start printer This case is the same as when 1pr reports that the daemon can t be started cannot examine spool directory Error messages beginning with cannot are usually because of incorrect ownership or protection mode of the lock file spooling directory or 1pre program lpd error messages The 1pa utility can log many different messages using syslogd Most of these messages are about files that can t be opened and usually impl
155. al that you re using and the usr lib terminfo directory is the terminal database In this directory you can find subdirectories a through z that contain the information for specific terminals Some applications use etc termcap the older single file database model instead of usr lib terminfo The default terminal is qansi m the QNX version of an ANSI terminal For more information about setting the terminal type see Terminal types p 130 in Configuring Your Environment Telnet If you re using telnet to communicate between two QNX machines QNX 4 QNX Neutrino use the 8 option to enable an eight bit data path If you re connecting to a QNX Neutrino box from some other operating system and the terminal isn t behaving properly quit from telnet and start it again with the 8 option O To telnet from Windows to a QNX Neutrino machine use ansi or vt100 for your terminal type gt Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 51 Using the Command Line The keyboard at a glance 52 The table below describes how the character device drivers interpret various keys and keychords groups of keys that you press simultaneously The drivers handle these keys as soon as you type them Your keyboard might not behave as indicated if e The driver is in raw input mode instead of edited input mode e You re working with an application that has complex requirements for user O interaction e g the appli
156. also device driver root The superuser which can do anything on your system The superuser has what Windows calls administrator s rights round robin A scheduling policy whereby a thread is given a certain period of time the timeslice to run Should the thread consume CPU for the entire period of its timeslice the thread will be placed at the end of the ready queue for its priority and the next available thread will be made READY If a thread is the only thread READY at its priority level it will be able to consume CPU again immediately See also FIFO and sporadic RTOS Realtime operating system runtime loading The process whereby a program decides while it s actually running that it wishes to load a particular function from a library Contrast static linking scheduling latency 374 Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited The amount of time that elapses between the point when one thread makes another thread READY and when the other thread actually gets some CPU time Note that this latency is almost always at the control of the system designer Also designated as T Contrast interrupt latency session A collection of process groups established for job control purposes Each process group is a member of a session A process belongs to the session that its process group belongs to A newly created process joins the session of its creator A process can alter its session membership via setsid A sessio
157. an use these options to reduce the number of interrupts T number Enable the transmit FIFO and set the number of characters to be transmitted at each TX interrupt to 1 4 8 or 14 The default is O FIFO disabled t number Enable the receive FIFO and set its threshold to 1 4 8 or 14 characters The default is O trigger disabled A receive timeout guarantees that the characters won t remain buffered too long For example imagine that the device receives This sentence is coming across the serial port By default the system has to service 47 interrupts to receive this sentence If you set the receive trigger level to 14 the number of interrupts is reduced to four This helps the overall system performance but you re trading off reliability the higher the receive trigger t the higher the possibility of losing data Multiport serial adapters For multiple serial adapters you may need to specify the I O port and IRQs manually in the driver for each port See General serial adapters p 251 for examples By default the driver should detect the ports and IRQs but with some multiport adapters the enumerators don t detect the ports correctly Parallel ports On a standard PC and some x86 systems parallel ports use the devc par driver see the BSP documentation for the driver for your target hardware By default the devc par driver detects the parallel port If you need to you can use the p option to spec
158. and ifconfig commands to get more information about how the networking is configured What is the name server information Use the following command to get the name server information getconf _CS_RESOLVE If you aren t using the configuration string type cat etc resolv conf Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 199 TCP IP Networking How do map hostnames to IP addresses The etc hosts file contains information regarding the known hosts on the network For each host a single line should be present with the following information internet_address official_host_name aliases Display this file by using the following command cat etc hosts How do get the network status Use the following netstat commands to get the network status netstat in List the interfaces including the MAC and IP addresses that they ve been configured with netstat rn Display the network routing tables that determine how the stack can reach another host If there s no route to another host you get a no route to host error netstat an List information about TCP IP connections to or from your system This includes the state of the connections or the amount of data pending on the connections It also provides the IP addresses and ports of the local and remote ends of the connections For more information about netstat see the Utilities Reference How do make sure I m connected to other hosts 200 Use the
159. and to bypass the buffering during performance critical sections You can also optimize performance by accessing the disk in suitably sized chunks large enough to minimize the overheads of QNX Neutrino s context switching and message passing but not too large to exceed disk driver limits for blocks per operation or overheads in large message passing an optimal size is 32 KB You should also access the file on block boundaries for whole multiples of a disk sector since the smallest unit of access to a disk block device is a single sector partial writes will require a read modify write cycle you can get the optimal I O size by calling statvfs although most disks are 512 bytes sector Finally for very high performance situations video streaming etc it s possible to bypass all buffering in the filesystem and perform DMA directly between the user data areas and the disk But note these caveats e The disk and disk driver must support such access e No coherency is offered between data transferred directly and any data in the filesystem buffer cache e Some POSIX semantics such as file access or modification time updates are ignored We don t currently recommend that you use DMA unless absolutely necessary not all disk drivers correctly support it so there s no facility to query a disk driver for the DMA safe requirements of its interface and naive users can get themselves into trouble In some situations where you know the t
160. andard time i e EDT4 e Daylight saving time starts on the second 2 Sunday 0 of March 3 at 2 00 A M and ends on the first 1 Sunday 0 of November 11 at 2 00 A M Pacific time The short specification for Pacific time is PST8PDT The full specification is PSTOSPDT0O7 M3 2 0 2 M11 1 0 2 Both are interpreted as follows e Pacific Standard Time is 8 hours earlier than Coordinated Universal Time UTC e Standard time and daylight saving time both apply to this locale e By default Pacific Daylight Time is one hour ahead of standard time that is PDT7 e Daylight saving time starts on the second 2 Sunday 0 of March 3 at 2 00 A M and ends on the first 1 Sunday 0 of November 11 at 2 00 A M Newfoundland time The short specification for Newfoundland time is NST3 lt IONDTZ 30 Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 127 Configuring Your Environment The full specification is NST03 30NDT02 30 M3 2 0 00 01 M11 1 0 00 01 Both are interpreted as follows e Newfoundland Standard Time is 3 5 hours earlier than Coordinated Universal Time UTC e Standard time and daylight saving time both apply to this locale e Newfoundland Daylight Time is 2 5 hours earlier than Coordinated Universal Time UTC e Daylight saving time starts on the second 2 Sunday 0 of March 3 at 12 01 00 A M and ends on the first 1 Sunday 0 of November 11 at 12 01 00 A M Central European time
161. are Systems Limited Creating a new group Managing other accounts To create a new group open etc group in a text editor then add a line that specifies the new group s name ID and members For example techies x 101 michel jim sue For more information about the fields see etc group p 37 earlier in this chapter Do this work at a time when the system is idle As your text editor writes the etc group file back any application or utility that s trying to A simultaneously read the etc group file e g 1s 1 newgrp might not function correctly Modifying an existing group Each time you add a new user to a group e g when you use passwd to create a new user account you need to edit the etc group file and add the user to the appropriate group entry For instance if you have an existing group techies and want to add zeke to the group change techies x 101 michel jim sue to techies x 101 michel jim sue zeke You should do this at a time when you re certain no users or programs are trying to use the etc group file Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 45 Managing User Accounts Troubleshooting Here are some problems you might encounter while working with passwords and user accounts The passwd utility seems to hang after change my password The passwd utility uses the etc pwlock file as a lock while updating the password database If the file already exists pa
162. are being placed on the entire network Switching to a full duplex network also resolves these problems Transmits aborted excessive deferrals Transmit Underruns Aborted transmissions due to excessive deferrals mean that the NIC gave up trying to send the frame due to an extremely busy network You can resolve this type of problem by switching to a full duplex network Chips with a DMA engine may see this error The DMA engine copies packet data into a FIFO from which the transmitter puts the data on the wire On lower grade hardware the DMA might not be able to fill the FIFO as fast as the data is going on the wire so an underrun occurs and the transmit is aborted No Carrier on Transmit Jabber detected When the NIC is about to transfer a frame it checks first to make sure that it has carrier sense much like before you dial the phone you check to make sure you have a dial tone While the NIC is transmitting the frame it listens for possible collisions or any errors These errors occur when a NIC is transmitting a frame on the network and it notices that it doesn t see its own carrier wave much like when you are dialing a number on the phone and you can hear the dial tones being pressed These errors are caused by plugging and unplugging cables on the network and by poor optical power supplied to the Fiber Optic Transceiver FOT You typically see this error only on a 10 Mbit network It means that a network card is con
163. as a shell argument ksh script_name or if you use it as a dot file like this script_name e Just as for any executable if your script isn t in one of the directories in your PATH you have to specify the path to the script in order to run it For example bin my_script e When you run a script it inherits its environment from the parent process If your script executes a command that might not be in the PATH you should either specify the path to the command or add the path to the script s PATH variable e Ascript can t change its parent shell s environment or current directory unless you run it as a dot file e A script won t run if it contains DOS end of line characters If you edit a QNX Neutrino script on a Windows machine use the textto utility with the I option to convert the file to the format used by the Power Safe or QNX 4 filesystem Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 143 Chapter 9 Working with Filesystems The QNX Neutrino RTOS provides a variety of filesystems so that you can easily access DOS Linux as well as native Power Safe and QNX 4 disks The Filesystems chapter of the System Architecture guide describes their classes and features Under QNX Neutrino e You can dynamically start and stop filesystems e Multiple filesystems may run concurrently e Applications are presented with a single unified pathname space and interface regardless of the configuration and number of
164. ater The s nt so shared object provides read only access to NTFS disks on a QNX Neutrino system The devb drivers automatically load fs nt so when mounting an NT filesystem If you want fs nt so to fabricate and directory entries specify the dots on option It doesn t fabricate these entries by default Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 171 Working with Filesystems Inflator filesystem QNX Neutrino provides an inflator virtual filesystem It s a resource manager that sits in front of other filesystems and decompresses files that were previously compressed by the deflate utility You typically use inflator when the underlying filesystem is a flash filesystem Using it can almost double the effective size of the flash memory For more information see the Utilities Reference 172 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Here are some problems that you might have with filesystems How can make a specific flash partition read only Unmount and remount the partition like this flashctl p raw_mountpoint u mount t flash r raw_mountpoint mountpoint where raw_mountpoint indicates the partition e g dev s0px How can I determine which drivers are currently running Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Use the find utility to create a list of pathname mountpoints find proc mount name 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9
165. att 118 kshis Startup file ii it ia a ii 119 Environment variables iii tos 120 Setting PATH and LD_LIBRARY_PATH ccseccccceseeeeceeeeeeeeceeeeseeeeeeeaeeseeeeseaseeeees 120 Configuration Strings camne ee raaa E a 122 Setting the timeZone emita di a a ta aeaaea 124 olas 126 EXAMEN A taa 126 Programming With time ZONES cccoccccccoconccnncnnnnonononenencnoncnnnnnnncnnnnnonnnnnnnonaninaninncnnn 128 Terminal ty PGS 0 A A A di dt actas 130 Troubleshooting 00 a A A A A E A A A AE 131 Chapter 8 Writing Shell Scripts cccocccccncccnonccinccinancnnnnnnnncnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnrnnnrnnnnrnnnnnnnrnnannnnns 133 Available Shell sc aaa dais 134 Runnine a shell SCript eier nr e eae A dia 136 The FUSE INE uaea A titi 137 Arguments to a kSh SCTipt occcconcconccoccnonnonnnoncnnncnnncnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnninnninenenns 138 Areguments to a gawk SCD cal a a ibas 138 Arguments to a perl script cccooccccncconcconnonnnoncnencnnncnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnonnnnnnnnnninnninenenns 138 Table of Contents Example of a Korn Shell script oocccocccoccnccnncccnconcnnnnonnnonononcnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnonnnonanonanenaninannnn 139 EffiCIEnNCY a dd 142 Caveat SCOTIA A A A Maelo otee 143 Chapter 9 Working with FilesysteMS occoccccccccccccnncconnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnannnnnnnnnrnnnronnrinanrnnnrnnrnnannnans 145 Setting up starting and stopping a block filesystem occcocccoccnccnnnonnconnnncnononeninenanonononoss 146 Mounting
166. ave opened will probably not cause problems If you re running an application that can t afford downtime or you couldn t run chkfsys because files were open for updating try to run chkfsys with the f option chkfsys f dev hd0t79 This invokes a special read only mode of chkfsys that can give you an idea of the overall sanity of your filesystem Recovering from a bad block in the middle of a file 300 Hard disks occasionally develop bad blocks as they age In some cases you might be able to recover most or even all the data in a file containing a bad block Some bad blocks are the result of power failures or of weak media on the hard disk In these cases sometimes simply reading then rewriting a block will restore the block for a short period of time This may allow you to copy the entire file somewhere else before the block goes bad again This procedure certainly can t hurt and is often worth a try Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Recovering disks and files To examine the blocks within a file use the spatch utility When you get to a bad block spat ch should report an error but it may have actually read a portion of good bytes from that block Writing that same block back will often succeed At the same time spatch will rewrite a correct CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check that will make the block good again but with possibly incorrect data You can then copy the entire file somewhere else and t
167. be able to send a file in tmp test on node2 to the printer attached to nodel using a command like this lpr h Plpt1 tmp test Here s what happens 1 You enter the 1pr command to print a file remotely 2 The 1pr utility requests printing service 3 The 1pd daemon on node2 hears the request spawns a copy of itself to service the request and then creates a spooling subdirectory to hold the files to be printed 4 The spawned 1pd daemon places the print job in the spooler as two files a data file containing the file to be printed and a header file containing information about the print job to be printed as an optional front sheet 5 The spawned 1pd daemon processes the spooled print jobs in the order they were received it starts sending data packets containing the print job to the remote 1pd daemon 6 The 1pd daemon on node1 receives the packets as a printing request and after checking that the request is from an approved node spawns a copy of itself to service the request and also creates a spooling subdirectory to hold the files to be printed If the request isn t from an approved source a refusal message is sent back to the source address 7 The spawned 1pa collects the data packets places the print job into the spooler queue and then sends the print jobs in the order they were received to the printer you specified Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 217 Printing Remote printing to a printer on a
168. c Required options that disable any packet compression detach Prevent pppd from becoming a daemon This lets pppoed know when the pppa session is finished You can omit this option if you specify the pppoed option scriptdetach mtu 1492 Set the interface MTU to the supported size for PPPOE This is the Ethernet MTU minus the overhead of PPPOE encapsulation Lal If pppoed has problems connecting to certain sites on the Internet see PPPOE and Path MTU Discovery in the QNX Neutrino technotes Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 197 TCP IP Networking Using DHCP Using AutolP 198 A TCP IP host uses the DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol to obtain ts configuration parameters IP address gateway name servers and so on from a DHCP server that contains the configuration parameters of all the hosts on the network The QNX Neutrino DHCP client dhcp client obtains these parameters and configures your host for you to use the Internet or local network If your DHCP server supplies options configuration parameters that dhcp client doesn t know how to apply dhcp client passes them to a script that it executes You can use this script to apply any options you want to use outside of those that dhcp client sets for you For more information see the entry for dhcp client in the Utilities Reference AutolP is a module that you must mount into io pxt It s used for quick configuration of hosts on
169. canonical path prefix that doesn t contain symlinks If you do this then the name will be accessible through the canonical path as well as through the symlink Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 155 Working with Filesystems Filesystem robustness The QNX 4 filesystem achieves high throughput without sacrificing reliability This has been accomplished in several ways While most data is held in the buffer cache and written after only a short delay critical filesystem data is written immediately Updates to directories inodes extent blocks and the bitmap are forced to disk to ensure that the filesystem structure on disk is never corrupt i e the data on disk should never be internally inconsistent Sometimes all of the above structures must be updated For example if you move a file to a directory and the last extent of that directory is full the directory must grow In such cases the order of operations has been carefully chosen such that if a catastrophic failure e g a power failure occurs when the operation is only partially completed the filesystem upon rebooting would still be intact At worst some blocks may have been allocated but not used You can recover these for later use by running the chkfsys utility For more information see the Backing Up and Recovering Data p 277 chapter 156 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Power Safe filesystem Power Safe filesystem The Power S
170. cation might take control over how the keyboard works or e You re working at a terminal that has keyboard limitations If you want to Press CO ewe CO fe ESE IN Toggle between insert and typeover modes if an application supports them ie etna ata CS When you use the up or down arrow the character device driver passes a back or forward command to the shell p 55 which recalls the actual command Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Character device drivers Physical and virtual consoles The display adapter the screen and the system keyboard are collectively referred to as the physical console which is controlled by a console driver Some systems don t include a console driver For example embedded systems might include only a serial driver devc ser The devc con and LS devc con hid drivers are currently supported only on x86 platforms To let you interact with several applications at once QNX Neutrino permits multiple sessions to be run concurrently by means of virtual consoles These virtual consoles are usually named dev conl dev con2 etc When the system starts deve con or deve con hid it can specify how many virtual consoles to enable by specifying the n The maximum number of virtual consoles is nine The root user can also specify the program if any that s initially launched on each console The terminal initialization utility tinit reads etc
171. ce 148 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited dev shmem RAM filesystem dev shmem RAM filesystem QNX Neutrino provides a simple RAM based filesystem that allows read write files to be placed under dev shmenm Note that dev shmenm isn t actually a filesystem It s a window onto the shared memory names that happens to have some filesystem like gt characteristics The files in the dev shmem directory are advertised as name special files S_IFNAM which fools many utilities such as more that expect regular files S_IFREG For this reason many utilities might not work for the RAM filesystem If you want to use gzip to compress or expand files in dev shmem you need to specify the f option This filesystem is mainly used by the shared memory system of procnto In special situations e g when no filesystem is available you can use the RAM filesystem to store file data There s nothing to stop a file from consuming all free RAM if this happens other processes might have problems You ll use the RAM filesystem mostly in tiny embedded systems where you need a small fast temporary storage filesystem but you don t need persistent storage across reboots The filesystem comes for free with procnto and doesn t require any setup or device driver You can simply create files under dev shmem and grow them to any size depending on RAM resources Although the RAM
172. cess updating the data server about the state of a hardware device while the embedded web server accesses that state in a decoupled but reliable manner For more information about the data server process and an example device monitoring application see the documentation for ds in the Utilities Reference 272 Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Security precautions Security precautions When you choose the directory for your data files we recommend that you keep some precautions in mind e Don t place any sensitive files in the document directory e Isolate your data files directory from the system files directory For example usr www is much safer than the root directory The root directory opens up your whole system to be served by Slinger If you configure Slinger to support CGI e Place the CGI scripts in a directory isolated from your normal system binaries Don t use bin or usr bin as your CGI directory e Avoid setting your CGI script file permissions to set user ID when executing when the file is owned by a privileged user for example root e Keep your CGI scripts and documents in separate directories This prevents people from accessing your scripts Don t expose your machine to undue risk Make sure that e The permissions on all the files and directories are read only e No files are owned by user ID 2 because Slinger runs at user ID 2 and you don t want Slinger to own the fil
173. cial file permissions see Working with Files p 77 that are lost if you store individual files on a Windows based filesystem If you create an archive see Archiving your data p 281 above the permissions are preserved Other remote backups There are other remote version systems that are available to QNX Neutrino via third party solutions Many of them are free search the Internet for the tools that are right for your company and project 288 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited QNX 4 disk structure QNX 4 disk structure If you ever have a problem with a QNX 4 filesystem you ll need to understand how it stores data on a disk This knowledge will help you recognize and possibly correct damage if you ever have to rebuild a filesystem The lt sys fs_qnx4 h gt header file contains the definitions for the structures that this section describes For an overall description of the QNX 4 filesystem see the Working with Filesystems p 145 chapter Partition components A QNX 4 filesystem may be an entire disk in the case of floppies or it may be one of many partitions on a hard disk Within a disk partition a QNX 4 filesystem contains the following components e loader block e root block e bitmap blocks e root directory e other directories files free blocks etc Loader block Root block Bitmap blocks Root directory lt lt Other data Figure 8
174. cify the PCI index The i option in the second instance of TCP IP tells io pkt v4 to register itself as io pkt1 The prefix option to io pkt causes the second stack to be registered as sock2 dev socket instead of the default dev socket TCP IP applications that wish to use the second stack must specify the environment variable SOCK For example SOCK sock2 telnet 10 59 Or SOCK sock2 netstat in or SOCK sock2 ifconfig if name 192 168 2 10 where f_name is the interface name that the driver uses If you don t specify SOCK the command uses the first TCP IP stack Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 195 TCP IP Networking Dynamically assigned TCP IP parameters 196 Using PPPoE When you add a host to the network or connect your host to the Internet you need to assign an IP address to your host and set some other configuration parameters There are a few common mechanisms for doing this e Dial up providers use the Point to Point Protocol PPP e Broadband providers such as Digital Subscriber Line DSL or Cable use Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet PPPoE or DHCP e A typical corporate network deploys DHCP Along with your IP address the servers implementing these protocols can supply your gateway netmask name servers and even your printer in the case of a corporate network Users don t need to manually configure their host to use the network QNX Neutrino also implements another au
175. class An access control list consists of a number of entries each in one of the following forms given with the constants used in code to identify the tag type Entry type Tag type Form Named user identified by name or by numerical ID ACL_USER user user_identifier permissions A Named group identified by name or numerical ID The upper bound on permissions for the group class The permissions are in the form rwx with a hyphen replacing any permissions that aren t granted Here s an example of the ACL for a file user rw user violetta r group rw mask rw other 100 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited File ownership and permissions The owner of the file has read and write permissions as does the owning group Others have no permissions at all The user violetta has been granted read permission so she s more privileged than others but not quite as privileged as the owning user or group If violetta hadn t been granted a special permission the ACL would be the same as file permissions of rw rw If an ACL can be represented simply as file permissions it s called a minimal ACL if it can t it s called an extended ACL An extended ACL always has a mask entry and can include any number of entries for named users and named groups If a file or directory has an extended ACL its permissions in the output of 1s 1 are followed by a plus sign The mask entry is the un
176. command 20 383 Index DNS Domain Name Service 165 308 CIFS 165 security 308 documentation online 345 Domain Name Service See DNS domain names 194 daemon 194 domains 177 DOS 22 71 73 84 143 161 232 commands QNX Neutrino equivalents 71 end of line characters converting 22 143 filesystems 84 161 floppies formatting 232 variables QNX Neutrino equivalents 73 DOS Denial Of Service attacks 309 dot directory link 292 dot dot directory link 292 dot file 143 double buffering 326 down arrow 52 65 dribble bits 263 drive letters 82 driverquery Windows XP command 173 drivers 23 29 51 53 94 173 179 191 253 character device 51 command line interpreting 51 console 29 53 253 debugging 23 determining which are running 173 network 179 191 ds 272 DSL Digital Subscriber Line 196 dumper 94 96 DVDs 231 DVMRP Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol 194 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol See DHCP dynamic HTML 267 270 271 272 Dynamic Linked Libraries See DLLs dynamic routing 190 E EAGAIN 159 ECC 339 values for spare area 339 Eclipse documentation 104 edited input mode 51 EDITOR 113 editors 57 109 110 113 default 113 elvis 110 emacs 57 ex 110 vi 110 EHCI Enhanced Host Controller Interface 246 EIDE 231 233 EILSEQ 84 ellipsis in command syntax 67 elvis 110 emacs 57 command line editing 57 384 embedded 33 55 86 134 148 149 164 267 273 338 filesystems creating 16
177. config ttys to determine what to launch on the consoles By default tinit launches a login command on the first console only but tinit is armed to launch a login on any other console on which you press a key This means that while console 1 is always available the other consoles aren t used unless you specifically switch to one of them and press a key If you increase the number of consoles on your machine make sure you edit etc config ttys sothat tinit will know what to start on the additional consoles Each virtual console can be running a different foreground application that uses the entire screen The keyboard is attached to the virtual console that s currently visible You can switch from one virtual console to another and thus from one application to another by entering these keychords If you want to go to the Press Next active console Ctrl Alt Enter or Ctri Alt Previous active console Ctrl Alt Use the plus and minus keys in the numeric keypad for these keychords dl You can also jump to a specific console by typing Ctrl Alt n where n is a digit that represents the console number of the virtual console For instance to go to dev con2 if available press Ctrl Alt 2 Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 53 54 Using the Command Line When you terminate the session by typing Logout or exit or by pressing Ctrl D the console is once again idle It doesn t a
178. continued synchronization primitives 343 TCP IP 343 terminals 333 canonical input buffer size 333 raw input buffer size 333 threads 342 timers 342 lines counting 63 links 70 152 153 154 155 291 292 293 circular preventing 155 creating to directory 291 directories 153 dot directory link 292 dot dot directory link 292 QNX4FS_FILE_LINK bit 293 removing 153 symbolic 70 154 removing 154 Linux Ext2 filesystem 84 163 335 In 70 154 loader blocks 289 296 creating 296 local 95 localtime 129 logger system 87 89 logging in 29 35 118 120 environment variables 120 profiles 118 logging out 31 login 29 46 53 91 193 remote 193 daemon 193 time of last 91 login file 120 login ID 34 41 43 creating 41 removing 43 login shell program 35 37 41 43 logman DOS command 71 LOGNAME 35 73 logout 31 54 long filenames enabling for QNX 4 filesystems 152 Ip UNIX command 20 Ipc UNIX command 20 Ipd 194 206 226 error messages 226 lock files 206 226 Ipd lock 206 226 Ipq DOS command 71 Ipq UNIX command 20 Ipr 20 71 203 205 206 217 224 356 DOS version 71 error messages 224 remote printing 217 Ipre 20 207 226 error messages 226 Iprm UNIX command 20 Iprq 20 207 224 error messages 224 Iprrm 20 207 226 error messages 226 Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited QNX Neutrino RTOS Ipstat UNIX command 20 Is 58 59 62 70 81 101 119 355 and access control lists 101
179. could Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Configuring your shell e set environment variables see Environment variables p 120 e run any commands that you need e set your file permission mask see File ownership and permissions p 97 in Working with Files If you want to create an alias you should do it in your shell s profile see ksh s startup file p 119 not in profile because the shell doesn t export aliases If you do set an alias in profile the alias is set only in shells that you start as login shells using the I option For an example of profile see the Examples appendix ksh s startup file As described above the login shell runs certain profiles In addition you can have a profile that ksh runs whenever you start a shell whether or not it s a login shell This profile doesn t have a specific name when you start ksh it checks the ENV environment variable If this variable exists ksh gets the name of the profile from it To set up ENV add a line like this to your SHOME profile p 118 file export ENV HOME kshrc People frequently call the profile kshrc but you can give it whatever name you want This file doesn t need to be executable Use ksh s profile to set up your favorite aliases and so on For example if you want 1s to always display characters that tell you if a file is executable a directory or a link add this line to the shell
180. crokernel design and message passing see the QNX Neutrino Microkernel and Interprocess Communication IPC chapters of the System Architecture guide pdebug Our remote debug agent pdebug runs on a target system and communicates with the gdb debugger on the host The pdebug agent can run as a dedicated server on a port be spawned from inetd with incoming connections or be spawned by qconn The pdebug agent is generally run as root so anyone can upload download or execute any arbitrary code at root s privilege level This agent was designed to be run on development systems not production machines There s no means of authentication or security and none is planned for the future See the section on qconn below qconn The qconn daemon is a server that runs on a target system and handles all incoming requests from our IDE The qconn server spawns pdebug for debugging requests profiles applications gathers system information and so on Like pdebug qconn is inherently insecure and is meant for development systems Unlike for pdebug we plan to give it a security model with some form of authentication This will let you leave qconn on production machines in the field to provide services such as remote upgrades and fault correction Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 311 Securing Your System Qnet IPSec 312 Qnet is QNX Neutrino s transparent networking protocol It s described in the Using Qnet for Transparen
181. cur Hardware will fail eventually power will be interrupted and so on The QNX 4 filesystem has been designed to tolerate such catastrophes It is based on the principal that the integrity of the filesystem as a whole should be consistent at all times While most data is held in the buffer cache and written after only a short delay critical filesystem data is written immediately Updates to directories inodes extent blocks and the bitmap are forced to disk to ensure that the filesystem structure on disk is never corrupt i e the data on disk should never be internally inconsistent The Power Safe filesystem is designed so that it should never be corrupted you ll always have a complete version of its data For more information see Power Safe filesystem in the Filesystems chapter of the System Architecture 9D guide It s still a good idea to back up your data but the part of this chapter on recovering data applies only to QNX 4 filesystems If a crash occurs you can such utilities as fdisk dinit chkfsys and spatch to detect and repair any damage that happened to files that were open for writing at the time of the crash In many cases you can completely restore the filesystem Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 277 Backing Up and Recovering Data Sometimes the damage may be more severe For example it s possible that a hard disk will develop a bad block in the middle of a file or worse in the middle
182. customize the system This chapter describes how you can customize the environment that you get when you log in and then describes some of the setup you might need to do Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Configuring Your Environment What happens when you log in Before you start customizing your login environment you should understand just what happens when you log in because the nature of the customization determines where you should make it You should consider these questions e Does this change apply to all users or just to me e Do need to do something only when first log in or whenever start a shell When you log in the system starts the login shell that s specified in your entry in the account database see etc passwd p 36 in Managing User Accounts The login shell is typically sh which is usually just a link to the Korn shell ksh When ksh starts as a login shell it executes these profiles if they exist and are executable e etc profile e SHOME profile Why have two profiles Settings that apply to all users go into etc profile your own customizations go into your own profile As you might expect you need to be root to edit etc profile There s actually a third profile for the shell The special thing about it is that it s executed whenever you start a shell see ksh s startup file p 119 below 116 Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Customizing you
183. d in fact many systems don t even have a shell shipped with them Effects of attacks Another way of classifying exploits is by their effect Takeover attacks These let the user take the machine over or at least cause it to do something unpredictable to the owner but predictable to the attacker Denial Of Service DOS attacks These are just disruptions An example of this is flood pinging a machine to slow down its networking to the point that it s unusable DOS attacks are notoriously difficult to deal with and often must be handled in a reactive rather than proactive fashion As an example there are very few systems that can t be brought to their knees by a malicious local user although with such tools as the ksh s ulimit builtin command you can often minimize these attacks Using these divisions you can look at a system and see which classes of attacks it could potentially be vulnerable to and take steps to prevent them Viruses A virus is generally considered to be an infection that runs code on the host e g a Trojan horse Viruses need an entry point and a host The entry points for a virus include e an open interface e g ActiveX QNX Neutrino has none e a security hole such as buffer overflows these are specific to flaws in specific services based on acommon industry standard code base These are limited since we ship only a limited set of standard BSD services Copyright 2014 QNX Software
184. d by the file must not be reassigned to another file Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 297 Backing Up and Recovering Data spatch You may sometimes find that files or directories have been completely lost due to disk corruption If after running chkfsys you know that certain key files or directories weren t recovered then you might be able to use spatch to recover some or all of this data The spatch utility lets you browse the raw disk and patch minor problems You can sometimes cure transient disk problems by reading and writing the failing block with spatch Before using spatch make sure you understand the details of a QNX 4 filesystem see QNX 4 disk structure p 289 earlier in this chapter 298 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Recovering disks and files Recovering disks and files Using chkfsys The chkfsys utility is your principal tool for checking and restoring a potentially damaged filesystem It can identify and correct a host of minor problems as well as verify the integrity of the disk system as a whole Normally chkfsys requires that the filesystem be idle and that no files be currently open on that device You ll have to shut down any processes that have opened files or that may need to open files while chkfsys Is running To run chkfsys on a mountpoint type chkfsys mountpoint The utility scans the entire disk partition from the root down building an in
185. d can be incremented more than once and must be balanced by the appropriate number of decrements If a file descriptor is closed or the process terminates then any local holds it contributed are automatically undone The advantage of this scheme is that it requires no special coordination between clients each can encapsulate its own sequence of atomic operations using its independent hold count struct fs_fileflags flags memset flags 0 sizeof struct fs_fileflags flags mask FS_FLAGS_FSYS ONX6FS_SNAPSHOT_HOLD flags bits FS_FLAGS_FSYS QNX6FS_SNAPSHOT_HOLD devctl fd DCMD_FSYS_FILE_FLAGS amp flags sizeof struct fs_fileflags NULL memset flags 0 sizeof struct fs_fileflags flags mask FS_FLAGS_FSYS QNX6FS_SNAPSHOT_HOLD flags bits FS_FLAGS_FSYS 0 devctl fd DCMD_FSYS_FILE_FLAGS flags sizeof struct fs_fileflags NULL In this case chattr isn t particularly useful to manipulate the state as the hold count is immediately reset once the utility terminates as its file descriptor is closed However it is convenient to report on the current status of the filesystem as it will display both the global and local flags as separate states chattr fs qnx6 fs qnx6 snapshot contiguous used hold If snapshot isn t displayed then snapshots have been disabled via the global flag If hold is displayed then snapshots have been disabled due to a global nonzero hold count by an unspecified numbe
186. d twisted pair STP shielded twisted pair Fiber AUI Attachment Unit Interface MII or BNC coaxial Active PHY Address This is an identifier that tells you which of the physical PHYs were used to interface to the network The numbers range from O 31 and change depending on whether or not you specified a specific PHY or if you let the driver select the default which varies from card to card Power Management State This value tells you the NIC s current power status Off Standby Idle or Active If you can t send or receive packets make sure the status is Active if it isn t there may be a problem with power management on your system Maximum Transmittable data Unit MTU The Maximum Transmittable data Unit MTU is the size of the largest frame length that can be sent on a physical media This isn t commonly used for debugging however it may be useful for optimizing a network application A value of O is invalid and is a good indicator that the card isn t set up correctly The default value is 1514 Maximum Receivable data Unit MRU This is the MTU s complement it affects the largest frame length that can be received The default value is 1514 Receive Checksumming Enabled Transmit Checksumming Enabled Not all cards support these options If your adapter supports them they tell your card which check summing method to use IPv4 TCPv4 UDPv4 TCPv6 or UDPv6 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 25
187. ded shell esh provides a scripting environment for running simple scripts in an embedded environment where the overhead of the full ksh might be too much It supports the execution of utilities simple redirection filename expansion aliases and environment manipulation The fat embedded shell fesh provides the same limited environment as esh but supplies additional builtin commands for commonly used utilities to reduce the overhead of including them in an embedded system The fesh shell includes builtins for cp df 1s mkdir rm and rmdir although in most cases the builtin provides only the core functionality of the utility and isn t a complete replacement for it The micro embedded shell uesh provides a subset of esh s functionality and is suitable for situations with very limited memory python Is a powerful object oriented language that you can use for processing files manipulating strings parsing HTML and much more sed is a stream editor which makes it most useful for performing repeated changes to a file or set of files It s often used for scripts or as a utility within other scripts gawk GNU awk is a programming language for pattern matching and working with the contents of files You can also use it for scripting or call it from within scripts The Bazaar project on our Foundry 27 website http community qnx com includes per1 which like gawk is useful for working with files and patterns The name per1 stands fo
188. e a network MAC address can be spoofed i e the card accepts all packets whether they re addressed to it or not Then on a higher software level you can accept packets addressed to whomever you please Promiscuous mode is disabled by default Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Network adapters Multicast Support When you enable multicast mode you can mark a packet with a special destination so that multiple nodes on the network may receive it Multicast packets are also accepted Packets Transmitted OK Before you look at this value determine that some form of network transfer ping telnet file transfer was attempted If a card isn t set up properly the number of sent packets shown here is either very small or zero If the card isn t displaying any sent packets the cause is probably a driver problem Check all the options you re passing to the driver one or more may be incorrect Bytes Transmitted OK This is the number of bytes of data sent on the network This value increases with the number of packets transmitted on the network Total Packets Transmitted Bad You can use this statistic to determine if you have faulty hardware If all the sent packets are reported as bad there s likely a hardware problem but you might be using the wrong driver Check the hardware for compatibility If it looks as if it s hardware related try switching the hardware to see if the problem disappears Broadcast Packets Tra
189. e are no corresponding disk blocks are turned on Bit assignments start with the least significant bit of byte O of the first bitmap block which corresponds to QNX 4 block 1 Root directory The root directory follows the bitmap blocks The root directory is a normal directory see the Directories p 292 section with two exceptions e Both dot and dot dot are links to the same inode information namely the root directory inode in the root block e The root directory always has entries for the bitmap inodes boot and altboot files These entries are provided so programs that report information on filesystem usage see the entries as normal files The dinit utility creates this directory with initially enough room for 32 directory entries 4 blocks 290 Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited QNX 4 disk structure The root directory contains directory entries for several special files that always exist in a QNX 4 filesystem The dinit utility creates these files when the filesystem is first initialized bitmap inodes AP boot gt altboot gt longfilenames Figure 9 Contents of the root directory File Description bitmap Represents a read only file that contains a map of all the blocks on the disk indicating which blocks are used inodes A normal file of at least one block on a floppy RAM disk and 16 bl
190. e backups on because these choices are the primary factors that affect the hardware and media costs associated with the system To make the best choice first take a close look at what you need to back up and how often you need to do it This information determines the storage capacity transfer bandwidth and the degree to which multiple users can share the resource Your choices of backup media vary depending on whether you create backup copies of your data on a local machine or on a remote machine by transferring the data via a network e Local backups offer the advantage of speed and potentially greater control by the end user but are limited to backup technologies and media types that QNX Neutrino supports directly e Remote backups often allow use of company wide backup facilities and open up additional storage options but are limited by the need to transfer data across a network and by the fact that the facilities are often shared restricting your access for storing or retrieving your backups Here s a summary of some of the backup media you might consider and their availability for local or remote backups Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 279 Backing Up and Recovering Data Media Local QNX Neutrino Remote Yes Yes Floppy LS 120 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Tape CD DVD Hard disk Yes Yes Flash device USB mass storage device Choosing a backup format Controlling your backup 280
191. e card s I O port and IRQ If the driver fails to start e Ensure that the devp pccard server has a free memory window at 0xD4000 e Check the BIOS on the PC or Laptop to see that this memory isn t cached or used by another device e Check that the PC Card controller in the BIOS is set to CardBus 16bit not PCIC mode If the chipset is set up in PCIC compatible mode the chip works like an Intel 82365 compatible PCMCIA controller and isn t visible in the PCI space If the chipset is set to CardBus 16bit the chip is visible in the PCI space and operates as a PC Card adapter To display PC Card information use the pin utility The output that appears on your screen should look like this pin Sock Func Type Flags PID Base Size IRQ 1 Empty j ass MP gt None Empty 2 gt MP None 0 Network a Gaa E None 0x300 32 7 Empty ME None NES Each socket has two entries because the driver devp pccard supports combination cards that give room for two functions in each slot The categories displayed in the output example above are Sock The slot where the PC Card is attached In the example above the Network card appears in slot 2 Func Used when the card is a multifunction PC Card Type A label for the PC Card s function If the card is a Network card the Type column displays Network Flags Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 243 Connecting Hardware Flags that aren t set are marked as The
192. e command line into tokens parses them and invokes the program or programs that you asked for The specific details depend on the shell that you re using this section describes what ksh does As you type the Korn shell immediately processes the keys that you use to edit the command line p 57 including completing commands and filenames p 57 When you press Enter the shell processes the command line 1 The shell breaks the command line into tokens that are delimited by whitespace or by the special characters that the shell processes As it forms words the shell builds commands e simple commands usually programs that you want to run e g less my_file e compound commands including reserved words p 58 grouping constructs and function definitions You can also specify multiple commands p 58 on the command line The shell processes aliases p 59 recursively 4 The shell does any required substitutions p 59 including parameters commands and filenames The shell does any redirection p 62 6 The shell matches the remaining commands in this order special builtins functions regular builtins executables Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Shell To override the order in which the shell processes the command line you use quoting p 63 to change the meaning of the special characters The sections that follow give the briefest descriptions of these steps ksh is
193. e contains In QNX Neutrino filesystems extensions are just an ordinary part of the filename and can be any length as long as the total filename size stays within the 505 byte filename length limit Most of the time file extensions are simply naming conventions but some utilities base their behavior on the extension See Filename extensions p 104 for a list of some of the common extensions used in a QNX Neutrino system Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Filenames and pathnames Pathname space mapping You may have noticed that we ve talked about files and directories appearing in their parent directories rather than just saying that the parent directories contain these files This is because in QNX Neutrino the pathname space is virtual dictated not just by the filesystem that resides on media mounted at root but rather by the paths and pathname aliases registered by the process manager For example let s take a small portion of the pathname space ser1 In a typical disk based QNX Neutrino system the directory maps to the root of a filesystem on a physical hard drive partition This filesystem on disk doesn t actually contain a dev directory which exists virtually adopted via the process manager In turn the filename ser1 doesn t exist on a disk filesystem either it has been adopted by the serial port driver This capability allows virtual directory unions to be created This
194. e documentation for the hardware should describe the type of chipset used If you don t know what type of chipset you re using you can identify it using pci VVV Find the entry for the Network controller and it ll give you details on the manufacturer vendor ID and device ID Either find the information on the manufacturer s website or use the vendor ID and device ID to cross reference it with this online site http www pcidatabase com With the information you get from that site you can visit the supported hardware page in the Community area of our website http www qnx com In the Network section locate your chipset and its associated driver Start the driver Once you ve located the correct driver for your hardware use io pkt to start the driver You can either start the driver as an option to io pkt or you can mount the driver into an already running copy of io pkt For example to start io pkt v4 hc with the devn e1900 so 3Com 905 module type io pkt v4 hc d el900 t tcpip amp To mount the module type io pkt v4 he t tcpip amp mount T io pkt devn el900 so The driver automatically detects similar network adapters for multiple networks You can use the mount utility to mount different adapters 254 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Network adapters Make sure the driver is communicating properly with the hardware Use the nicinfo utility to check if you re receiv
195. e entry for ksh in the Utilities Reference 132 Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Chapter 8 Writing Shell Scripts Shell scripting at its most basic is taking a series of commands you might type at a command line and putting them into a file so you can reproduce them again at a later date or run them repeatedly without having to type them over again You can use scripts to automate repeated tasks handle complex tasks that might be difficult to do correctly without repeated tries redoing some of the coding or both Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 133 Writing Shell Scripts Available shells The shell that you ll likely use for scripting under QNX Neutrino is ksh a public domain implementation of the Korn shell The sh command is usually a symbolic link to ksh For more information about this shell see the Using the Command Line p 49 chapter in this guide the entry for ksh in the Utilities Reference Rosenblatt Bill and Arnold Robbins 2002 Learning the Korn Shell 2nd Edition Sebastopol CA O Reilly amp Associates ISBN 0 596 00195 9 QNX Neutrino also supplies or uses some other scripting environments An OS buildfile has a script file section tagged by script The mkifs parses this script but it s executed by procnto at boot time It provides a very simple scripting environment with the ability to run a series of commands and a small amount of synchronization The embed
196. e is intended for programmers who develop QNX Neutrino based applications as well as OEMs and other resellers of the OS who may want to pass this guide on to their end users as a way to provide documentation for the OS component of their product e Your system might not include all of the things that this guide describes depending on what software you ve installed For example some utilities are included with the OS and others are included in a specific Board Support Package BSP The online version of this guide contains links to various books throughout our entire documentation set if you don t have the entire set installed on your system you ll naturally get some bad link errors e g File not found e Disable PnP aware OS in the BIOS The following table may help you find information quickly To find out about How QNX Neutrino compares to other Getting to Know the OS p 19 operating systems Starting and ending a session and turning Logging In Logging Out and Shutting off a QNX Neutrino system Down p 27 Adding users to the system managing Managing User Accounts p 33 passwords etc The basics of using the keyboard Using the Command Line p 49 command line and shell command interpreter Files directories and permissions Working with Files p 77 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 13 About the QNX Neutrino User s Guide 14 To find out about How to
197. e on disk 70 146 spare area 339 340 ECC values 339 updates to BSPs 340 spatch 298 301 examining blocks within a file 301 special characters quoting 63 140 spell UNIX command 20 spoofing 256 258 spooler 203 356 configuration files 356 spooling 203 208 220 directories 208 220 src 96 SSI 271 stack smashing attack 308 standard 1 0 62 323 326 performance 323 326 redirecting 62 standards 20 startup 87 89 code 87 debugging 89 startup apic 344 startup bios 344 stat 320 static routing 189 statistics system 316 318 status system 316 statvfs 320 323 stderr 62 stdin 62 STDIO_DEFAULT_BUFSIZE 320 323 326 stdio h 323 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited QNX Neutrino RTOS stdout 62 sticky bit 99 stream editor sed 134 strftime 129 stty 251 253 266 su 43 SuperDisk drives 237 superuser 28 support technical 345 supported hardware 229 symbolic links 70 81 154 cd command and 81 removing 154 SYMLOOP_MAX 155 Symmetric Multiprocessing SMP 24 sync 158 324 sys 95 sysconf 332 sysinit 180 SYSNAME 118 system 28 32 87 89 104 194 299 302 316 318 329 342 administrator 28 initialization local 299 chkfsys 299 limits 342 logger 87 89 profiling 104 316 rebooting 32 recovering data after crash 299 shutting down 32 size reducing 329 statistics 316 318 status 194 316 rwhod daemon 194 troubleshooting boot failure 302 System Analysis Toolkit SAT 104 316 System Bui
198. e time zone 124 On the command line you can set the time zone by setting the TZ environment variable or the _CS_TIMEZONE configuration string If TZ isn t set the system uses the value of the _CS_TIMEZONE configuration string instead The POSIX standards include the TZ environment variable _CS_TIMEZONE is a QNX Neutrino implementation The description below applies to both Various time functions use the time zone information to compute times relative to Coordinated Universal Time UTC formerly known as Greenwich Mean Time GMT You usually set the time on your computer to UTC Use the date command if the time isn t automatically maintained by the computer hardware You can set the TZ environment variable by using the env utility or the export shell command You can use setconf to set _CS_TIMEZONE For example env TZ PST8PDT export TZ PST8PDT setconf _CS_TIMEZONE PST8PDT The format of the TZ environment variable or _CS_ TIMEZONE string is as follows spaces are for clarity only std offset dst offset rule The expanded format is as follows stdoffset dst offset start timel end timel The components are std and dst Three or more letters that you specify to designate the standard or daylight saving time zone Only std is required If you omit dst then daylight saving time doesn t apply in this locale Upper and lowercase letters
199. ective group ID or any of its supplementary group IDs The matched entry is one of the granting entries it doesn t matter which else Access is denied else if the requested access modes are granted by the other ACL entry The matched entry is the other entry if the requested access modes are granted by the matched entry if the matched entry is the owning user or other entry Access is granted else if the requested access modes are also granted by the mask entry or no mask entry exists in the ACL Access is granted else Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited File ownership and permissions Access is denied else Access is denied For more information about get facil or setfacl see the Utilities Reference There are also functions that you can use to work with ACLs in your programs for information about them see Working with Access Control Lists in the QNX Neutrino Programmer s Guide and the acl_ entries in the QNX Neutrino C Library Reference e The POSIX draft also describes default ACLs that specify the initial ACL for new objects created within a directory Default ACLs aren t currently implemented e ACLs are currently ephemeral if you reboot your system any ACLs are lost e Changes to file permissions resulting from a change to an ACL do persist across reboots e The cp utility doesn t copy any ACL that the source fi
200. ed i nodes the file s directory entry points to the inode record home giuseppe File contents File contents Figure 2 One file referenced by two links Note that you can create a link to a file only if the file and the link are in the same filesystem There are two other situations in which a file can have an entry in the inodes file e Ifa file s filename is longer than 16 characters the inode information is stored in the inodes file making room for a 48 character filename in the directory entry Filenames greater than 48 characters are stored within a longfilenames file which has room for a 505 character name a truncated 48 character name is also placed in the directory entry for use by legacy systems e lf a file at one time had more than one link and all links but one have been removed the file continues to have a separate inodes file entry This is done because the overhead of searching for the directory entry that points to the inode entry would be prohibitive there are no links from inode entries back to the directory entries Removing links When a file is created it s given a ink count of one As you add and remove links to and from the file this link count is incremented and decremented The disk space occupied by the file data isn t freed and marked as unused in the bitmap until its link count goes to zero and all programs using the file have closed it This allows an
201. edit files Customizing your shell setting the time etc Creating your own commands The filesystems that QNX Neutrino supports Accessing other machines with QNX Neutrino s native networking Setting up TCP IP Go to Using Editors p 109 Configuring Your Environment p 115 Writing Shell Scripts p 133 Working with Filesystems p 145 Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing p 175 TCP IP Networking p 187 Adding printers to your system and using Printing p 203 Adding USB devices terminals video cards and other hardware to your system Adding embedded HTTP services and dynamic content to embedded web applications Backing up and restoring your files Making your QNX Neutrino system more Analyzing and improving your machine s performance How many processes files etc your system can support Connecting Hardware p 229 Setting Up an Embedded Web Server p 267 Backing Up and Recovering Data p 277 Securing Your System p 307 Fine Tuning Your System p 315 Understanding System Limits p 331 How to get help Technical Support p 345 Samples of buildfiles profiles etc For information about programming in QNX Neutrino see Get Programming with the QNX Neutrino RTOS and the QNX Neutrino Programmer s Guide Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Typographical conventions Typographical conventions Throughout this manual we use cer
202. eep the archive on your local system but we recommend that you keep a copy of it on a remote system if the local system gets physically damaged or the hard disk is corrupted you ll lose a local archive Extracting from an archive 282 To extract from the archive you can use pax with the r option For example pax rf my_archive tar or tar with the x extract v verbose and f filename options tar xvf my archive tar Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Archiving your data To view the contents of the archive without extracting them use tar with the t option instead of x Compressing an archive An archive can be quite large especially if you archive the entire partition To conserve space you can compress archives although it takes some time to compress on storage and decompress on retrieval QNX Neutrino includes the following compressors and decompressors e bzip2 and bunzip2 e freeze and melt e gzip and gunzip The best choice is usually gzip because it s supported on many operating systems while freeze is used mainly for compatibility with QNX 4 systems There are also many third party compressors The gzip utility is licensed under the Gnu Public License GPL which is a consideration if you re going to distribute gzip to others as part of the backup solution you re developing For example to compress my_archive tar to create a new file called my_arc
203. elease yigg Serial Number N A Class 0x00 Independent per interface Max PacketSize0 238 Languages 0x0409 English Current Frame 511 1024 bytes Configurations ae Configuration z 1 Attributes Oxa0 Bus powered Remote wakeup Max Power 50 mA Interfaces 2 2 Interface 20 7 0 Class 0x03 HID Subclass 0x01 Boot interface Protocol 0x01 Keyboard Endpoints Control 1 Endpoint q Attributes Control Max Packet Size 8 Endpoint 2i Attributes Interrupt IN Max Packet Size 8 Interval 20 ms Interface y Ee 0 Class 0x03 HID Subclass 0x01 Boot interface Protocol 0x02 Mouse Endpoints Control 1 Endpoint 0 Attributes Control Max Packet Size 8 The vendor and product fields indicate the type of device and possibly what chipset it uses The common types of USB controllers are UHCI Universal Host Controller Interface EHCI Enhanced Host Controller Interface 246 Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited USB devices OHCI Open Host Controller Interface made by others XHCI Extensible Host Controller Interface e The EHCI controller supports high speed signalling only OHCI UHCI or XHCI controller s should be present to support low or full speed devices If your system doesn t have an EHCI controller the device will work at the slower speed e The XHCI stack supports high full and low speeds The operating system needs to run the stac
204. ell interprets the and passes to find the list of files in the current directory with an extension of html If you quote the html the shell passes the string as is to find which then uses it to match all of the files in this directory and below in the filesystem hierarchy with that extension In a similar way if you don t quote the realtime OS string at all the shell generates a list of files that match the pattern Quoting it once realtime OS works for a single invocation of grep but this example has the added complexity of the xargs command The xargs command takes a command line as its argument and the shell interprets this command line for each item that s passed to xargs If you don t want the realtime OS string to be interpreted by the shell at all you need to put nested quotes around the pattern that you want to pass to grep xargs grep 1 realtime OS The quoting also indicates when you want to execute the less command As given the shell passes the output from all of the invocations of xargs to less In contrast this command find name html xargs grep 1 realtime OS less passes the command grep 1 realtime OS less Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Shell to xargs which will have quite different results if it works at all For more information see Quoting in the entry for ksh in the Utilities Reference History recalling commands The shell lets
205. em and they re found to be invalid Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Checking out the neighborhood For example someone might have booted a node an hour ago run it for a minute then shut it down It will still have an entry in the net directories of the other Qnet nodes if they never talk to it If they did talk to it and establish session connections everything will eventually be torn down as the session connections time out To flush out invalid entries from net type ls 1 net To completely clean out net type rmdir net Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 183 Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing Troubleshooting Is Qnet running All the software components for the Qnet network should work in unison with the hardware to build a native network If your Qnet network isn t working you can use various Qnet utilities to fetch diagnostic information to troubleshoot your hardware as well as the network Some of the typical questions are e Is Qnet running p 184 e Are io pkt and the drivers running p 184 e Is the network card functional p 185 e How do get diagnostic information p 185 e Is the hostname unique p 186 e Are the nodes in the same domain p 186 Qnet creates the net directory Use the following command to make sure that it exists ls net If you don t see any directory Qnet isn t running Ideally the directory shou
206. ena das selennelaeetauch ste sth e a a a a a a n aAa 232 ALG CISKS A Ae y aT eae S AaS y aA Taa a Aa EA E a e AAT 233 D E E E E o la AEA A E EA E 233 SOSA E E SE E A EE E E EEEE EEA E E E 236 SCSI RAID tata ici 237 S212 Or da a A a A a a es Si a id 237 UR Ate AU ai on is Ae AN ee ta Lah aN BR EEA 238 Zips and Jaz GiskS ii A a a a ais 238 RAM diSKS ii A A A A A a aaa 240 AUGIO CAndS OO 241 O A NN 241 POCOS ita daservarersaareuusscedvea E E E A os dada daras dado 242 PCCARD and PEMCIA cards viii dira AR TIE EAEE 243 USB AVI iii A A 246 SA O 248 TOUCHSCFEENS viciado AEEA EENE 248 Ethernet adapta alan a ERa 249 Mass storage devices ooccooccnccnnoccnoccnonnnnnncnnnconnnonnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnonnnenaninaninncnnns 249 Character devidas iia taa 251 General serial adapters aii A A E 251 Multiport serial adapters occcocccoccccoccconccnnconnnononeninoncnoncnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnonnnonannnaninannnns 252 Parallel DOS A A AAA th A ee es 252 A e das 253 VO ALENIDULES iconos ai e aid 253 Network adapters 120 A a 254 Identify your NIG a o o e e o o ro 254 Start A Dyn acu ce EAA Svcs wet cons DEEE Wis Seen ydcun eee Mea ee 254 Make sure the driver is communicating properly with the hardware ssccceeceeeeeees 255 Modems ceci a a NASK LESARAR dnde 264 Internal MAS dai ia A AA 264 PEL Dased modernis casnicie nenne ani sa iA kalesa ESERE aiSia eea Senari kaaa 265 External modems evrrcooriiorca ada REEERE ERE AVEA AEA AE ONE AE RA
207. ent To build the image using this buildfile you ll need to be root because it takes a copy of etc passwd and etc shadow which make passwords easy to remember but you can also put your own version of them into the buildfile as inline files Using two computers with modems you can have one automatically answer establish PPP services and authenticate You can then telnet and tftp to the server from a Client Use these client pppd parameters in addition to the same chap secrets file pppd connect chat v f tmp dial_modem auth chap dev ser3 Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited PPP with CHAP authentication between two QNX Neutrino boxes but use the appropriate serial port for the client side modem instead of dev ser3 Make sure you use the full path to your modem script The chat script dial_modem is fairly simple ABORT NO CARRIER ABORT ERROR ABORT BUSY ATDTXXXXXXX CONNECT Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 361 Glossary administrator See superuser alias A shell feature that lets you create new commands or specify your favorite options For example alias my_1s 1s F creates an alias called my_1s that the shell replaces with 1s F atomic Of or relating to atoms In operating systems this refers to the requirement that an operation or sequence of operations be considered indivisible For example a thread may need to move a file position
208. eparate mechanisms for print spooling e the standard UNIX like 1pr utility see Printing with 1pr p 205 e the spooler utility see Printing with spooler p 220 If you want to use the 1pr family you have to set up the printer configuration file etc printcap You can use lpr spooler or both depending on how you ve set up your machine and network e f you ve attached a USB printer to your machine you need to run the USB stack and devu prn see USB devices p 246 in the Connecting Hardware chapter and then you can use either the 1pr family or spooler e f you ve attached your printer to your machine s serial port you need to use the lpr family e f you ve attached your printer to your machine s parallel port you can use either the lpr family or spooler e If you want to use a network printer or a printer that s attached to another node s parallel port you need to use a TCP IP network for the 1pr family spooler can use Qnet SAMBA NCFTP or even the lpr family to print on remote printers In order to print remotely you have to set up some configuration files whether you use the 1pr family or spooler Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 203 Printing Another difference is that the 1pd daemon manages all of the defined printers spooler manages one printer but you can run more than one instance of spooler at a time 204 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Printing
209. er If two devices have the same ID one or both may malfunction or not be recognized by the computer e ls there a PCI bridging problem Try moving the SCSI card to another PCI slot Sometimes a PCI bridging problem can prevent QNX Neutrino from properly attaching to the card This can happen because QNX Neutrino doesn t support bridges of type other e ls the BIOS set up for a PnP aware OS QNX Neutrino isn t a PnP aware OS e Does the adapter or chain need an external power source If so even if the device has power it can t communicate with your computer if the SCSI adapter doesn t have power e Check the type of SCSI cable There are several types and the type of adapter you re using determines the type of cable you need Also check to make sure that there are no bent pins on the cable If you re using an adapter to convert between SCSI 2 and SCSI 3 for example make sure you re using an adapter that s recommended for your hardware Not all adapters convert the connections correctly Under QNX 4 the SCSI drivers didn t support any device that had an ID greater than 6 This isn t a problem under later versions of QNX Neutrino 9D The maximum rate given for a SCSI device is the maximum theoretical burst interface throughput Sustained throughput depends on many factors SCSI RAID Currently QNX Neutrino supports only hardware RAID Redundant Arrays of Independent Disks devices There are many third party solutions f
210. er while customizing your environment A script putin etc profile d doesn t run Check the following e Make sure that the script s name has ksh or sh as its extension e Make sure the executable bit is set on the script e Make sure that the script begins with the line bin sh How do I set the time so it s right in QNX Neutrino and Microsoft Windows If you have Windows in one partition and QNX Neutrino in another on your machine you might notice that setting the clock on one OS changes it on the other Under QNX Neutrino you usually set the hardware clock to use UTC Coordinated Universal Time and then set the time zone Under Windows you set the hardware clock to use local time To set the time so that it s correct in both operating systems set the hardware clock to use local time under QNX Neutrino How can I properly check if kshrc is being run as a script rather than as a terminal session If the i option is set then kshrc is running in interactive mode Here s some code that checks to see if this option is set case in 3 set o emacs export EDITOR vi export VISUAL vi export PS1 hostname s bin pwd gt bind z list bind I complete esac Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 131 Configuring Your Environment The parameter is a concatenation of all the single letter options that are set for the script For more information see Parameters in th
211. es These precautions will help prevent anybody from giving your machine a new password file or tampering with your web pages For more information see the Securing Your System p 307 chapter in this guide Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 273 Setting Up an Embedded Web Server Examples Configuration Script 274 Here are some examples of setting up an embedded web server We recommend that you put your documents and scripts in separate directories In this example the documents are in the usr local httpa directory the root document is index html and the CGI scripts are in usr www cgi bin export HTTPD_ROOT_DIR usr local httpd export HTTPD_ROOT_DOC index html export HTTPD_SCRIPTALIAS usr www cgi bin slinger The following example is the wrong way to configure Slinger Anyone can download the scripts because the documents and scripts are in the same directory export HTTPD_ROOT_DIR usr www export HTTPD_ROOT_DOC index html export HTTPD_SCRIPTALIAS usr www slinger To configure Slinger to start with SSI and enable debugging you can use these commands export HTTPD_ROOT_DIR usr local httpd export HTTPD_ROOT_DOC index shtml export HTTPD_SCRIPTALIAS usr www cgi bin slinger des Here are two examples of a simple CGI script that displays a randomly selected image on a web page The same script is presented here in C and perl so that you can see how to imp
212. esolution In a QNX Neutrino network the process by which the Qnet network manager converts an FQNN to a list of destination addresses that the transport layer knows how to get to name resolver Program code that attempts to convert an FQNN to a destination address NDP Node Discovery Protocol proprietary QNX Software Systems protocol for broadcasting name resolution requests on a QNX Neutrino LAN network directory A directory in the pathname space that s implemented by the Qnet network manager NFS Network FileSystem a TCP IP application that lets you graft remote filesystems or portions of them onto your local namespace Directories on the remote systems appear as part of your local filesystem and all the utilities you use for listing and managing files e g 1s cp mv operate on the remote files exactly as they do on your local files Node Discovery Protocol See NDP node domain A character string that the Qnet network manager tacks onto the nodename to form an FQNN Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited nodename A unique name consisting of a character string that identifies a node on a network package A directory tree of files laid out in a structure that matches where they would be if they were transported to the root of some filesystem package filesystem A virtual filesystem manager that presents a customized view of a set of files and directories to a client The
213. esystem semantics and happens to be relatively close to POSIX 168 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Universal Disk Format UDF filesystem Universal Disk Format UDF filesystem The Universal Disk Format UDF filesystem provides access to recordable media such as CD CD R CD RW and DVD It s used for DVD video but can also be used for backups to CD and so on The UDF filesystem is supported by the s udf so shared object The devb drivers automatically load fs udf so when mounting a UDF filesystem Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 169 Working with Filesystems Apple Macintosh HFS and HFS Plus The Apple Macintosh HFS Hierarchical File System and HFS Plus are the filesystems on Apple Macintosh systems The s mac so shared object provides read only access to HFS and HFS Plus disks on a QNX Neutrino system The following variants are recognized HFS HFS Plus HFS Plus in an HFS wrapper HFSX and HFS ISO 9660 hybrid This shared object also recognizes HFSJ HFS Plus with journal but only when the journal is clean not when it s dirty from an unclean shutdown In a traditional PC partition table type 175 is used for HFS The devb drivers automatically load fs mac so when mounting an HFS or HFS Plus filesystem 170 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Windows NT filesystem Windows NT filesystem The NT filesystem is used on Microsoft Windows NT and l
214. et dasher date where net dasher Is the name of the node that you want to run the command on When you invoke a command on another node the command s standard input standard output and standard error output are displayed on your console screen or terminal unless you explicitly redirect them to another device Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Utilities To run a command on a specific tty use the t option specifying the terminal name For example on t cona login root For more information see the on command in the Utilities Reference Priorities By default when you start a utility or other program it runs at the same priority as ts parent Actually priorities aren t associated with a process but with the process s threads You can determine the priority of a process s threads by looking at the output of the pidin Process ID INformation command If you want to run something at a specific priority use on specifying the p option If you want to specify a relative priority use the nice command Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 69 Using the Command Line 70 Basic commands Here are some QNX Neutrino commands that you ll frequently use If you want to Use Determine your current directory pwd builtin ksh command Change directory cd builtin ksh command List the contents of a directory un K i Rename move files and directories Delete remove files Copy fi
215. et up your printer descriptions see also etc printcap in the Utilities Reference If you ve attached a USB printer to your machine and started the USB stack and devu prn as described in USB devices p 246 in the Connecting Hardware chapter you should set up the etc printcap file to be something like this hpps lp dev usbpar0 sd usr spool output hpps This file gives the name hpps to the USB printer identifies the file to open as dev usbparo or whatever device devu prn created and identifies the spooling directory as usr spool output hpps To access this printer specify lpr Phpps or set the PRINTER environment variable to hpps Make sure that the spooling directory exists Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Printing with lpr Single printer Let s assume we have two nodes nodel and node2 and node1 has a printer connected to dev parl A TCP IP lt gt node1 node2 The etc printcap file on node1 might be as follows lpti lp dev parl This file simply gives the name 1pt 1 to the printer connected to dev parl It doesn t need to describe any other capabilities because the default settings suffice To access this printer from node1 specify lpr Plpt1 or set the PRINTER environment variable to 1pt 1 9 Make sure the spooling directory exists and that there s an entry for node2 i
216. ete the current line Paste text before the cursor Paste text after the cursor O In some implementations of vi including QNX Neutrino s you can also use the arrow keys to move the cursor whether you re in command or input mode You can combine the commands to make them even more useful for example type a number before dd to delete several lines at once In addition vi has 26 named buffers that let you easily cut or copy and paste different blocks of text Using Editors You can find numerous resources tutorials and command summaries online In QNX Neutrino vi is actually a link to elvis see the Utilities Reference Integrated Development Environment IDE editors On Linux and Windows the Integrated Development Environment IDE incorporates various specialized editors for creating C and C programs buildfiles and so on For more information see the IDE User s Guide The Bazaar project on our Foundry27 website http communit y qnx com may include other editors as well as other third party software that you might find useful Note that we don t support these editors 112 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Specifying the default editor Specifying the default editor Some system processes ask you to use an editor to provide some information For example if you check something into a version control system you re asked to explain the changes you made Such processes
217. eted per second commit level Number created Number deleted Note that at the commit high level all disk writes are synchronous so there s a noticeable cost in updating the directory entries and the POSIX mt ime on the parent directory At the commit none level all disk writes are time delayed in the write behind cache and so multiple files can be created deleted in the in memory block without requiring any physical disk access at all so of course any power failure here would mean that those files wouldn t exist when the system is restarted Record size This example illustrates how the record size affects sequential file access on an x86 PI11 725 machine with a UDMA 4 EIDE disk using the QNX 4 filesystem The table lists the rates in megabytes per second of writing and reading a 256 MB file Record size Writing Reading Note that the sequential read rate doubles based on use of a suitable record size This is because the overheads of context switching and message passing are reduced Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 325 Fine Tuning Your System consider that reading the 256 MB file 1 KB at a time requires 262 144 _TO_READ messages whereas with 16 KB records it requires only 16 384 such messages 1 16th of the non negligible overheads Write performance doesn t show the same dramatic change because the user data Is by default placed in the write behind buffer cache and written in large conti
218. ext piece xargs grep 1 does a couple of things e grep is a file contents search utility It searches the files given on its command line for the first argument The 1 is another special variable in the shell that represents the first argument we passed to the shell script i e the string we re looking for e xargs is a utility that takes its input and turns it into command line parameters for some other command that you give it Here it takes the list of files from find and makes them command line arguments to grep In this case we re using xargs primarily for efficiency we could do something similar with just find find name ch exec grep i less which loads and runs the grep program for every file found The command that we actually used find name ch xargs grep 1 less runs grep only when xargs has accumulated enough files to fill a command line generally resulting in far fewer invocations of grep and a more efficient script The final piece less is an output pager The entire command may generate a lot of output that might scroll off the terminal so less presents this to you a page at a time with the ability to move backwards and forwards through the data The case statement also includes the following after the find command exit 0 good status Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Example of a Korn shell script This returns a value of O from this script In shell programmi
219. facturer size model number you can simply attach the drive to the system Make sure you know which position the drive is set up as e g EIDE Primary Slave Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Storage choices Once you ve attached the drive boot the QNX Neutrino system The system should automatically detect the hard drive and create an entry in the dev directory for it The new entry should appear as dev hd1 if there are only two drives in the system lf there are more than two then the drive could be hd1 hd2 and so on In this case use the fdisk to identify which drive is which The new drive shouldn t have any partitions set up on it and should be blank Be absolutely positive about the drives before continuing because v if you don t identify the drives correctly you could copy the contents of the blank hard drive onto your original drive and you ll lose all your data There s no way to recover from this Once you ve identified the drives type cp V dev hd0 dev hdl where hd0 is the original hard disk and hd1 is the new drive that you re copying to This command copies everything from the first drive including partition tables boot loaders and so on onto the second drive To test that the copy was successful remove the original drive and put the backup drive in its place then boot the system from the backup drive The system should boot into QNX Neutrino and look the same as your original
220. figuration options for ftpd that apply once you ve authenticated your connection See com qnx doc neutrino utilities topic f ftpd conf html in the Utilities Reference etc ftpusers Defines users who may access the machine via the File Transfer Protocol See etc ftpusers in the Utilities Reference etc group User account group definitions see Managing User Accounts p 33 etc hosts Network hostname lookup database see also etc nsswitch conf and etc resolv conf below See etc hosts in the Utilities Reference etc inetd conf 90 Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Where everything is stored Internet super server configuration file that defines Internet services that inetd starts and stops dynamically as needed The descriptions in the default version of this file are commented out uncomment the ones that you want to use See e etc inetd conf in the Utilities Reference etc motd Contains an ASCII message of the day that may be displayed when users log in as long as etc profile is configured to display it The default etc profile displays this file only if the etc motd file is more recent than the time you last logged in to the system as determined by the time your HOME lastlogin file was last modified For more information see the description of etc prof ile p 118 in Configuring Your Environment etc networks Network name database file For more information see etc
221. for troubleshooting These utilities query hosts servers and the gateways to fetch diagnostic information to locate faults Some of the typical queries are e Are io pkt and the drivers running p 199 e What is the name server information p 199 e How do I map hostnames to IP addresses p 200 e How do get the network status p 200 e How do make sure l m connected to other hosts p 200 e How do display information about an interface controller p 201 Are io pkt and the drivers running As mentioned before io pkt is the framework used to connect drivers and protocols In order to troubleshoot this use the pidin command pidin P io pkt v4 mem The output should be something like this pid tid name prio STATE code data stack 126996 1 sbin io pkt v4 hc 210 SIGWAITINFO 872K 904K 8192 516K 126996 2 sbin io pkt v4 hc 210 RECEIVE 872K 904K 8192 132K 126996 3 sbin io pkt v4 hc 21r RECEIVE 872K 904K 4096 132K 126996 4 sbin io pkt v4 hc 210 RECEIVE 872K 904K 4096 132K 126996 5 sbin io pkt v4 hc 200 RECEIVE 872K 904K 4096 132K 126996 6 sbin io pkt v4 hc 90 RECEIVE 872K 904K 4096 132K libc so 3 0300000 444K 16K devnp shim so b8200000 28K 8192 devn epic so b8209000 40K 4096 1sm qnet so b8214000 168K 36K You should see a shared object for a network driver in this case the shim driver devnp shim so that lets io pkt support the legacy io net driver devn epic so You can also use the pidin ar
222. formation on finding TCP IP hostnames and name servers see etc hosts etc nsswitch conf and etc resolv conf in the Utilities Reference If the name server isn t responding there s a timeout of 1 5 minutes per name server You can t change this timeout but many TCP IP utilities have a n option that you can use to prevent name lookups Routing Routing determines how to get a packet to its intended destination The general categories of routing are Minimal routing You will only be communicating with hosts on your own network For example you re isolated on your own network Static routing If you re on a network with a small and static over time number of gateways then you can use the route command to manually manipulate the TCP IP routing tables and leave them that way This is a very common configuration If a host has access to the Internet it likely added one static route called a default route This route directs all the TCP IP packets from your host that aren t destined for a host on your local network to a gateway that provides access to the Internet Dynamic routing If you re on a network with more than one possible route to the same destination on your network you might need to use dynamic Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 189 TCP IP Networking routing This relies on routing protocols to distribute information about the changing state of the network If you need to react to the
223. ftware Systems Limited usr Where everything is stored The usr directory is a secondary file hierarchy that contains shareable read only data It includes the following usr bin A directory that contains most user commands Examples include diff errno and we usr include The top of a directory structure that contains the C and C header files This directory includes sys platform specific and other directories usr info Documentation for various utilities usr lib Object files libraries and internal binaries that you shouldn t execute directly or in scripts You ll link against these libraries if you write any programs usr libexec A directory that could contain system daemons and system utilities in general these are run only by other programs usr local A directory where the system administrator can install software locally It s initially empty usr man Manual pages for various utilities usr qde The top of a directory structure that contains executables data files plugins etc associated with the Integrated Development Environment IDE on Linux and Windows usr sbin Nonessential system binaries such as cron dumper and nicinfo usr share Data that s independent of the architecture such as icons backdrops and various gawk programs Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 95 Working with Files usr sra A directory for source code var The
224. function definitions e g 1s al less Contrast simple command configurable limit Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited A special variable that stores system information Some e g _PC_NAME_MAX depend on the filesystem and are associated with a path others e g _SC_ARG_MAX are independent of paths configuration string A system variable that s like an environment variable but is more dynamic When you set an environment variable the new value affects only the current instance of the shell and any of its children that you create after setting the variable when you set a configuration string its new value is immediately available to the entire system connection console A kernel object used with message passing Connections are created by client threads to connect to the channels made available by servers Once connections are established clients can MsgSend messages over them The display adapter the screen and the system keyboard are collectively referred to as the physical console A virtual console emulates a physical console and lets you run more than one terminal session at a time on a machine cooked mode See canonical mode core dump A file describing the state of a process that terminated abnormally critical section A code passage that must be executed serially i e by only one thread at a time The simplest from of critical section enforcement is via a mute
225. further limit the number of CPUs gt These are the absolute maximum limits for the virtual address space you can reduce them by setting the RLIMIT_AS resource with setrlimit If you plan to use more than 8 CPUs on an x86 platform you must use the 6 5 or later version of procnto smp with startup bios Of startup apic 344 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Chapter 19 Technical Support If you have any problems using QNX Neutrino the first place to look for help is in the documentation However what do you do if you need more help The resources that are available to you depend on the support plan that you ve bought The community includes e forums e the myQNX account center where you can register your products so that you can download software and updates e Global Help Center available at any time of day e training e an online knowledge base that you can search e detailed hardware support lists e free software e and more Some of these resources are free others are available only if you ve purchased a support plan For more information about our technical support offerings see the Services section of our website at http www qnx com Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 345 Appendix A Examples This appendix includes samples of some of the files described in this guide Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 347 Examples Buildfile for an NFS mounting targe
226. g e g DOS QNX 4 but you can also specify it on the command line e To mount a DOS formatted floppy disk type mount tdos dev fd0 fs dos_floppy Use mkdos fs to format DOS floppy disks and DOS hard drives This utility supports FAT 12 16 32 e To mount a QNX 4 formatted floppy disk type mount tqnx4 dev fd0 fs qnx_floppy You don t need to remount the drive when you change floppy disks Don t remove a floppy while the driver is still reading or writing data floppies are quite a bit slower than hard disks so it can take a while Make sure the drive light is off 232 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Hard disks Hard disks A QNX Neutrino system can detect the disk controller that s installed on the system and then start the appropriate driver for it The drivers for hard disks load the cam disk so shared object which provides a common access method for hard disks EIDE EIDE interfaces use the devb eide driver which by default automatically detects the interface and devices attached to it The devb eide driver includes support for UDMA Ultra Direct Memory Access modes along with the generic PIO Programmed Input Output modes The supported hardware list includes adapters and their supported features see the introduction p 229 to this chapter You can start the devb eide driver without any options and by default it automatically detects the EIDE controller on the sy
227. g DOWN coonccccncconcconncccnonnnonanonarinancnnnnnnnrnannnannnns 27 TOOL O NONE a A A A aaa 28 LAN e e e a a e e ta nits 29 ONCE you ve logged ii td ct ta dc 30 LOSSING QU tc tatiana donmeeanatects 31 Shutting down and rebooting cccoccccocccccccncncnnnonnnennnoncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnoncnnnaninnnnn 32 Chapter 3 Managing User ACCOUNTS ccccccceseceseeeeeeeanesaeeaeeeeeeseeeseeeaeeeaeesaanesanesaaesaaesaseasansaes 33 What does a User ACCOUNT CO siras irid irira isra iE KTE ARAARA EEA TARERE RATATA AE RER ERTY 34 User accounts vs user IDs login lookup and permissions ccocccoccconncnnncnnnnonnneninenins 34 What happens when you log in ooccooccccccnccnoccnnccnoncnnonnnoninncnnnnnonnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnoss 35 ACCOUNE Gatabase iii a A A A A E E 36 JOLC DASSW x dascacais ni costa aa eee R e aa as e ea raeil eda ae ES 36 JOUC SHOU Booed e A A A a DA EE SS A ee 37 Tees NA OW siii a ADA cn ad a a dash 38 EN o NO EEEE 38 Managing your OWN aCCOUN Ea a A za 39 Changing your password ccceccceecceecee cece eeeeeeeee esse esse eeseeeseesseeseeeeaeeeaeeeseeeeseesaeeses 39 Forgot Your PASS WO ui a tia 39 Managing other account eves cuene gedseanctes lero aras 41 AAN US A O O A A NT a ed es 41 Removing Accounts 1 A e oa ed 43 D fining ErouPS ii A A A ES A a e eaaa 44 TOUDICSHOOTING ui A a e a tt dec 46 Chapter 4 Using the Command Line occcccccccncncccnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnncnnnnnnrnnnrnnnnnnn
228. g is stored on disk and is maintained by the system The flag is turned off when the filesystem is mounted and is turned on when the filesystem is unmounted Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 299 Backing Up and Recovering Data When the clean flag is set chkfsys assumes that the filesystem is intact If chkfsys finds the clean flag off it tries to fix the problem The chkfsys utility supports a u option which overrides a set clean flag and tells chkfsys to run unconditionally You might want to override the clean flag when e dcheck discovers bad blocks e you ve intentionally deleted or zapped some files e you want to force a general sanity check Using chkfsys on a live system The chkfsys utility normally requires exclusive use of the filesystem to provide a comprehensive verification of the disk There is some risk in running chkfsys on a live system both chkfsys and the filesystem are reading and possibly writing the same blocks on the disk If you do this and chkfsys writes something it sends a message to the filesystem to invalidate itself and that makes the filesystem remount itself A and go back to the disk to reread all data This marks any open files as stale you ll get an error of ETO whenever you read or write unless you close and reopen the files This can affect things such as your system log file Static changes in place on files or directories that the filesystem doesn t currently h
229. ge and for its receiver but for no one else Message passing not only allows processes to pass data to each other but also provides a means of synchronizing the execution of several processes As they send receive and reply to messages processes undergo various changes of state that affect when and for how long they may run metadata Data about data for a filesystem metadata includes all the overhead and attributes involved in storing the user data itself such as the name of a file the physical blocks it uses modification and access timestamps and so on microkernel A part of the operating system that provides the minimal services used by a team of optional cooperating processes which in turn provide the higher level OS functionality The microkernel itself lacks filesystems and Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 369 Glossary 370 many other services normally expected of an OS those services are provided by optional processes mountpoint The location in the pathname space where a resource manager has registered itself For example a CD ROM filesystem may register a single mountpoint of cdrom mutex Mutual exclusion lock a simple synchronization service used to ensure exclusive access to data shared between threads It s typically acquired pthread_mutex_lock and released pthread_mutex_unlock around the code that accesses the shared data usually a critical section name r
230. gle filename may need multiple entries thus reducing the possible size of a directory Filesystem size Depends on the FAT format e for FAT12 it s 4084 clusters largest cluster is 32 KB hence 128 MB e for FAT16 it s 65524 clusters thus 2 GB e for FAT32 you get access to 268435444 clusters which is 8 TB Disk size 336 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Filesystem limits Limited by the disk driver and io b1k These filesystems don t really support permissions but they can emulate them CD ROM ISO9660 filesystem The limits for CD ROM ISO9660 filesystems include Filename length 32 bytes for basic ISO9660 128 for Joliet 255 for Rockridge Pathname length 1024 bytes Disk size This filesystem also uses a 32 bit 4 GB 1 format We don t allow the creation of anything via s cd so it s read only Any limits would be imposed by the tools used to make the image which hopefully would be a subset of ISO9660 Disk size is also limited by the disk driver and io b1k ISO 9660 filesystems in addition to UDF For information about the limits for O We ve deprecated fs cd so in favor of s udf so which now supports Y UDF see UDF filesystem p 340 later in this chapter NFS2 and NFS3 filesystem The limits for NFS2 and NFS3 filesystems include Filename length 255 bytes Pathname length 1024 bytes File size 2 GB 1 32 bit filesystem limit Directory size filesyste
231. guous runs under timer control using O_SYNC would illustrate a difference The limiting factor here is the periodic need for synchronous update of the bitmap and inode for block allocation as the file grows see below for a case study or overwriting an already allocated file Double buffering This example illustrates the effect of double buffering in the standard 1 0 library on an x86 PIII 725 machine with a UDMA 4 EIDE disk using the QNX 4 filesystem The table shows the rate in megabytes per second of writing and reading a 256 MB file with a record size of 8 KB Scenario Writing Reading Here you can see the effect of the default standard I O buffer size BUFSIZ or 1 KB When you ask it to transfer 8 KB the library implements the transfer as 8 separate 1 KB operations Note how the standard I O case does match the above benchmark see Record size p 325 above for a 1 KB record and the file descriptor case is the same as the 8 KB scenario When you use setvbuf or the STDIO_ DEFAULT BUFSIZE environment variable to force the standard I O buffering up to the 8 KB record size then the results come closer to the optimal file descriptor case the small difference is due to the extra code complexity and the additional memcpy between the user data and the internal standard I O FILE buffer File descriptor vs standard I O Here s another example that compares access using file descriptors and standard 1 0 on an
232. hange your password Use the passwd command This utility prompts you for your current and new passwords see Managing your own account p 39 in Managing User Accounts To log in as a different user Enter login at the command prompt and then enter the user s name and password The su switch user 1D utility also lets you run as another user but temporarily O It doesn t run the user s profiles or significantly modify the environment For SS more information see the Utilities Reference To determine your current user name Use the id command 30 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Logging out Logging out To log out of text mode type logout at the command prompt You can also log out by terminating your login shell just enter the exit shell command or press Ctrl D Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 31 Logging In Logging Out and Shutting Down 32 Shutting down and rebooting You rarely need to reboot a QNX Neutrino system If a driver or other system process crashes you can usually restart that one process Don t simply turn off a running QNX Neutrino system because processes might get written to the disk For information about reducing this effect see Filesystems and block I O devb drivers p 320 in the Fine Tuning Your System chapter not shut down properly and any data that s in a filesystem s cache might not To shut down or reboot
233. happens when multiple resource managers adopt files that lie in a common directory within the pathname space In the interests of creating a maintainable system we suggest that you create directory unions as rarely as possible For more information on pathname space management see Pathname Management in the Process Manager chapter of the System Architecture guide Filename rules QNX Neutrino supports a variety of filesystems each of which has different capabilities and rules for valid filenames For information about filesystem capabilities see the Working with Filesystems p 145 chapter for filesystem limits see the Understanding System Limits p 331 chapter In the QNX 4 filesystem filenames can be up to 48 bytes long but you can extend them to 505 bytes see Filenames p 152 in Working with Filesystems Individual bytes within the filename may have any value except the following all values are in hexadecimal e 0x00 through 0x1F all control characters e 0x2F Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 83 Working with Files e 0x7F rubout e OxFF If you re using UTF 8 representations of Unicode characters to represent international characters the limit on the filename length will be lower depending on your use of characters in the extended range In the QNX 4 filesystem you can use international characters in filenames by using the UTF 8 encoding of Unicode characters
234. he Linux ext2 filesystem will be mounted as well pri 100 PATH proc boot diskboot b1 D1 odevc con n4 odevc con hid n4 Include the current libc so It will be created as a real file using its internal SONAME with libc so being a symlink to it The symlink will point to the last libc so so if an earlier libc is needed e g libc so 2 add it before libc so Libexser2 libc se libhiddi so libusbdi so Include all the files for the default filesystems libcam so TO bBTkK 50 cam disk so fs qnx4 so s dos so fs ext2 so cam cdrom so fs udf so USB for console driver devu ehci so devu ohci so devu uhci so devh usb so devh ps2ser so These programs need to be run only once from the boot image data uip will waste less memory as the RAM from the boot Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 351 Examples image will be used directly without making a copy of the data 1 e as the default data cpy does When they have been run once they will be unlinked from proc boot data copy seedres pci bios devb eide devb amd devb aha2 devb aha4 devb aha7 devb aha8 devb adpu320 devb ncr8 devb umass devb ahci devb mvSata umass enum umass enum cfg io usb io hid diskboot slogger fesh devc con devc con hid For more information about buildfiles including some other samples see Building Embedded Systems 352 Copyright 2014 QNX Softwa
235. he number of unnamed semaphores but the number of named semaphores is limited by the number of available file descriptors see File descriptors p 343 above TCP IP limits The number of open connections and sockets is limited only by memory and by the maximum number of file descriptors per process see File descriptors p 343 Shared memory The number of shared memory areas is limited by the allowed virtual address space for a process which depends on the target architecture See the RLIMIT_AS and RLIMIT_DATA resources for setrlimit in the C Library Reference Message queues The number of message queues is limited by the number of available file descriptors For information about the number of file descriptors see File descriptors p 343 The default maximum number of entries in a queue and the default maximum size of a queue entry depend on whether you re using the traditional mqueue or alternate mq implementation of message queues Attribute Traditional Alternate Number of entries 1024 Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 343 Understanding System Limits Attribute Traditional Alternate Message size 4096 256 For more information see mqueue and mq in the Utilities Reference and mq_open in the QNX Neutrino C Library Reference Platform specific limits ARMv7 86 Limit X Physical addressing 36 bit 32 bit Virtual address space 3 5 GB The hardware might
236. hen zap the previously damaged file To complete the procedure you mark the marginal block as bad by adding it to the bad_b1ks file then run chkfsys to recover the remaining good blocks If this procedure fails you can use the spatch utility to copy as much of the file as possible to another file and then zap the bad file and run chkfsys Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 301 Backing Up and Recovering Data What to do if your system will no longer boot If a previously working QNX Neutrino system suddenly stops working and will no longer boot then one of the following may have occurred e the hardware has failed or the data on the hard disk has been damaged e someone has either changed overwritten the boot file or changed the system initialization file these are the two most common scenarios The following steps can help you identify the problem Where possible corrective actions are suggested 1 Try booting from CD or across the network e If you have a network to boot over try booting your machine over the network Once the machine is booted you ll need to log in as root e If you don t have a network boot from your installation CD The filesystem will already be running in this case and you ll be logged in as root 2 Start the hard disk driver For example to start a driver for an Adaptec series 4 SCSI adapter type devb aha4 options amp If you re using another type of driver enter its name
237. hentication of requests Files are protected by the normal permissions that apply to users and groups see File ownership and permissions p 97 in Working with Files although you can use Qnet s maproot and mapany options to control in a limited way what others users can do on your machine Qnet isn t connectionless like NFS network errors are reported back to the client process TCP IP is intended for more loosely connected machines that can run different operating systems TCP IP does authentication to control access to a machine it s useful for connecting machines that you don t necessarily trust It s used as the base for specialized protocols such as FTP and Telnet and can provide high throughput for data streaming For more information see the TCP IP Networking p 187 chapter in this guide NFS was designed for filesystem operations between all hosts all endians and is widely supported It s a connectionless protocol the server can shut down and be restarted and the client resumes automatically It also uses authentication and controls directory access For more information see NFS filesystem p 166 in Working with Filesystems 176 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Conventions for naming nodes Conventions for naming nodes In order to resolve node names the Qnet protocol follows certain conventions node name A character string that identifies the node you re talking to This name must
238. his statement consists of the following components command_name The name of the command to be executed This may be the name of an executable program such as a utility or it may be the name of a command built into the shell options The specific behavior that you want to invoke for the command Options typically consist of an alphanumeric character preceded by a hyphen e g c Some options take an argument e g n number If you specify an option that takes an argument you must include its argument as well operands Data the command requires e g a filename If a command lets you enter multiple operands they re usually processed in the order you list them Unlike options operands aren t preceded by a hyphen e g less my_file The entries in the Utilities Reference use some special symbols to express the command syntax You can specify one or more instances of the previous element For example in the less utility syntax the ellipsis after the operand file indicates that you can specify more than one file on the command line less myfilel myfile2 The enclosed item is optional Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 67 Using the Command Line You can use only one of the items e g a You don t actually type these symbols when you invoke the command For instance the syntax description for less is given as follows less aBcCdeEfimMnNgQrsSuUw b n x n z n h a
239. hive ccccccceccceecceece cece cece cess cess eeeeesseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeeaeeeaeeegas 283 Storage CHOICES x A cc Chalice ke teat oie 285 Remote back DS tt dd a ease O cel a AT 288 QNX A disk Structure cui A Acad 289 Rartiti n COMPONEN Sisiiri a AAA AR 289 A ANO 292 LIO AAA A A AA A NE 293 Extent DICKS 2 AA A AR RARA EE 293 EE E TA E a A A 294 Rile Maintenanes ULIIES iii AA AA AAA ety 296 US te aaa 296 diia ad 296 A O tes an haudsede dest wat edad nuesgumedsetey Meendtstieant acs caeessunsdentaes 297 e O A 297 A deveg et A heea tee dee edge 297 SPatChivies adeeacciante RT 298 Recovering disks and files cccccecccecccececeseceeeceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeseeeseeesaeeeaeesaeeenes 299 Usine CHKISYS ii A a 299 Recovering from a bad block in the middle of a file occcocccccccccncconcconcnannnnnnnncnnns 300 What to do if your system will no longer boot ccoocccccncccncccnnocnnocnnnnnnnnnnnnncnncnonnnenineninencnns 302 ithe mount false nuria tos bites 304 If the disk 1S unrecoverable Tonei a e aa aaa n an ienaa Aaa Er A Ae aa EAA To DAA AAEE AT 305 lthetilesystem is intacta e k Ea eae eee AS aei 305 Chapter 16 Securing Your SysteM oonccocccccnnccnoncnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnrnnnrrnnrrnnnrnnnnnnnrnnannnnns 307 General OS Security er abia aga 308 Remote and local attacks ccccccccceceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesee sees EAEE ES E 308 Effects Of attacks iria A E E EE 309 Table of Co
240. hive tar gz type gzip my_archive tar This file is much smaller than the original one which makes it easier to store Some of the utilities including gzip have options that let you control the amount of compression Generally the better the compression the longer it takes to do Lal The default extension is tar gz but you ll see others such as tgz You can use the S option to gzip to specify the suffix Decompressing the archive To decompress the archive use the compressor s corresponding utility In the case of a gz or tgz file use gunzip gunzip my_archive tar gz Or gunzip my_archive tgz Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 283 Backing Up and Recovering Data These commands decompress the file resulting in my_archive tar You can also use tar with the z option to extract from the archive without decompressing it first tar xzf my_archive tgz 284 Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Storage choices Storage choices You can store your archives in various places CDs You can back up to a CD by using a CD burner on the QNX Neutrino system or by creating an ISO image and copying it to a system with a CD burner that can burn ISO images You can use cdrecord to burn CDs on a QNX Neutrino system To get this software go to the Third party software section of the Download area on our website http www qnx com In either case you have to create an ISO image of
241. http www qnx com Even if your interface isn t listed as being supported the EIDE controller can work in a generic mode that uses programmed input output PIO modes which is slower but works in almost all cases Ensure that the interface is correctly set up in the BIOS and that the BIOS can see the drives correctly Check that the drives are set up correctly each slave drive must have a corresponding master as per the ATAPI specs A single chain can t have two master drives or two slave drives Ensure that the power connection is functioning correctly Pass the device ID and vendor ID to the driver Pass the I O port and IRQ to devb eide Here are some other problems that you might encounter and what you should try If the driver hangs disable busmastering e g devb eid ide nobmstr If you see sloginfo entries of eide_transfer_downgrade UDMA CRC error downgrading to MDMA reduce the transfer mode and check the cables If you see sloginfo entries of eide_timer timeout path XX device XX verify that the driver is using the correct interrupt reduce the transfer mode and check the cables If a PCMCIA disk doesn t work when configured in contiguous I O mapped addressing i e 0x320 not 0x1f 0 0x170 specify the interface control block Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Hard disks address The control block address is offset 12 from the base If a PCMCIA interface is located at I O port 0x320 and
242. i e root can use them Non root processes can use priorities from 1 through 63 You can change the range of privileged priorities with the P option for procnto In QNX Neutrino 6 6 or later you can append an s or S to this option if you want out of range priority requests by default to saturate at the maximum allowed value instead of resulting in an error e Memory allocation Because the malloc implementation uses signed 32 bit integers to represent the size internally you can t allocate more than 2 GB ina single allocation If the size is greater than 2 GB these functions indicate an error of ENOMEM e calloc e jofunc_lock_calloc e malloc e memalign 342 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Other system limits e realloc e valloc File descriptors The total number of file descriptors has a hard limit of 32767 per process but you re more likely to be constrained by the F option to procnto or the RLIMIT_NOFILE system resource The default value is 1000 the minimum is 100 Sockets named semaphores message queues and connection IDs coids all Use file descriptors lt To determine the current limit use the ksh builtin command ulimit see the Utilities Reference or call getrlimit see the QNX Neutrino C Library Reference Synchronization primitives There are no limits on the number of mutexes and condition variables condvars There s no limit on t
243. ia e budecetuvacen Veh A AAA AA AERIS 188 Software components for TCP IP networking oocccconcccnnnccnnncononnncnnncnnnnonononnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnoss 191 Running the Internet daemons occocccnccnoccnencnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnonanennnnnaninannnn 193 Running multiple instances of the TCP IP Stack ccccccsccecsseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeesaeeeeaeseeeaees 195 Dynamically assigned TCP IP parameters ccccsccccseecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeesaeeeeaeseeeaaes 196 Using PPPOE Di A cba ted we Pk awed ee lees eed eee eee 196 Usina DAGP Sart aint 198 Using Atl Paradas a A A ta ca elas 198 ThOubBleSHOOEING tio a iones Aa 199 Are io pkt and the drivers running ocooocccccnoncncncnnncnnncnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnncnnnnnnnnnninoninenenns 199 What is the name server information ccceecccceeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeesaeees 199 How do map hostnames to IP addresses ooccocccoccncncncncnnonnnonnnonnnnnnonanonanonannnncnnn 200 How do get the network Status ooocccccccoccconnoncnencnoncnnncnnncnnnnnnonnonanonanonaninannnncnnns 200 How do make sure I m connected to other hosts cccccsecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesaeeeeees 200 How do display information about an interface controller cccccccsecsseeeeeeeeeeees 201 Chapter 12 Printing lt a A ee 203 Printing With lpr A coed a envio lintels cast dase 205 User MSC Wa A dates Toe E whales hanes 205 Spooling dIrectories
244. iable the root user s PATH includes directories such as sbin that contain system executables sets up the file permission mask umask see File ownership and permissions p 97 in Working with Files displays the date you logged in the message of the day found in etc motd and the date you last logged in sets the TMPDIR environment variable to tmp if it isn t already set runs any scripts in the etc profile d directory as dot files i e instead of executing them as separate shells the current shell loads their commands into itself For more information about dot files see dot builtin command in the documentation for ksh in the Utilities Reference If you have a script that you want to run whenever anyone on the system runs a login shell put it in the etc profile d directory You must have root level privileges to add a file to this directory For example if you need to set global environment variables or run certain tasks when anyone logs in then this is the place to put a script to handle it If you re using sh as your login shell make sure that the script has a sh extension The system runs HOME prof ile whenever you log in after it runs etc profile If you change your profile the changes don t go into effect until you next log in You should use your profile to do the customizations that you need to do only once or that you want all shells to inherit For example you
245. iations 129 Central Europe 128 default 127 Eastern 127 Japanese 128 Newfoundland 127 offset from UTC 129 Pacific 127 setting 124 131 world wide 126 time DOS command 71 TIME DOS variable 73 timers 342 limits 342 timezone 129 396 TIMEZONE file 124 tinit 53 90 tmp 94 TMP DOS variable 73 TMPDIR 73 118 120 top 316 touchscreens 248 USB 248 tracelogger 104 316 traceprinter 104 tracerpt DOS command 71 tracert DOS command 71 training 345 transmissions 262 aborted 262 underruns 262 Transparent Distributed Processing 175 troff 104 Trojan horse programs 66 309 troubleshooting 46 75 107 131 173 184 199 224 234 266 278 298 299 302 305 after unexpected system failure 299 boot failure 302 command line 75 devb eide 234 disks 278 298 305 checking for corruption 278 305 patching 298 environment setting 131 files 107 173 modems 266 printing 224 profiles 131 Qnet 184 TCP IP 199 user accounts 46 TrueType fonts 104 trusted users 194 TTF ttf file extension 104 ttys configuration file 53 90 txt file extension 104 type DOS command 71 typeover mode 52 typing reducing 57 Typographical conventions 15 TZ 124 tzname 129 tzset 129 U uc_tz t 126 UDF Universal Disk Format filesystem 84 169 340 UDMA Ultra Direct Memory Access 233 235 uesh 55 134 UHCI Universal Host Controller Interface 246 ulimit 343 Ultra Direct Memory Access See UDMA umask 99 118 umount 147 181 una
246. ich two programs communicate For example PipeA Block special files b Entries that represent a block device such as a disk For example dev hd0 represents the raw block data of your primary disk drive Socket files s 78 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Types of files Entries that represent a communications socket especially a UNIX domain socket For more information see socket and the UNIX protocol in the QNX Neutrino C Library Reference Some files are persistent across system reboots such as most files in a disk filesystem Other files may exist only as long as the program responsible for them is running Examples of these include shared memory objects objects in the proc filesystem and temporary files on disk that are still being accessed even though the links to the files their filenames have been removed Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 79 Working with Files 80 Filenames and pathnames To access any file or directory you must specify a pathname a symbolic name that tells a program where to find a file within the directory hierarchy based at root A typical QNX Neutrino pathname looks like this home fred profile In this example profile is found in the fred directory which in turn resides in the home directory which is found in the root directory AA home gt fred profile Like Linux and
247. ify the location of the parallel port If the driver fails to detect your parallel port ensure that the port is enabled in the BIOS If that fails try specifying the I O port when you start the driver 252 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Character devices Terminals On a standard PC and some x86 systems the devc con or devc con hid driver controls the physical console which consists of the display adapter the screen and the system keyboard By default the driver is configured for up to four virtual consoles dev conl dev con4 The devc con driver is also the keyboard driver for non USB keyboards in text mode You can start the driver with this command devc con The devc con hid manager is similar to devc con but works in conjunction with io hid and supports PS2 USB and all other human interface devices For more information see devc con and devc con hid in the Utilities Reference 1 0 attributes To set or display the I O attributes for a character device tty use the stty utility For more information about setting up your terminal see Terminal support p 51 in Using the Command Line Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 253 Connecting Hardware Network adapters The main steps in setting up a network adapter are e identifying your Network Interface Card NIC e starting the driver e making sure the driver and hardware communicate Identify your NIC Th
248. igns than is possible with a more fused approach People seem naturally attracted to the ease with which functioning devices can be planted in the POSIX pathname space as well Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 23 Getting to Know the OS Resource managers 24 Developers system administrators and users also appreciate QNX Neutrino s adherence to POSIX the realtime responsiveness that comes from our devotion to short nonpreemptible code paths and the general robustness of the microkernel Some x86 systems can run in System Management Mode SMM where the BIOS installs special code that runs when a System Management Interrupt SMI occurs SMI interrupts may be generated by the motherboard or peripheral hardware and can t be masked by the operating system When A SMM is entered normal operations including the OS are suspended and the SMI handler runs at a high priority Avoid using systems where SMM can t be disabled because it can destroy QNX Neutrino s realtime performance The OS can t do anything about the delays that SMM introduces nor can the OS even detect that the system has entered SMM QNX Neutrino s microkernel architecture lets developers scale the code down to fit in a very constrained embedded system but QNX Neutrino is powerful enough to use as a desktop OS QNX Neutrino runs on multiple platforms including x86 and ARM It supports symmetric multiprocessing SMP and bound multiprocessing BMP
249. ile basis e Specifying the O_SYNC bit when opening a file causes all I O operations on that file both data and metadata to be performed synchronously The fsync and sync functions let you flush the filesystem write behind cache on demand otherwise any dirty data is flushed from cache under the control of the global blk delwri option the default is two seconds see io blk so in the Utilities Reference e You control the global configuration with the commit option either to io b1k so as an option to apply to all filesystems or via the mount command as an option to apply to a single instance of a mounted filesystem The levels are none low medium and high which differ in the degree in which metadata is written synchronously versus asynchronously or even time delayed At any level less robust than the default i e medium the filesystem doesn t guarantee the same level of integrity following an unexpected power le loss because multiple block updates might not be ordered correctly The sections that follow illustrate the effects of different configurations on performance Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Filesystems and block I O devb drivers Block I O commit level This table illustrates how the commit affects the time it takes to create and delete a file on an x86 PIII 450 machine with a UDMA 2 EIDE disk running a QNX 4 filesystem The table shows how many O KB files could be created and del
250. ilesystem limits This filesystem uses a 32 bit block address but the filesystem is 64 bit gt 4 GB We don t allow the creation of anything via fs mac so It s read only Windows NT filesystem The limits for Windows NT filesystems include Filename length 255 characters Pathname length 1024 bytes File size 4 GB 1 uses a 64 bit filesystem format Filesystem size 2 _ 1 clusters Disk size Limited by the disk driver and io b1k This filesystem is read only Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 341 Understanding System Limits Other system limits These limits apply to the entire system Processes A maximum of 4095 active at any time On ARM platforms the limit is actually on the number of separate address spaces you could have more processes if they happen to be sharing an address space because of vfork but that s very unusual Prefix space resource manager attaches etc Limited by memory Sessions and process groups 4095 since you need at least one process per session or group Physical address space No limits except those imposed by the hardware see the documentation for the chip you re using These limits apply to each process e Number of threads 32767 e Number of timers 32767 e Priorities O through 255 Priority O is used for the idle thread by default priorities of 64 and greater are privileged so only processes with an effective user ID of O
251. image is open for writing this guarantees that the boot loader will never see a partially written image You typically build the images elsewhere and then copy them into the directory and so are open for only a brief time however this scheme also works if you send the output from mkifs directly to the final boot file To prevent this from being used as a DOS attack the default permissions for the boot directory are root root rwx You can change the permissions with chmod and chown but beware that if you allow everyone to D write in this directory then anyone can install custom boot images or delete existing ones A snapshot is a committed stable view of a Power Safe filesystem Each mounted filesystem has one stable snapshot and one working view in which copy on write modifications to the stable snapshot are being made Whenever a new snapshot is made filesystem activity is suspended to give a stable system the bitmaps are updated all dirty blocks are forced to disk and the alternate filesystem superblock is written with a higher sequence number Then filesystem activity is resumed and another working view is constructed on the old superblock When a filesystem is remounted after an unclean power failure it restores the last stable snapshot Snapshots are made e explicitly when a global sync of all filesystems is performed Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Power Safe filesystem e e
252. ime The users are organized into groups that share similar permissions on files and directories For more information see Managing User Accounts p 33 QNX Neutrino follows various industry standards including POSIX shell and utilities and TCP IP This can make porting existing code and scripts to QNX Neutrino easier QNX Neutrino s command line looks just like the UNIX one QNX Neutrino supports many familiar utilities grep find 1s gawk and you can connect them with pipes redirect the input and output examine return codes and so on Many utilities are the same in UNIX and QNX Neutrino but some have a different name or syntax in QNX Neutrino UNIX QNX Neutrino See also adduser passwd Managing User Accounts p 33 RA fsck chkfsys chkqnx6fs Backing Up and Recovering chkdosfs Data p 277 ifconfig en0 TCP IP Networking p 187 EC 20 Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited QNX Neutrino compared with UNIX QNX Neutrino See also use Using the Command Line p 49 less more Using the Command Line p 49 For details on each command see the QNX Neutrino Utilities Reference Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 21 Getting to Know the OS 22 QNX Neutrino compared with Microsoft Windows QNX Neutrino and Windows have different architectures but the main difference between them from a user s perspective is how you invoke programs Much of what you do via a GUI
253. in Windows you do in QNX Neutrino through command line utilities configuration files and scripts although QNX Neutrino does support a powerful Integrated Development Environment IDE to help you create test and debug software and embedded systems Here are some other differences e QNX Neutrino and DOS use different end of line characters QNX Neutrino uses a linefeed while DOS uses a carriage return and a linefeed If you need to transfer text files from one OS to the other you can use QNX Neutrino s textto utility to convert the files For example to convert the end of line characters to QNX Neutrino style textto 1 my_file To convert the end of line characters to DOS style textto c my_file e QNX Neutrino uses a slash instead of a backslash 1 to separate components of a pathname e You can t use DOS commands in QNX Neutrino but many have equivalent commands For more information see QNX Neutrino for MS DOS users p 71 in the Using the Command Line chapter of this guide Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited How QNX Neutrino is unique How QNX Neutrino is unique The QNX Neutrino RTOS consists of a microkernel procnto and various processes Each process even a device driver runs in its own virtual memory space Power Safe file manager UDF file manager Process manager HFS file NFS file manager manager QNX Neutrino microkernel Software bus Application CIFS file manager
254. ing this sequence Possible applications include software updates or filesystem defragmentation To disable snapshots at the global level clear the FS_FLAGS_COMMITTING flag on the filesystem using the DCMD_FSYS_FILE_FLAGS command to devcti struct fs_fileflags flags memset amp flags 0 sizeof struct fs_fileflags flags mask FS_FLAGS_GENERIC FS_FLAGS_COMMITTING flags bits FS_FLAGS_GENERIC disable 0 FS_FLAGS_COMMITTING devctl fd DCMD_FSYS_FILE_FLAGS amp flags sizeof struct fs_fileflags NULL This is a single flag for the entire filesystem and can be set or cleared by any superuser client thus applications must coordinate the use of this flag among themselves Alternatively you can use the chattr utility as a convenient front end to the above devctl command chattr snapshot fs qnx6 fs qnx6 snapshot chattr snapshot fs qnx6 fs qnx6 snapshot To disable snapshots at a local level adjust the ONX6FS_SNAPSHOT_HOLD count on a per file descriptor basis again using the DCMD_FSYS_FILE_FLAGS command to devcti Each open file has its own hold count and the sum of all local hold counts Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 159 Working with Filesystems 160 is a global hold count that disables snapshots if nonzero Thus if any client sets a hold count snapshots are disabled until all clients clear their hold counts The hold count is a 32 bit value an
255. ing and sending packets If you aren t receiving packets on a high traffic network the driver and the hardware might not be communicating Here s some typical output from the nicinfo command Physical Node ID Current Physical Node ID Current Operation Rate Active Interface Type 000102 C510D4 000102 C510D4 100 00 Mb s full duplex MII Active PHY Address secr ikd Power Management State iii a a Ga Active Maximum Transmittable data Unit 1514 Maximum Receivable data Unit 1514 Receive Checksumming Enabled TCPV6 Transmit Checksumming Enabled TCPv6 Hardware INLEETUBE ei ir 0x5 OMA Chanit l aora 0 TAO ABETO ce oun gies eli duseuacce eubaudeeciseueeudss Oxd400 Oxd47 ROM APertuta oi 0 Menety APErEDIS ida 0xe6000000 Oxe6000FFF Promiscuous MODE or A off Multicast Support sii Enabled Packets Transmitted OR perri Dei RRA 104 Bytes Tradsmitted OR sir it sand oe 10067 Broadcast Packets Transmitted OK 6 Multicast Packets Transmitted OK cseriseris 1 Memory Allocation Failures on Transmit 0 Packets Received OK aiicirisenicirerenisires 1443 Bytes RECEIVE OR Suera 168393 Broadcast Packets Received OK 427970 Multicast Packets Received OR sc ec acces wae 317996 Memory Allocation Failures on Receive 0 Single Collisions om Transmit iss sessisscos 0 Multiple Collisions on Transmit sss sssri esss 0 Deferred Transmite
256. ing with e g frd c flint cp fred tmp All files beginning with fred and ending with one other character e g freda fred3 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 61 Using the Command Line If you enter The cp utility copies cp fred 123 tmp All files beginning with fred and ending with 1 2 or 3 i e fredl fred2 and fred3 cp ch tmp All files ending with c or h e g frd c barn h cp lo tmp All files that don t end with o cp html tex All files that end with html or tex Redirecting input and output 62 You can override the behavior of commands that read from or write to stdin stdout and stderr Most commands e read their input from the standard input stream stdin or file descriptor 0 which is normally assigned to your keyboard e write their output to the standard output file stdout or fd 1 which is normally assigned to your display screen e write any error messages to the standard error stream stderr or fd 2 which is also normally assigned to the screen Sometimes you want to override this behavior If you want a process to Use this symbol Read from a file or another device input lt redirection Write stdout to a file output redirection gt gt Write stdout to a file appending to the file s contents output append For example the 1s command lists the files in a directory If you want to redirect to output of 1s
257. init utilities This filesystem implements a robust design using an extent based bitmap allocation scheme with fingerprint control structures to safeguard against data loss and to provide easy recovery Features include e extent based POSIX filesystem e robustness all sensitive filesystem info is written through to disk e on disk signatures and special key information to allow fast data recovery in the event of disk damage e 505 character filenames e multi threaded design e client driven priority e same disk format as the filesystem under QNX 4 e support for files up to 2G 1 byte in size For information about the implementation of the QNX 4 filesystem see QNX 4 disk structure p 289 in the Backing Up and Recovering Data chapter in this guide Extents In the QNX 4 filesystem regular files and directory files are stored as a sequence of extents contiguous sequences of blocks on a disk The directory entry for a file keeps track of the file s extents If the filesystem needs more than one extent to hold a file it uses a linked list of extent blocks to store information about the extents When a file needs more space the filesystem tries to extend the file contiguously on the disk If this isn t possible the filesystem allocates a new extent which may require allocating a new extent block as well When it allocates or expands an extent the filesystem may overallocate space under the assumption that the process will con
258. inting error messages by default errors are sent to the console Sometimes errors that are sent to standard error output don t appear in the log file We highly recommend that you use the system logger daemon syslogd mx 0 Remove the default limits on the size of the spooling buffer sh Suppress the printing of the burst header a page that lists the user ID and job information about the print job Printers on serial lines When you connect a printer via a serial line you must set the proper baud rate and terminal modes The following example is for a DecWriter III printer connected locally via a 1200 baud serial line lp LA 180 DecWriter III Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 211 Printing 212 Remote printers Filters lp dev lp br 1200 f s 06320 tr f of usr lib lpf lf usr adm lpd errs lp The name of the file to open for output br The baud rate for the tty line fs Flags that set CRMOD no parity and XTABS tr f Print a formfeed character when the queue empties This is handy when the printer has continuous paper because you can tear the paper off when the print job finishes instead of first having to take the printer offline and manually advance the paper of usr lib lpf Use a filter program called 1p for printing the files see Filters p 212 below lf usr adm lpd errs Write any error messages to the file usr adm lpd errs instead of to the
259. ion files 356 spooling 194 206 daemon 194 206 spooling directories 208 220 TCP IP over 203 218 222 troubleshooting 224 USB printers 214 221 248 connecting 248 Ipr and etc printcap 214 spooler 221 priorities 69 317 342 privileged 342 range 342 specifying 69 317 problems 46 75 107 131 173 184 199 224 234 266 command line 75 devb eide 234 environment setting 131 files 107 173 modems 266 printing 224 392 problems continued profiles 131 Qnet 184 TCP IP 199 user accounts 46 proc 93 process groups limits 342 process manager 93 317 idle thread 317 virtual directory 93 processes 20 32 52 69 93 96 120 182 299 316 317 318 332 342 abnormal termination 96 address space 93 arguments 318 closing files while running chkfsys 299 controlling via proc 93 CPU usage 316 317 environment inheriting 120 files maximum open per 332 ID 20 93 317 proc directory 93 procnto 317 information about 182 killing 52 limits 342 memory usage 318 priority 69 317 342 running remotely 182 statistics 316 318 terminating at system shutdown 32 PROCESSOR 118 PROCESSOR_ARCHITECTURE DOS variable 73 PROCESSOR_IDENTIFIER DOS variable 73 processors multicore 24 344 maximum number of 344 procnto 93 137 149 317 342 loader 137 process ID 317 shared memory 149 virtual directory 93 procnto smp 344 procnto instr 104 316 products 345 updates 345 profile file 118 profile d 92 profile d directory
260. ion of the permissions for the owning group all named users and all named groups For example let s consider a file whose owning group has no write permission ls 1 file txt rw r r 1 mabel techies 50 Sep 27 21 22 file txt If we use the get faci utility to get its ACL we see getfacl q file txt user rw group r other r The q option suppresses some comments listing the file name owner and group that get facil displays by default Next let s suppose that mabel uses set facl to add an entry for frank that grants him read and write permission in order to modify the ACL you must be the owner of the file or directory or have appropriate privileges setfacl m u frank rw file txt getfacl q file txt user rw user frank rw group r mask rw other r t ls 1 file txt rw rw r 1 mabel techies 50 Sep 27 21 22 file txt In addition to the entry for frank the ACL now includes a mask entry that lists read and write permission The output of 1s also indicates read and write permission for the group Modifying the file permissions e g using chmod can affect the ACLs and vice versa e The user file permissions and the permissions in the owning user ACL entry always match e The other file permissions and the permissions in the other ACL entry always match e f the ACL doesn t have a mask entry the group file permissions and the permissions in the owning group A
261. irectory in this case and any directories under it for files whose names end in c The command substitution causes grep to search for the given string in the files that find produces Arithmetical expressions To specify an arithmetical expression in a command line specify it as follows S expression For example echo 5 7 60 Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Braces Shell 9 You re restricted to integer arithmetic You can use braces to add a prefix a suffix or both to a set of strings Do this by specifying prefix Lstrimaj CEN suffix where commas separate the strings For example my_file c o expands to my_file c my_file o Filename generation Instead of using a command to work on just one file or directory you can use wildcard characters to operate on many If you want to Use this wildcard Match zero or more characters Match any single character Exclude characters specified within brackets Match any characters or range of characters separated by a hyphen specified within the brackets Hidden files whose names start with a dot e g profile aren t matched unless you specify the dot For example doesn t match profile but does The following examples show you how you can use wildcards with the cp utility to copy groups of files to a directory named tmp If you enter The cp utility copies cp tmp All files start
262. ity reasons Either add the executable s directory to your PATH or specify the path to the command e g my_program For more information see Utilities p 66 earlier in this chapter Why does root have access to different commands The root user has a different PATH setting that includes such directories as sbin and usr sbin These directories contain executables and managers that typically only root can use If you aren t logged in as root you can still run some of the utilities in sbin if you have the right permission but you ll have to specify the full path e g sbin logger or add the directory to your PATH When I list a directory I don t see files that start with a dot Files whose names start with a dot are called hidden files To list them use the a option to 1s Why am I getting a No such file or directory message The shell can t find the file or directory that you specified Here are some things to check e Have you typed the name correctly In QNX Neutrino the names of files and directories are case sensitive e Does the name contain spaces or other special characters Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 75 Using the Command Line 76 If you have a file called my file and you don t escape the meaning of the space the shell uses the space when breaking the command line into tokens so the command looks for one file called my and another called file Use quoting
263. jecting removable media See the Utilities Reference for details on usage and syntax Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 147 Working with Filesystems Image filesystem By an image we refer to an OS image here which is a file that contains the OS your executables and any data files that might be related to your programs for use in an embedded system You can think of the image as a small filesystem it has a directory structure and some files in it The image contains a small directory structure that tells procnto the names and positions of the files contained within it the image also contains the files themselves When the embedded system is running the image can be accessed just like any other read only filesystem cd proc boot ls Script cat datal data2 devc ser8250 esh Is procnto cat datal This is a data file called datal contained in the image Note that this is a convenient way of associating data files with your programs The above example actually demonstrates two aspects of having the OS image function as a filesystem When we issue the 1s command the OS loads 1s from the image filesystem pathname proc boot 1s Then when we issue the cat command the OS loads cat from the image filesystem as well and opens the file datal You can create an OS image by using mkifs MaKe Image FileSystem For more information see Building Embedded Systems and mkifs inthe Utilities Referen
264. k addresses during an initial exchange called discovery Once a session is established between an individual user and the remote site for example an Internet service provider the session can be monitored for billing purposes Many apartment houses hotels and corporations are now providing shared Internet access over DSL lines using Ethernet and PPPoE Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Dynamically assigned TCP IP parameters A PPPoE connection is composed of a client and a server Both the client and server work over any Ethernet like interface It s used to hand out IP addresses to the clients based on the user and workstation if desired as opposed to workstation only authentication The PPPoE server creates a point to point connection for each client Establishing a PPPoE session The io pkt stack provides PPP to Ethernet services Start io pkt with the appropriate driver For example io pkt v6 he del900 Starting a point to point connection over PPPoE session The pppoed daemon needs pppd to establish TCP IP point to point links When you start pppd there are a few pppd options that are specific to running pppd over a pppoe session Here s an example of etc ppp pppoe up bin sh pppd debug dev io net ppp_en ac pc detach defaultroute Y require ns mtu 1492 name username The required pppa options for use with pppoed are dev io net ppp_en The device that you want io pkt to create ac p
265. k in order to know how to interact with USB devices and controllers To start the USB stack you need to 1 Identify your controller The documentation for the hardware should describe the type of controller OHCI UHCI EHCI or XHCI If you don t know what type of controller you re using you can identify it using pci vvv Find the entry for the USB controller to determine the manufacturer vendor ID and device ID You can either find the information on the manufacturer s website www usb org or use the vendor and device IDs to cross reference it at http www pcidatabase com The class codes that appear in the output from pci vvv are Class Code Controller Type 0c0300 UHCI 0c0310 OHCI 0c0320 EHCI 0c0330 XHCI There might be multiple chips and therefore multiple drivers that you need to load You can also try running just one of the USB stacks if it fails try running another stack 2 Log in as root and start the io usb stack with the appropriate module Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 247 Connecting Hardware Printers Touchscreens 248 e OHCI controller devu ohci so e UHCI controller devu uhci so e EHCI controller devu ehci so e XHCI controller devu xhci so This should create an entry in dev called dev io usb io usb If you re starting the USB stack and a driver in your startup scripts make sure that you use the wait for command to make sure that dev io usb io
266. k is very busy 260 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Network adapters Late Collision on Transmit errors Late collision errors that occur when a card has transmitted enough of a frame that the rest of the network should be aware that the network is currently in use yet another system on the network still started to transfer a frame onto the line They re the same as regular collision errors but were just detected too late Depending on the protocol these types of errors can be detrimental to the protocol s overall throughput For example a 1 packet loss on the NFS protocol using the default retransmission timers is enough to slow the speed down by approximately 90 If you experience low throughput with your networking check to make sure that you aren t getting these types of errors Typically Ethernet adapters don t retransmit frames that have been lost to a late collision These errors are a sign that the time to propagate the signal across the network is longer than the time it takes for a network card to place an entire packet on the network Thus the offending system doesn t know that the network is currently in use and it proceeds to place a new frame on the network The nodes that are trying to use the network at the same time detect the error after the first slot time of 64 bytes This means that the NIC detects late collisions only when transmitting frames that are longer than 64 bytes The problem with this is
267. l usr fred and net node2 usr barney are linked even though they reside on different filesystems they re even on different nodes see the following diagram You can t do this using hard links but you can with a symbolic link as follows ln s net node2 usr barney net nodel usr fred Note how the symbolic link and the target directory need not share the same name In most cases you use a symbolic link for linking one directory to another directory However you can also use symbolic links for files as in this example ln s net nodel usr src game c net nodel usr eric src sample c gt Node 1 Node 2 cuy E usr usr Symbolic link B 4 gt eric src fred barney sam gt l ta src game c I symbolic hello c my_file I link ETT A Figure 3 Symbolic links Removing a symbolic link deletes only the link not the target 154 Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited QNX 4 filesystem Several functions operate directly on the symbolic link For these functions the replacement of the symbolic element of the pathname with ts target is not performed These functions include unlink which removes the symbolic link stat and readlink Since symbolic links can point to directories incorrect configurations can result in problems such as circular directory links
268. l1 session PATH bin proc boot bin sh Make tmp point to the shared memory area type 1ink tmp dev shmem Programs require the runtime linker ldqnx so to be at a fixed location type link usr lib ldqnx so 2 proc boot libc so type link bin sh bin ksh We use the c shared lib which also contains the runtime linker libc so libsocket so The files above this line can be shared by multiple processes data c devc con devc ser8250 devc pty pci bios seedres pipe io pkt v4 bin echo echo bin stty stty tail pei chat ifconfig ping syslogd touch modem_ans_ppp sh Services telnetd etc config inetd usr sbin telnetd telnetd usr sbin tftpd tftpd usr sbin pppd pppd bin login login bin ksh ksh etc ppp chap secrets Client Server Secret Addrs HART AR HAA HATH RATE HRT AH RAE ERE password etc syslog conf eae tmp syslog Inetd config Files etc services etc services etc protocols etc protocols etc termcap etc termcap etc passwd etc passwd etc default login etc default login etc resolv conf etc resolv conf etc nsswitch conf etc nsswitch conf etc shadow etc shadow etc inetd conf telnet stream tcp nowait root usr sbin telnetd in telnetd tftp dgram udp wait root usr sbin tftpd in tftpd etc hosts 127 1 localhost localdomain localhost 10 99 99 1 server server 10 99 99 2 client cli
269. ld usr www index html Once you ve decided on a directory structure you need to export these environment variables before starting Slinger export HTTPD_ROOT_DIR usr local httpd export HTTPD_ROOT_DOC index html For information on setting environment variables when you log into your machine see Configuring Your Environment p 115 268 Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Running Slinger Running Slinger To run Slinger simply type slinger The Slinger web server communicates over TCP sockets so you need to have socket runtime support This means you need to have a TCP IP stack running For more information see the TCP IP Networking p 187 chapter in this guide The Slinger server listens on the TCP port 80 Since this port number is less than 1024 Slinger needs to run as root As soon as it has attached to the HTTP port it changes itself to run as user ID 2 by calling setuid 2 Many embedded servers force the user to relink the server in order to add pages which compromises reliability because vendor and user code compete in a shared memory space Despite its size Slinger provides enough functionality to support accessing generated dynamic HTML via CGI or SSI Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 269 Setting Up an Embedded Web Server Dynamic HTML CGI method 270 The embedded web server lets you use create dynamic HTML in various ways e CGI p 270
270. ld include at least an entry with the name of your machine i e the output of the hostname command If you re using the Ethernet binding all other reachable machines are also displayed For example joseph eileen Are io pkt and the drivers running 184 As mentioned before io pkt is the framework used to connect drivers and protocols In order to troubleshoot this use the following pidin command pidin P io pkt v4 hc mem Look for the Qnet shared object in the output pid tid name prio STATE code data stack 118802 1 sbin io pkt v4 hc 210 SIGWAITINFO 876K 672K 4096 516K 118802 2 sbin io pkt v4 hc 21o RECEIVE 876K 672K 8192 132K 118802 3 sbin io pkt wi he 21r RECEIVE 876K 672K 4096 132K 118802 4 sbin io pkt v4 hc 21o RECEIVE 876K 672K 4096 132K 118802 5 sbin io pkt v4 hc 200 RECEIVE 876K 672K 4096 132K 118802 6 sbin io pkt v4 hc 100 RECEIVE 876K 672K 4096 132K libe so0 2 b0300000 436K 12K devnp shim so b8200000 28K 4096 devn pcnet so b8208000 40K 4096 1sm qnet so b8213000 168K 36K If the output includes an 1sm qnet so shared object Qnet is running Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Troubleshooting Is the network card functional To determine whether or not the network card is functional i e transmitting and receiving packets use the nicinfo command If you re logged in as root your PATH includes the directory that contains the nicinfo executable if you re logged in as another
271. lder perspective IDE 329 System Management Mode SMM 24 don t use it 24 SYSTEMDRIVE DOS variable 73 SYSTEMROOT DOS variable 73 T takeover attacks 309 talk UNIX command 20 tar 70 277 281 282 taskkill DOS command 71 tasklist DOS command 71 TCP 187 TCP IP 20 89 90 187 188 189 191 195 199 200 203 210 218 222 254 343 clients 188 configuration files 90 limits 343 printing over 203 210 218 222 routing 189 servers 188 sockets 89 software components 191 395 Index TCP IP continued stack 191 200 network status 200 stacks running multiple 195 troubleshooting 199 technical support 345 Technical support 17 telnet 51 telnetd 193 TEMP DOS variable 73 temporary files 94 TERM 51 76 130 termcap 130 terminals 51 52 53 76 88 89 130 193 253 333 canonical input buffer 333 clearing 52 devices 89 drivers 253 initializing 53 pseudo 88 raw input buffer 333 remote session daemon 193 type setting 51 76 130 terminfo 51 76 130 test shell command 75 texinfo documentation files 104 text files 104 textto 22 143 tftpd 193 tgz file extension 283 third party software 104 134 man 104 perl 134 troff 104 threads 20 69 272 317 318 342 data sharing 272 idle 317 limits 342 priority 69 317 342 state 318 throughput filesystem 322 tic 51 130 tilde expansion 59 time 124 126 127 128 129 131 daylight saving time 129 setting 131 zone 124 126 127 128 129 131 abbrev
272. le has but if the destination file already exists and has an ACL its ACL is preserved Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 103 Working with Files Filename extensions This table lists some common filename extensions used in a QNX Neutrino system Extension Description Related programs utilities al Troff style text e g from man and troff third party UNIX man manual software pages Bench calculator library or bc program bat MS DOS batch file For use on DOS systems won t run under QNX Neutrino See Writing Shell Scripts p 133 and ksh for information on writing shell scripts for QNX Neutrino C program source code QCC make Configuration files various Various programs formats formats Configuration files various Various program formats formats Cascading style sheet Used in the IDE for documentation MS Windows dynamic link Not used directly in QNX Neutrino necessary in support of some programs that run under MS Windows such as some of the QNX Neutrino tools See so shared objects 104 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Filename extensions Extension Description Related programs utilities for the QNX Neutrino equivalent GZ Compressed file gzip Backing Up and Recovering Data p 277 htm HyperText Markup Web browser Language HTML file for Web viewing A QNX Neutrino Image mk i fs see also Making an filesystem typically
273. led and accurate data use tracelogger and the System Analysis Toolkit see the SAT User s Guide The SAT logs kernel events the changes to your system s state using a specially instrumented version of the kernel procnto instr If you have the Integrated Development Environment on your system you ll O find that it s the best tool for determining how you can improve your system s performance For more information see the IDE User s Guide 316 Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Improving performance Improving performance If you run hogs you ll get a rough idea of which processes are using the most CPU time For example hogs n 5 PID NAME MSEC PIDS SYSTEM 1315 53 43 6 devb eide 593 24 19 54358061 make 206 8 6 2026 83 67 6 devb eide 294 12 9 2391 75 79 6 devb eide 335 10 11 5462430 htmlindex 249 7 8 L 1004 24 33 5462430 htmlindex 2959 71 98 5462430 htmlindex 4156 96 138 5462430 htmlindex 4225 96 140 5462430 htmlindex 4162 96 138 1 74 35 2 6 devb eide TS 37 2 1 3002 97 100 Let s look at this output The first iteration indicates that process 1 is using 53 of the CPU Process 1 is always the process manager procnto In this case it s the idle thread that s using most of the CPU The entry for devb eide reflects disk 1 0 The make utility is also using the CPU In the second iteration procnto and devb eide use most of the CPU but the next
274. lement scripts in either language You should put the executable C program rand_images cgi and the per1 script rand_images pl in usr www cgi bin Use chmod to make sure that both files have 755 permissions The images that they access are actually located in usr local httpd images The web pages access the images in their local directory the CGI script just figures out which one it wants to load To run these scripts from a web page use the following HTML with SSI commands lt H2 gt Here is a random image lt H2 gt lt P gt Perl Script lt exec cgi rand_images pl gt lt BR gt C Program lt exec cgi rand_images cgi gt lt BR gt Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Examples rand_images c This C program displays a random image To compile this application run cc 0o rand_images cgi rand_images c The program is as follows This program selects a random number and then chooses an image based on that number This allows the image to change each time the webpage is loaded tinclude lt stdio h gt tinclude lt stdlib h gt include lt time h gt set variables char dir images char files filel jpg file2 jpg file3 Jpg filel ijpg files jpg 7 int num int size int main size sizeof files sizeof files 0 srand int time NULL num rand 4 Print out head with Random Filename and Base Direc
275. les and file hierarchies cp Or pax Create directories mkdir Remove directories rmdir Determine how much free space you have df on a filesystem Concatenate and display files cat less Or more Create a tape archive Display output on a page by page basis Extract files from a tar gz or tgz file gunzip filename pax rortar xzf filename For more information about these and other commands see the Utilities Reference Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited QNX Neutrino for MS DOS users QNX Neutrino for MS DOS users If you re familiar with Microsoft Windows you might need to know about the QNX Neutrino equivalents for the basic DOS commands and variables DOS commands and their QNX Neutrino equivalents The table below lists the QNX Neutrino equivalents of some common MS DOS commands For more information about the QNX Neutrino commands see the Utilities Reference DOS command QNX Neutrino command s Batch files Shell scripts see Writing Shell Scripts p 133 in this guide or the docs for ksh cac call ksh script If the script begins with bin sh you can invoke it like a regular program e g script without prefixing it with sh or ksh chkdsk For QNX 4 disk filesystems use chkfsys for DOS FAT filesystems use chkdosfs ch E cm date date and rtc Note that you must use rtc to set the hardware clock to the new date and time dir I Copyright
276. lesystem allows the same characters in a filename as the QNX 4 filesystem see Filenames p 152 earlier in this chapter Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 163 Working with Filesystems Flash filesystems The QNX Neutrino flash filesystem drivers implement a POSIX compatible filesystem on NOR flash memory devices The flash filesystem drivers are standalone executables that contain both the flash filesystem code and the flash device code There are versions of the flash filesystem driver for different embedded systems hardware as well as PCMCIA memory cards Flash filesystems don t include and entries for the current and parent directories lt The naming convention for the drivers is devf system where system describes the embedded system For information about these drivers see the devf entries in the Utilities Reference For more information on the way QNX Neutrino handles flash filesystems see e mkefs and flashct1 in the Utilities Reference e Filesystems in the System Architecture guide e Building Embedded Systems 164 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited CIFS filesystem CIFS filesystem CIFS the Common Internet File System protocol lets a client workstation perform transparent file access over a network to a Windows system or a UNIX system running an SMB server It was formerly known as SMB or Server Message Block protocol which was used to access resources
277. lities Reference dev io net A directory owned and operated by io pkt under which you can find files relating to the network devices for your various LANs C programs can perform devctl operations on these files to interact with the driver e g to obtain driver statistics Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 87 Working with Files 88 Only legacy io net drivers create entries under dev io net native io pkt drivers don t dev mem A device that represents all physical memory dev mq and dev mqueue A pathname space where entries for message queues appear for more information see mg and mqueue in the Utilities Reference dev null A bit bucket that you can direct data to The data is discarded dev parn Parallel ports e g for parallel printers see stt y for configuration and devc par for driver details in the Utilities Reference dev pci Adopted by the PCI server on the machine this device lets programs communicate with the PCI server See pci in the Utilities Reference dev pipe Adopted by the pipe manager The presence of this file tells other programs such as a startup script built into an OS image that the Pipe manager is successfully running dev pty p zP T 0 9a f The control side of a pseudo terminal device pair Pseudo ttys are named with a letter p z or P T followed by a hexadecimal digit making it possible to have up to 256 devices See devc
278. lly keep local system initialization files etc resolv conf Resolver configuration file see also etc hosts above See etc resolv conf in the Utilities Reference etc skel A directory that holds the default version of profile When you add a new user to the system this file is copied to the user s home directory For more information see the description of etc default passwa in the documentation for passwd and the description of profile p 118 in Configuring Your Environment etc system A directory that includes files and directories used when you boot the system including e etc system sysinit the main script for initializing the system e etc system config useqnet a file indicating that you want to start Qnet For more information see the Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing p 175 chapter e etc system enum the location of configuration files for the enumerators s Additional filesystems are mounted under fs See Working with Filesystems p 145 in this guide and devb and mount in the Utilities Reference This directory can include the following subdirectories 92 Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Where everything is stored s cdn CD ROM filesystems s dn Floppy disk filesystems s hdn type number Filesystems on hard disk partitions home The home directories of regular users are found here The name of your home directory
279. long listing 355 LS 120 drives 237 Ism autoip so 198 Ism qnet so 94 177 179 312 security 312 Istat 155 M MAC Media Access Control addresses 256 Macintosh HFS and HFS Plus 170 340 magnetic optical drives 238 make 104 Makefile source 104 malloc 342 man 95 man UNIX command 20 68 104 managers 92 94 179 191 device enumerator 92 network io pkt 179 191 manual pages 95 mapping pathname space 24 83 mass storage devices 249 328 Maximum Receivable data Unit See MRU Maximum Transmittable data Unit See MTU md DOS command 71 Media Access Control addresses See MAC addresses melt 277 283 mem 88 memalign 342 memory 88 89 149 258 259 318 342 343 allocation 259 342 failures 259 limits 342 aperture 258 physical 88 shared 89 149 343 limits 343 procnto 149 usage 318 message of the day 91 118 message passing 311 security 311 message queues 88 343 limits 343 pathname space 88 messages 68 87 89 system 87 89 usage 68 metadata 321 micro embedded shell 55 134 microkernel 20 23 advantages of 23 version of determining 20 Microsoft Windows 131 time setting 131 minimal Access Control Lists ACLs 101 minimal routing 189 mk file extension 104 389 Index mkdir 70 mkefs 164 mkifs 104 134 148 mkisofs 285 mkqnx6fs 157 mktime 129 mode DOS command 71 modems 264 265 266 359 example 359 external 265 Host Signal Processor HSP 266 PCI 265 soft 266 testing 265 troubleshoo
280. m where if we wanted to pretend to be someone else we would accept all mail from the Post Office However we would then have to sort all the mail This would take a much longer time compared with the amount of time the Post Office would take to presort the mail and give us only the mail addressed to us For more information see Promiscuous Mode p 258 below Current Operation Rate The media rate is the speed at which the network card operates On most cards it s either 10 Mb s or 100 Mb s This display also shows what form of duplex the card uses Most cards run at half or full duplex transmission e Full duplex transmission means that data can be transmitted in both directions simultaneously Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Network adapters e Half duplex data transmission means that data can be transmitted in both directions but not at the same time The easiest way to illustrate this is to think of a road If the road has two lanes it s full duplex because cars can drive in both directions at the same time without obstructing the other lane If the road has only a single lane it s half duplex because there can be only one car on the road at a time When you examine the media rate check the speed the form of duplex and what the hub supports Not all hubs support full duplex Active Interface Type This is the type of interface used on the Ethernet adapter This is usually UTP unshielde
281. m size and disk size Depends on the server 32 bit filesystem limit CIFS filesystem The limits for CIFS filesystems include Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 337 Understanding System Limits Filename length 255 bytes Pathname length 1024 bytes File size 2 GB 1 32 bit filesystem limit Directory size filesystem size and disk size 32 bit filesystem limit The CIFS filesystem doesn t support chmod or chown Embedded flash filesystem The limits for embedded flash filesystems include Filename length 255 bytes Pathname length 1024 bytes File size filesystem size and disk size 2GB 1 Directory size Limited by the available space Flash filesystems use a cache to remember the location of extents within files and directories to reduce the time for random seeking especially backward Embedded Transaction filesystem ETFS The limits for ETFS are Filename length 91 bytes Pathname length 1024 bytes File size 338 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Filesystem limits 2 GB 1 32 bit filesystem limit Absolute maximum number of files 32768 15 bits Default maximum number of files 4096 controlled by the driver s f option see the entry for s etfs ram in the Utilities Reference Lal Filenames that are more than 32 bytes long use two directory entries reducing the number of files that you can actually have lt Max cluster size
282. me 10 0 0 100 where f_name is the interface name that the driver uses If you also want to specify your gateway use the route command route add default 10 0 0 1 Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 191 TCP IP Networking This configures the gateway host as 10 0 0 1 If you then want to view your network configuration use the netstat command netstat in displays information about the network interfaces Name Mtu Network Address Ipkts lerrs Opkts Oerrs Coll lo0 32976 lt Link gt 0 0 0 0 0 160 32976 127 127 001 0 0 0 0 0 en0 1500 lt Link gt 00 50 dasCc8 61 92 21 0 2 0 0 en0 1500 10 10 00 100 21 0 2 0 0 To display information about the routing table use netstat rn the resulting display looks like this Routing tables Internet Destination Gateway Flags Refs Use Mtu Interface default 10 0 0 1 UGS 0 0 eno 10 10 00 100 U L 0 en0 10 0 0100 10 0 0 100 UH 0 0 100 127300001 127 001 UH 0 0 100 The table shows that the default route to the gateway was configured 10 0 0 1 192 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Running the Internet daemons Running the Internet daemons If a host is a server it invokes the appropriate daemon to satisfy a client s requests A TCP IP server typically runs the inetd daemon also known as the Internet super server You can start inetd in your machine s rc local file Y Running inetd lets outside users try to connect to your machine and
283. me 20 undeleting a zapped file 297 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Unicode 84 filenames 84 unions directory 83 Universal Disk Format UDF filesystem 84 169 231 340 Universal Host Controller Interface See UHCI Universal Serial Bus See USB UNIX compared to QNX Neutrino 20 unlink 155 unnamed semaphores 343 limits 343 Unshielded Twisted Pair See UTP up arrow 52 65 usage messages 68 104 usb 246 USB Universal Serial Bus 214 221 246 248 249 328 mass storage devices 249 328 printers 214 221 248 connecting 248 lpr and etc printcap 214 spooler 221 use command 20 68 173 use file extension 104 useqnet 92 180 USERNAME DOS variable 73 users 33 34 36 37 41 42 43 46 98 137 194 accounts 36 41 46 managing 41 reading etc passwd 36 troubleshooting 46 adding 41 embedded systems 33 IDs 34 42 assigning 42 name login 34 41 name real 37 42 removing 43 root 34 running programs as a specific 98 137 trusted 194 usr 95 UTC Coordinated Universal Time 124 131 hardware clock 131 UTF 8 84 filenames 84 utilities 36 57 67 68 70 71 86 94 95 basic 70 documentation 95 DOS equivalents for 71 location of 86 94 95 logging information about users 36 names completing 57 remote execution 68 syntax conventions 67 usage messages 68 utility syntax 67 UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair 257 V valloc 343 var 96 variables 73 139 195 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems
284. mit option either globally or as a mount option to force or disable synchronous writes e Consider using a RAM disk for temporary files e g tmp 3 Optimize application code e Read and write in large chunks 16 32 KB is optimal e Read and write in multiples of a disk block on block boundaries typically 512 bytes but you can use stat or statvfs to determine the value at runtime e Avoid standard I O where possible use open read and write instead of fopen fread and fwrite The f functions use an extra layer of buffering The default size is given by BUFSIZ you can use setvbuf to specify a different buffer size As a QNX Neutrino extension you can use the O STDIO_DEFAULT_BUFSIZE environment variable to override BUFSIZ as the default buffer size for stream I O The value of STDIO_DEFAULT_BUFSIZE must be greater than that of BUFSIZ e Pregrow files if you know their ultimate sizes e Use direct I O DMA to user space e Use filenames that are no longer than 16 characters If you do this the filesystem won t use the inodes file so there won t be any inter block references In addition there will be one less disk write and hence one less chance of corruption if the power fails 320 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Filesystems and block I O devb drivers Long filenames i e longer than 48 characters especially slow down the filesystem e Use the i option to dinit
285. mode it writes tar format archives Your choice of which to use is based on the command line syntax that works better for you Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 281 Backing Up and Recovering Data not the format of the archives because the formats are identical The pax utility was created as part of the POSIX standard to provide a consistent mechanism for archive exchange pax stands for Portable Archive eXchange thus avoiding conflict between variants of the tar utility that behave differently You can create archives of e Single files although there isn t much point in doing so with tar and pax For example pax wf my_archive tar code c This command takes code c and creates an archive sometimes referred to as a tarball called my_archive tar The wf options tell pax to write a file e Multiple files to archive more than one file pass more files on the end of the command line For example pax wf my_archive tar code c header h readme txt Pax archives them all together resulting in the archive my_archive tar e Directories just specify a directory name on the command line pax wf my_archive tar workspace This command archives all the contents of workspace into my_archive tar e Partitions specify the directory name of the partition pax wf my_archive tar fs hd0 t79 This command archives all the contents of the t 79 partition into one very large archive my_archive tar You can k
286. my_file ps dev printers rlpt2 spool For configuration files for printing with lpr SAMBA and NCFTP see the Examples appendix Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 223 Printing Troubleshooting Understanding lpr error messages The following error messages from the 1p print utilities may help you troubleshoot your printing problems lpr error messages lpr filename copyfile is too large The submitted file was larger than the printer s maximum file size as defined by the mx capability in its printcap entry lpr printer unknown printer The printer wasn t found in the etc printcap database perhaps because an entry is missing or incorrect lpr printer jobs queued but cannot start daemon The connection to 1pd on the local machine failed probably because the printer server has died or isn t responding The superuser can restart 1pd by typing usr bin l1lpd You can also check the state of the master printer daemon sin F lpd Another possibility is that the user ID for 1pr isn t root and its group ID isn t daemon You can check by typing ls lg usr bin lpr lpr printer printer queue is disabled This means the queue was turned off with the lprc disable command see 1pre printer control program p 207 to prevent 1pr from putting files in the queue This is usually done when a printer is going to be down for a long time The superuser can turn the printer back on using l
287. n so and devnp so The shared objects are arranged in a hierarchy with the end user on the top and hardware on the bottom It s possible to run more than one instance of io pkt but doing so requires a special setup If you want to start io pkt by hand you should slay the running io pkt first You can start the io pkt from the command line telling it which drivers and protocols to load io pkt v4 del900 p qnet amp This causes io pkt v4 to load the devn e1900 so Ethernet driver and the Qnet protocol stack Or you can use the mount and umount commands to start and stop modules dynamically like this io pkt v6 he mount Tio pkt devn el900 so mount Tio pkt lsm qnet so To unload the driver type umount dev io net en0 You can t unmount a protocol stack such as TCP IP or Qnet Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 181 Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing Checking out the neighborhood Populating net 182 Once you ve started Qnet the net directory includes after a short while see below an entry for all other nodes on your local subnetwork that are running Qnet You can access files and processes on other machines as if they were on your own computer at least as far as the permissions allow For example to display the contents of a file on another machine you can use less specifying the path through net less net alonzo etc TIM
288. n we use this directory to store image filesystems built by mkifs To boot from one of the images you ll need to copy it to boot on a bootable Power Safe or QNX 4 filesystem device first 86 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited dev Where everything is stored boot sys IPL and startup code are located here This is one of the paths searched by the mkifs utility as it tries to resolve components named in the buildfile The dev directory belongs to the process manager and contains device files The files that this directory includes may include dev cdn CD ROM block devices see devb in the Utilities Reference for driver information dev conn Text mode console TTY device see devc con in the Utilities Reference dev console The device that s used for diagnostic log messages on a full x86 system this is a write only device managed by the system logger s1ogger Buildfiles for embedded systems may configure a link from this path to another device such as a serial port See slogger in the Utilities Reference dev fdn Floppy disk block devices see devb fdc in the Utilities Reference for driver details dev hdn Hard disk block devices data representing an entire drive spanning all partitions see devb in the Utilities Reference dev hditn Hard disk partition block devices the data in these devices is a subset of that represented by the corresponding han file see devb in the Uti
289. n Transmit This is the number of collisions that were encountered while trying to transmit frames The NIC checks for a carrier sense when it knows that the network hasn t been used for a while and then starts to transmit a frame of data The problem occurs when two network cards check for the carrier sense and start to transmit data at the same time This error is more common on busy networks When the NICs detect a collision they stop transmitting and wait for a random period of time The time periods are different for each NIC so in theory when the wait time has expired the other NIC will have already transmitted or will be still waiting for its time to expire thus avoiding further collisions You can reduce this type of problem by introducing a full duplex network Multiple Collisions on Transmit This error is due to a attempted transmission that has had several collisions despite backing off several times This occurs more frequently on busy half duplex networks If there are a lot of these errors try switching to a full duplex network or if the network is TCP IP based try introducing a few switches instead of hubs Deferred Transmits Commonly found on half duplex networks this value doesn t mean that there are problems It means that the card tried to send data on the network cable but the network was busy with other data on the cable So it simply waited for a random amount of time This number can get high if the networ
290. n can contain multiple process groups session leader A process whose death causes all processes within its process group to receive a SIGHUP signal shell A process that parses what you type on the command line also known as a command interpreter shell script A file that contains shell commands simple command A command line that contains a single command usually a program that you want to run e g less my_file Contrast compound command socket A logical drive in a flash filesystem consisting of a contiguous and homogeneous region of flash memory socket In TCP IP a combination of an IP address and a port number that uniquely identifies a single network process software interrupt Similar to a hardware interrupt see nterrupt except that the source of the interrupt is software spilling Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 375 Glossary 376 What happens when you try to change a file that the package filesystem manages if you re using it a copy of the file is transferred to the spill directory sporadic A scheduling policy whereby a thread s priority can oscillate dynamically between a foreground or normal priority and a background or low priority A thread is given an execution budget of time to be consumed within a certain replenishment period See also FIFO and round robin startup code The software component that gains control after the IPL code has performed
291. n from the installation CD ROM to gain shell access to examine and repair the necessary files My text mode login fails with a message command No such file or directory The system couldn t find the command specified as your login shell This might happen because e The command wasn t found in 1ogin s PATH usually bin usr bin Specify the full pathname to the program e g 46 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Troubleshooting usr local bin myprogram in the user s etc passwd account entry The account entry specifies options or arguments for your login shell You can t pass arguments to the initial command because the entire string is interpreted as the filename to be executed 47 Chapter 4 Using the Command Line Like QNX 4 UNIX and DOS the QNX Neutrino RTOS is based on a command line interface that you might want or need to use instead of the GUI For developing software you don t always have to use the command line on Linux and Windows you can use our Integrated Development Environment IDE that provides a graphical way to write build and test code The IDE frequently uses QNX Neutrino utilities but hides the command line from you For more information see the IDE User s Guide Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 49 Using the Command Line Processing a command When you type a command several different processes
292. n reads so that the disk is being accessed for the predicted new data while the user processes the original data e write behind of writes to allow a large amount of dirty data to be coalesced into a single contiguous multiple block write 322 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Filesystems and block I O devb drivers The most efficient way of accessing the disk for high performance is through the standard POSIX routines that work with file descriptors open read and write because these allow direct access to the filesystem with no interference from libc If you re concerned about performance we don t recommend that you use the standard 1 0 lt stdio h gt routines that work with FILE variables because they introduce another layer of code and another layer of buffering In particular the default buffer size is BUFSIZ or 1 KB so all access to the disk is carved up into chunks of that size causing a large amount of overhead for passing messages and switching contexts There are some cases when the standard I O facilities are useful such as when processing a text file one line or character at a time in which case the 1 KB of buffering provided by standard I O greatly reduces the number of messages to the filesystem You can improve performance by using e setvbuf or the STDIO DEFAULT BUFSIZE environment variable to increase the buffering size e fileno to access the underlying file descriptor directly
293. n specialized applications However we do conduct internal security audits of vulnerable programs to correct potential exploits For flexibility and familiarity ANX Neutrino uses the generic UNIX security model of user accounts and file permissions which is generally sufficient for all our customers In the embedded space it s fairly easy to lock down a system to any degree without compromising operation The ultrasecure systems that need certifications are generally servers aS opposed to embedded devices For more information see Managing User Accounts p 33 and File ownership and permissions p 97 in Working with Files 310 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited QNX Neutrino specific security issues QNX Neutrino specific security issues As the above section notes QNX Neutrino is potentially vulnerable to most of the same threats that other UNIX style systems face In addition there are also some issues that are unique to QNX Neutrino Message passing Our basic model of operation relies on message passing between the OS kernel process manager and other services There are potential local exploits in that area that wouldn t exist in a system where all drivers live in the same address space as the kernel Of course the potential weakness is outweighed by the demonstrated strength of this model since embedded systems generally aren t overly concerned with local attacks For more information about the mi
294. n used so commonly together TCP IP has become a standard terminology in today s Internet Essentially TCP IP refers to network communications where the TCP transport is used to deliver data across IP networks This chapter provides information on setting up TCP IP networking on a QNX Neutrino network It also provides troubleshooting and other relevant details from a system administration point of view A QNX Neutrino based TCP IP network can access resources located on any other system that supports TCP IP Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 187 TCP IP Networking Overview of TCP IP 188 Let s start with some definitions Clients and servers There are two types of TCP IP hosts clients and servers A client requests TCP IP service a server provides it In planning your network you must decide which hosts will be servers and which will be clients For example if you want to telnet from a machine you need to set it up as a client if you want to telnet toa machine it has to be a server Hosts and gateways In TCP IP terminology we always refer to network accessible computers as either hosts or gateways Host A node running TCP IP that doesn t forward IP packets to other to other TCP IP networks a host usually has a single interface network card and is the destination or source of TCP IP packets Gateway A node running TCP IP that forwards IP packets to other TCP IP networks as determined by its rou
295. ndor ID 8086h Intel Corporation Device ID 7111h PCI index 0h Class Codes 010180h Revision ID 1h Bus number 0 Device number 4 Function num 1 Status Reg 280h Command Reg 5h I O space access enabled Memory space access disabled Bus Master enabled Special Cycle operations ignored Memory Write and Invalidate disabled Palette Snooping disabled Parity Checking disabled Data Address stepping disabled SERR driver disabled 82371AB EB PIIX4 IDE Controller Fast back to back transactions to different agents disabled Header type BIST Latency Timer Cache Line Size PCI IO Address Oh Single function 20h Oh Max Lat Ons Min Gnt Ons PCI Int Pin NC Interrupt line 0 Device Dependent Registers 0x40 07 cO 03 80 00 00 00 00 05 00 0x50 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0x60 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0x70 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0x80 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0x90 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 OxA0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 OxB0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0xC0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0xD0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 OxE0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 OxF0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 30 Of d800h length 16 enabled Oh Build in self test not supported Find the entry for the device you want to locate and it ll give you the details on the manufacturer vendor ID and device ID You may need to search for keywords e g Audio in order to identify yo
296. networks in the Utilities Reference etc nsswitch conf Name service switch configuration file For more information see etc nsswitch conf in the Utilities Reference etc opasswd Backup of etc passwd file before its last change via the passwd utility See the Managing User Accounts p 33 chapter etc oshadow Backup of etc shadow file before its last change via the passwd utility See Managing User Accounts p 33 etc passwd This file defines login accounts See the chapter Logging In Logging Out and Shutting Down p 27 as well as Managing User Accounts p 33 for more details also see passwd login inthe Utilities Reference etc printers A directory that contains printertype cfg files and a fontmap file For more information see Printing with spooler p 220 in the Printing chapter Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 91 Working with Files etc profile The startup profile script executed by the shell when you log in it s executed before HOME profile See Configuring Your Environment p 115 etc profile d A directory where the default etc profile script looks for scripts to run when any user logs in The etc profile script runs each script in this directory that matches SHELL For example if the value of the SHELL environment variable is bin sh the script runs the scripts that match sh etc ra d A directory where you usua
297. ng zero means true or success and anything nonzero means false or failure This is the opposite of the meanings in the C language The final block echo echo echo echo echo echo exit Use tfind stuff_to_find di di where stuff_to_find search string y e g tfind console_state looks through all files in the current directory and below and displays all A instances of console_state 1 bad status is just a bit of help if you pass incorrect arguments to the script it prints a description of how to use it and then returns a failure code Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 141 Writing Shell Scripts Efficiency In general a script isn t as efficient as a custom written C or C program because it e is interpreted not compiled e does most of its work by running other programs However developing a script can take less time than writing a program especially if you use pipes and existing utilities as building blocks in your script 142 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Caveat scriptor Caveat scriptor If you need to write shell scripts there are a few things to bear in mind e In order to run a script as if it were a utility you must make it executable by using the chmod command For example if you want anyone to be able to run your script type chmod a x script_name Your script doesn t have to be executable if you plan to invoke it by passing it
298. ng file maintenance and recovery utilities e fdisk p 296 e dinit p 296 e chkfsys p 297 e dcheck p 297 e zap p 297 e spatch p 298 This section gives a brief description of these utilities for more information see the Utilities Reference fdisk The fdisk utility creates and maintains the partition block on a hard disk This block is compatible with other operating systems and may be maintained by other OS versions of fdisk although ours has the advantage of recognizing QNX Neutrino specific information If the partition loader is missing or damaged fdisk can create it We recommend that you keep a hard copy of the partition table information for every disk in your network dinit The dinit utility creates but the QNX 4 filesystem maintains the following e loader block e root block e bitmap blocks e root directory e inodes file e longfilenames file If something destroys the first few blocks of your filesystem you can try to recover them by using the r option to dinit and then running chkfsys For more information see dinit in the Utilities Reference 296 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited File maintenance utilities chkfsys The chkfsys utility is your principal filesystem maintenance tool For details about this tool see chkfsys in the Utilities Reference The chkfsys utility will claim that a Power Safe filesystem is corrupt use chkqnx6fs on this type of files
299. nging a bit from a 0 state into a 1 state can be accomplished only by erasing the entire device setting a of the bits to a 1 state Erasing is accomplished by shining an ultraviolet light through the erase window of the device for a fixed period of time typically 10 20 minutes The device is further characterized by having a limited number of erase cycles typically 10e5 10e6 Contrast EEPROM flash and RAM EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory a memory technology that s similar to EPROM but you can erase the entire device electrically instead of via ultraviolet light Contrast flash and RAM event A notification scheme used to inform a thread that a particular condition has occurred Events can be signals or pulses in the general case they can also be unblocking events or interrupt events in the case of kernel timeouts and interrupt service routines An event is delivered by a thread a timer the kernel or an interrupt service routine when appropriate to the requestor of the event extent A contiguous sequence of blocks on a disk Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited fd File Descriptor a client must open a file descriptor to a resource manager via the open function call The file descriptor then serves as a handle for the client to use in subsequent messages FIFO First In First Out a scheduling policy whereby a thread is able to consume CPU at its priority level without bound
300. nother network Using TCP IP and 1pr you can print a file on a remote printer connected to a server on another network You just have to set up your QNX Neutrino network node for remote printing and the remote server for TCP IP and handling printers compatible with 1pr For instance let s suppose you want to print root junk ps a PostScript file on a node on your QNX Neutrino network but the only Postscript printer available win dows_printer is connected to a Windows server with an IP address of 10 2 1 8 First make sure that the Windows server is configured for TCP IP printing and that the printer is compatible with lpr Then as root on your QNX Neutrino node 1 Add a printer description in etc printcap like this rlpt4 rm windows_server lp rp windows_printer sd usr spool output lpd rlpt4 2 Add a new line in etc hosts like this 10 2 1 8 windows_server 3 Create the spool directory mkdir usr spool output lpd rlpt4 4 Start 1pd To print a PostScript file on the printer type lpr Prlpt4 junk ps Remote printing to a TCP IP enabled printer using lpr 218 A TCP IP enabled printer doesn t need an attached computer to provide print services the printer itself provides the services So you use the same basic steps described above with the following minor alterations e Enter the remote printer name and IP address in the etc hosts file on the node you want to print from For example 10
301. nsmitted OK This is the number of broadcast packets transmitted from the NIC Multicast Packets Transmitted OK This is the number of multicast packets transmitted from the NIC Memory Allocation Failures on Transmit Before transmitting data the driver reserves system memory for a buffer to hold the data to be transmitted Once the card is ready the buffer is sent to it When a memory allocation error occurs the system is likely very low on memory Make sure that there s sufficient memory on the system if you continuously get this error consider adding more memory Another thing to check for is memory leaks on the system which may be slowly consuming system memory Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 259 Connecting Hardware Packets Received OK This value states how many packets were successfully received from the network card If a card is having problems receiving data check the cables and the hub connection Problems receiving data might be related to the driver It s possible the driver can be properly set up and able to send data but may not be able to receive Usually when data is received but doesn t get sent the driver is the cause Check the driver s setup to make sure it s initialized correctly Use sloginfo to check the system log for clues Bytes Received OK This is the number of bytes of data received from the network This value increases with the number of packets received Single Collisions o
302. nt to see what the directory contains use 1s You could combine the two commands as follows pwd ls As described in Pipes p 63 you can also use pipes to connect commands on the command line Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Shell Aliases You can define an alias in the shell to create new commands or to specify your favorite options For example the F option to the 1s command displays certain characters at the end of the names to indicate that the file is executable a link a directory and so on If you always want 1s to use this option create an alias alias ls ls F If you ever want to invoke the generic 1s command specify the path to the executable or put a backslash 1 in front of the command e g 1s Aliases are expanded in place so you can t put an argument into the middle of the expanded form if you want to do that use a shell function instead For example if you want a version of the cd command that tells you where you end up in type something like the following in ksh function my_cd cd 1 pwd For more information see Functions in the entry for ksh in the Utilities Reference For information on adding an alias or shell function to your profile so that it s always in effect see ksh s startup file p 119 in Configuring Your Environment Substitutions The shell lets you use a shorthand notation to include the values of certain things in the command line The
303. ntaining the standard and daylight time zone names Whenever you call ctime ctime_r localtime or mktime the library sets tzname as if you had called tzset The same is true if you use the Z directive when you call strftime For more information about these functions and variables see the QNX Neutrino C Library Reference Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 129 Configuring Your Environment Terminal types You need to set the TERMenvironment variable to indicate to your console or pterm what type of terminal you re using The usr lib terminfo directory contains directories that contain terminal database information You can use the utilities tic and infocmp to change the mappings in the database For example you could run infocmp on usr lib terminfo q qansi m and this would generate the source for this database You could then modify the source and then run the tic utility on that source to compile the source back in to a reconcilable database The etc termcap file is provided for compatibility with programs that use the older single file database model as opposed to the newer library database model For more information see Strang John Linda Mui and Tim O Reilly 1988 termcap amp terminfo Sebastopol CA O Reilly and Associates ISBN 0937175226 130 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Here are some common problems you might encount
304. ntensity 50 InkType 4 Color CMYK NonPrintable 500 Left 500 Top 500 Right 500 Bottom gt o cos if PNPID HEWLETT PACKARDHP_850DDE PNPSTR MFG HEWLETT PACKARD MDL HP 8500 CLS PRINTER CMD POSTSCRIPT Supported PaperSize 8500 11000 Letter 8500 14000 Legal 7250 10500 Exec 11000 17000 B 8262 11692 A4 5846 8262 A5 7000 9875 BS 11692 16524 A3 e a a ee ee gt if PNPID HEWLETT PACKARDHP_25A854 PNPSTR MFG HEWLETT PACKARD MDL HP 2500C CLS PRINTER CMD PCL MLC PML POSTSCRIPT Supported PaperSize 8500 11000 Letter 8500 14000 Legal 7250 10500 Exec 11000 17000 B 8262 11692 A4 5846 8262 A5 7000 9875 BS 11692 16524 A3 Oe ee PNPCMD POSTSCRIPT The following macros are expanded for each filter command line d Device m PnP manufacture model id Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Configuration files for spooler n Printer name s Spooldir name A real FileVersion 2 x x x x is the IP address of the printer prt0 is the port used on the printer in this case port zero Filter ps d ncftpput V E x x x x prtO Filter phs ps phs to ps Supported Resolution 300 300 600 600 1200 1200 Supported PaperSize 8500 11000 Letter 8500 14000 Legal Supported Orientation 0 5 Portrait 1 Landscape Supported Intensity 0 Min 100 Max S
305. ntents MU O GO dd 309 QNX Neutrino security in general ooooocccnnocnnnnccnnnncnnnnncnnnnccnnnncnnnnncnonnrnnnnnrnnoncnnnnnoss 310 QNX Neutrino specific security ISSUES oocccooccccnconnoncnnnoncnnnncononnnnnononnnnnannnnnnrnnnannnnnnrinonaros 311 ESTE 311 DOS DUS ion a A A A A a honest 311 A cos conte deracoteaadet wuct vases coed lente agente E sates debseees Seedobadat anata tekst 311 A E EE E TS 312 IPSEC ER EE TCE R A A 312 Setting Up aA reward e de dla do entes aeaaea eaaa hi 313 Chapter 17 Fine Tuning Your System occcccccccccnccnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnonnnnnnnnnrnnnrnnnrnnnrrnnnrnnnrnnrnnannnans 315 Getting the system s status A a ias 316 Improving performance A A E 317 Fastor boor UTES 55 ccsdacutaaastt sag Sinan act daghisas ouaansnaate sbi sad a i eea irre as eat edea eaa e sie 319 Filesystems and block I O devb drivers occoocccocccocnoncnoncnoncnoncnnonnnoninonncnononanonannnnnnnninon 320 Performance and rObDUS NESS essesi aea e oa E a a O a 321 Metadata updates iii ci a a aa EE E Aa aE NE aa eE 321 Trust la A E AA 322 CONSUME A AT EEE AETS 324 Fine tuning USB storage devices occccoccconcconcnonnonononinoncnnncnnonnnnnnnnnnonnnonnnennnnnannnnnnnn 328 How small Can you get ai a a e a aa E Sees 329 Chapter 18 Understanding System Limits ooooccocccncccncnnnnnnonanonnnnonnnannnnnnnancnnnrnnnnnnnnrnnnrnnnranannnnns 331 SAE EA E E E A 332 Filesystem MitS A eA i 333 Querying filesystem IMS ci cevescce
306. nthe etc hosts 1pd file on nodel The etc printcap file on node2 might be as follows ripeti y rm nodel rp lptl lp This file specifies the remote host with the printer named 1pt1 to be nodel The local printer name r1pt1 is used by local clients and could be the same as the remote name 1pt1 Make sure there s an entry for nodel in etc hosts Multiple printers Now let s add another printer to node1 this time connected to dev par2 et dev par1 hota EN TCP IP H node1 node2 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 215 Printing You should define multiple printers carefully because the default capabilities aren t suitable for all printers For example use the sd field to specify a unique spool directory for each printer The etc printcap file on node1 now looks like this iptl 1p dev parl sd usr spool output lptl IprE2sN lp dev par2 sd usr spool output 1pt2 This specifies the following these printers e 1pt1 connected to dev par1 and using usr spool output 1pt1 for spooling e 1pt2 connected to dev par2 and using usr spool output 1pt2 for spooling Make sure there s an entry for node2 in the etc hosts 1pd file on nodel To refer to these two printers remotely from node2 create a etc printcap file on node2 that looks like this lpt1
307. nx6 so which is the default under the QNX Neutrino RTOS and the QNX 4 filesystem which is compatible with the older QNX 4 OS For more information see the Working with Filesystems p 145 chapter in this guide D Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 77 Working with Files Types of files QNX Neutrino supports various types of files The 1s command uses the character shown in parentheses below to identify the file type Regular A file that contains user data such as C code HTML and data For example home fred myprog c Directory d Conceptually a directory is something that contains files and other directories For example home fred A directory is implemented as a disk file that stores a list of the names of files and other directories Each filename is associated with an inode information node that defines the file s existence For more information see QNX 4 filesystem p 151 in Working with Filesystems Symbolic link 1 An additional name for a file or directory For example usr bin more is a symbolic link to usr bin less For more information see Symbolic links p 154 in Working with Filesystems Named special n A shared memory region such as dev shmem Pg101e0001 Character special files c Entries that represent a character device For example dev serl represents a serial port FIFO special files p Persistent named pipes through wh
308. o change as the IPsec protocols develop For more information see IPSec in the QNX Neutrino C Library Reference Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Setting up a firewall Setting up a firewall Just as a building or vehicle uses specially constructed walls to prevent the spread of fire so computer systems use firewalls to prevent or limit access to certain applications or systems and to protect systems from malicious attacks To create a firewall under QNX Neutrino you can use a combination of e P Filtering to control access to your machine e Network Address Translation NAT known to Linux users as IP masquerading to connect several computers through a common external interface For more information see pf faq at ftp ftp3 usa openbsd org pub OpenBSD doc in the OpenBSD documentation Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 313 Chapter 17 Fine Tuning Your System This chapter describes how you can improve your system s performance Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 315 Fine Tuning Your System Getting the system s status The QNX Neutrino RTOS includes various utilities that you can use to fine tune your system hogs List the processes that are hogging the CPU pidin Process ID INfo Display system statistics ps Report process status top Display system usage Unix For details about these utilities see the Utilities Reference For more detai
309. o on e Changes the primary prompt to include the current working directory the default if you aren t root is You can also change the secondary prompt by setting PS2 Note that you should use single quotes instead of double quotes around the string If you specify export PS1 S pwd the pwd command is evaluated right away because double quotes permit command substitution when you change directories the prompt doesn t change Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 355 Examples Configuration files for spooler Using lpr Using NCFTP 356 This section includes the configuration files to use for remote printing using 1pr SAMBA and NCFTP PNPCMD POSTSCRIPT e e e e e The following macros are expanded for each filter command line d Device m PnP manufacture model id n Printer name s Spooldir name A real A A A A a a ee a a FileVersion 2 printer_name is the name that you specified in the etc printcap file Filter ps d lpr Pprinter_name Filter phs ps phs to ps Supported Resolution 300 300 600 600 1200 1200 Supported PaperSize 8500 11000 Letter 8500 14000 Legal Supported Orientation 0 Portrait 1 Landscape Supported Intensity 0 Min 100 Max Supported InkType B amp W 3 Color CMY 4 Color CMYK Resolution 600 600 PaperSize 8500 11000 Letter Orientation O Portrait I
310. o this Filter phs ps phs to ps 4 Add a line to tell the filter to send all PostScript files to the remote printer r1pt2 Filter ps d lpr Pript2 What you ve done is change the destination from that given by spooler to ps so that after the phs file has been converted to a ps type by phs to ps It goes 222 Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Printing with spooler to the ps filter Then the ps filter line you added sends PostScript files to 1pr forcing output to the remote printer just as you did in Remote printing to a TCP IP enabled printer using lpr p 218 You might be wondering what happened to the destination passed by spooler Sd Well that is discarded because lpr unlike phs to ps doesn t return the job to the filter but completes it itself 5 Finally start a new instance of spooler telling it the pathname of your new configuration file in this case etc printers test cfg and the name of the printer you want to use in this case r1pt2 like this spooler d dev null c etc printers test cfg n rlpt2 amp The n option specifies the name of the printer 6 If you want to start spooler like this whenever you boot your machine add the above command to your etc rc d rc local file Now you should be able to print your PostScript file on your remote TCP IP enabled printer e Remote printing from the command line Copy the print file to the directory that spooler uses cp root
311. oUS 20 1 A AAA A RO Disabled MulEBCASE ebria brea Enabled Total Packets Txa OK conc mmm os 1585370 Total Packets Txd Bad socrommmsares 9 Total Packets Fad OF 2 0 0 00 11492102 Tobal EX ECOS 2 122 2 tian teas 0 Total Bytes Ed corras 102023380 Total Bytes RAG ici 2252658488 TR Collision Errors eote tane ienen 39598 Tx Collisions Errors aborted 0 Carrier Sense Lost on Tx 0 FIFO Underruns During TX 64 0 e 49508 Peete eee ea ee ee ee 99673 Out of Window Collisions 0 FIFO Overruns During EX i ace aes 0 Alignment SIIOXA c 0 GRE GELOS Do e orion O Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 201 Chapter 12 Printing This chapter describes how to set up printers on a QNX Neutrino system The simplest way to print a text file is to send it directly to a printer For example if your printer is attached to your computer s parallel port you could simply type cat file gt dev par but there are a few problems with this e You don t get another command prompt until the file has been printed unless you add an ampersand s to the end of the command e f the printer is already printing something or it can t handle the type of file you ve sent the output might be garbled and you end up just wasting paper It s better to use spooling When you spool a print job it s placed in a queue until its turn comes up to be printed QNX Neutrino provides two s
312. ocal host use the rs field in the printer s entry in etc printcap Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 209 Printing Network manager If you want to print on a remote printer you need to run the QNX Neutrino network manager io pkt This manager loads shared objects DLLs to provide the protocols and device drivers needed For example to load the TCP IP stack and a device driver suitable for Ethernet adapters compatible with NE 2000 devn ne2000 so start io pkt like this io pkt v4 dne2000 If you re using a TCP IP stack like this you might want to configure your network interface to specify the type and number of your NIC and the IP address and netmask for your TCP IP interface For more information see TCP IP Networking p 187 Printer capabilities etc printcap Before you can print anything the nodes must know something about the specific printer being used as a minimum where the printer is located A description of the printer is kept in a file named etc printcap on each node The etc printcap database contains one or more entries per printer O This file isn t present when you first install the QNX Neutrino RTOS you have to create one to suit your printing needs This section describes the basic fields for information on the others see etc printcap in the Utilities Reference A typical setup Here s a basic etc printcap file that you can modify lptl tpptr printe
313. ocks on other disks inodes is a collection of inode entries The first entry is reserved and used as a signature info area The first bytes of the inode file are set to TamTHE inodeFILE longfilenames An optional file that stores information about files whose names are longer than 48 characters see QNX 4 filesystem p 151 in Working with Filesystems Represents an OS image file that will be loaded into memory during the standard boot process This file will be of zero length if no boot file exists altboot Represents an OS image file that will be loaded into memory during the a ternate Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 291 Backing Up and Recovering Data Description boot process This file will be of zero length if no alternate boot file exists Directories A directory is simply a file that has special meaning to the filesystem the file contains a collection of directory entries Offset gt 0 i_fname 16 One physical 16 i_size block 20 first_xtnt ofa directory 28 i_xblk 32 i_ftime s 36 i_mtime 1 40 i_atime 44 i_ctime 2 48 i_num_xtnts 3 50 i_mode 52 i_uid 54 i_gid 5 56 i_nlink 58 i_zero 4 6 62 i_type 7 63 i_status Figure 10 A directory entry The bits in the _status field indicate the type of the directory entry ONX4FS FILE LINK ONX4FS FILE USED Entry type Normal used directory
314. odes Command mode The keyboard is mapped to a set of command shortcuts used to navigate and edit text vi commands consist of one or more letters but ex commands start with a colon Insert mode Lets you type normally To switch to command mode press Esc to switch to input mode press one of e tori to insert at the beginning of the current line or before the cursor e Aor ato append text at the end of the current line or after the cursor e oro to open a new line above or below the cursor The two modes can make vi very confusing for a new user by default vi doesn t tell you which mode you re in If you type this when you re in command mode set showmode the editor indicates the current mode in the lower right corner of the display If you always want this option set you can add this command without the colon to the profile for vi HOME exrc Here are some of the vi commands that you ll use a lot Leave vi without saving any changes E 110 Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Supported editors Press To Move to the beginning of the next word Move to the end of the current or next word depending on the cursor position Move to the beginning of the current or previous word depending on the cursor position Yank from the cursor to the end of the current word Delete from the cursor to the end of the current word Del
315. on t operate on hidden files unless you explicitly say to image In the context of embedded QNX Neutrino systems an image can mean either a structure that contains files i e an OS image or a structure that can be used in a read only read write or read write reclaim filesystem i e a flash filesystem image inode Information node a storage table that holds information about files other than the files names In order to support links for each file the filename is separated from the other information that describes a file interrupt An event usually caused by hardware that interrupts whatever the processor was doing and asks it do something else The hardware will generate an interrupt whenever it has reached some state where software intervention is required interrupt latency The amount of elapsed time between the generation of a hardware interrupt and the first instruction executed by the relevant interrupt service routine Also designated as T Contrast scheduling latency IPC Interprocess Communication the ability for two processes or threads to communicate QNX Neutrino offers several forms of IPC most notably native messaging synchronous client server relationship POSIX message queues and pipes asynchronous as well as signals IPL Initial Program Loader the software component that either takes control at the processor s reset vector e g location OxFFFFFFFO on the x86 or is a BIO
316. onnected computer and the particular version has a vulnerability whereby an attacker can send a badly formed query that causes bind to open up a shell that runs as root on a different port of the machine An attacker can use this weakness to connect to and effectively own the computer This type of exploit is often called a buffer overrun or stack smashing attack and is described in the article Smashing the Stack for Fun and Profit by Aleph One see http www insecure org stf smashstack txt The simple solution to these problems is to make sure that you know which servers are listening on which ports and that you re running the latest versions of the software If a machine is publicly connected don t run any more services than necessary on it 308 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited General OS security Local exploits Local exploits are much more common and difficult to prevent Having a local account implies a certain amount of trust and it isn t always easy to imagine just how that trust could be violated Most local exploits involve some sort of elevation of privilege such as turning a normal user into the superuser root Many local attacks take advantage of a misconfigured system e g file permissions that are set incorrectly or a buffer overrun on a binary that s set to run as root known as a setuid binary In the embedded world where QNX Neutrino is often used local users aren t as much of an ssue an
317. oot directory 290 creating 70 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited QNX Neutrino RTOS directories continued current 58 66 70 81 153 292 355 changing 70 determining 58 70 PATH 66 prompt including in 355 defined 78 292 entries 292 type 292 group ownership 97 home 34 35 37 41 42 59 117 links to 70 153 154 155 circular preventing 155 listing contents of 70 moving 70 network 177 ownership 97 parent 81 153 292 permissions 97 platform specific 86 print spooling 208 220 QNX 4 signature 292 recovering lost 298 removing 70 removing without returning used blocks 297 renaming 70 structure 292 substitution 59 unions 83 dirty filesystems 146 discovery 196 disk drivers 233 240 diskboot 233 diskcomp DOS commana 73 diskpart DOS command 71 disks 70 85 146 151 157 286 287 289 290 291 296 297 298 299 300 backing up 286 bitmap 85 291 block allocation verified by chkfsys 297 corruption avoiding 85 157 determining if damaged 296 extents 151 files extending 151 free space determining 70 146 identifying 287 initializing 289 loader blocks 289 partitions 151 289 patching 298 raw browsing 298 recovery procedures 299 regular maintenance procedure 299 restoring bad blocks in middle of file 300 root blocks 290 structure 289 Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol See DVMRP dll file extension 104 dll directory 93 DLLs Dynamic Linked Libraries 93 104 dmesg Linux
318. or SCSI RAID available for QNX Neutrino search for them on the Internet LS 120 LS 120 is a SuperDisk drive that greatly improves head alignment enabling a much greater storage capacity 120 MB than conventional 3 5 inch disks QNX Neutrino treats an LS 120 drive like an EIDE drive Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 237 Connecting Hardware ORB Zip and Jaz disks An ORB drive is a fast large capacity removable storage disk drive that uses 3 5 storage media and attaches to the EIDE ATA chain Ensure that the hardware is set up correctly and that the BIOS detects the hardware properly An ORB drive is simple to set up and appears in the dev directory as a hard disk For example e The hard disk as a primary master appears as dev hd0 e The ORB drive set up as a primary slave appears as dev hdl To mount an ORB drive mount dev hdl fs orb_drive You don t need to remount the drive when you change disks Zip and Jaz disks are large capacity removable storage disks used for backing up hard disks and for transporting large files These disks attach to the EIDE ATA chain Before you attempt to use them ensure that the hardware is set up correctly and that the BIOS detects the hardware properly These drives are simple to set up and they appear in the dev directory as a hard disk For example e The hard disk set up as a primary master appears as dev hd0 e The Zip disk set up as a primary slave
319. or do you want to use just the keyboard e Do you need to type international characters accents and diacritical marks or just ASCII e How do you like to invoke commands In some editors you type a single character in others you press a keychord and in yet others you click a button or select an item from a menu One important distinction between the editors is whether they re text based or graphical Text based editors are more flexible because you can use them in text mode in a console window remotely via telnet or qtalk and so on graphical editors tend to be friendlier and easier to use but can run only in a graphical window If you start a graphical editor from the command line you ll probably want to start it as a background process by adding an ampersand amp to the command line so that you can continue to use the current window while the editor is still open If you re using a text based editor start it as a foreground process by omitting the ampersand Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 109 Using Editors Supported editors The QNX Neutrino RTOS includes and supports these editors vi or elvis A powerful but somewhat cryptic text based editor that you ll find in most if not all UNIX style operating systems It s actually the Visual Interface to an editor called ex On QNX Neutrino vi is a symbolic link to elvis To start vi type vi filename The vi editor has two m
320. otal size of the final data file it can be advantageous to pregrow it to this size rather than allow it to be automatically extended Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 323 Fine Tuning Your System Configuration 324 piecemeal by the filesystem as it is written to This lets the filesystem see a single explicit request for allocation instead of many implicit incremental updates some filesystems may be able to exploit this and allocate the file in a more optimal contiguous fashion It also reduces the number of metadata updates needed during the write phase and so improves the data write performance by not disrupting sequential streaming The POSIX function to extend a file is ftruncate the standard requires this function to zero fill the new data space meaning that the file is effectively written twice so this technique is suitable when you can prepare the file during an initial phase where performance isn t critical There s also a non POSIX devcti to extend a file without zero filling it which provides the above benefits without the cost of erasing the contents the DCMD_FSYS_PREGROW_FILE which is defined in lt sys dcmd_b1k h gt takes as its argument the file size as a of 64_t For example int Ed off64_t sz fd open SZ devctl fd DCMD_FSYS_PREGROW_FILE amp sz sizeof sz NULL You can control the balance between performance and robustness on either a global or per f
321. other UNIX like operating systems QNX Neutrino pathname components are separated by a forward slash This is unlike Microsoft operating systems which use a backslash 1 the equivalent of dir in MS DOS For more information see Basic commands p 70 in Using the Command Line or 1s in the Utilities Reference e To explore the files and directories on your system use the 1s utility This is Absolute and relative pathnames There are two types of pathname Absolute paths Pathnames that begin with a slash specify locations that are relative to the root of the pathname space For example home fred my_apps favs Relative paths Pathnames that don t begin with specify locations relative to your current working directory For example if your current directory is home fred a relative path of my_apps favs is the same as an absolute path of home fred my_apps favs Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Filenames and pathnames You can t tell by looking at a pathname whether the path points to a regular file a directory a symbolic link or some other file type To determine the type of a file use fileor ls 1d The one exception to this is a pathname that ends with which always indicates a directory If you use the F option to 1s the utility displays a slash at the end of a directory name Dot and dot dot directories Most directories contain two special links dot and dot
322. ou can determine the maximum filename length that a filesystem supports by using the getconf utility getconf _PC_NAME_MAX root_dir where root_diris the root directory of the filesystem You can t use the characters 0x00 0x1F 0x7F and OxFF in filenames In addition 0x2F is the pathname separator and can t be in a filename component You can use spaces but you have to quote them on the command line you also have to quote any wildcard characters that the shell supports For more information see Quoting special characters p 63 in Using the Command Line Links and inodes File data is stored distinctly from its name and can be referenced by more than one name Each filename called a ink points to the actual data of the file itself There are actually two kinds of links hard links which we refer to simply as links and symbolic links which are described in the next section In order to support links for each file the filename is separated from the other information that describes a file The non filename information is kept in a storage table called an inode for information node If a file has only one link i e one filename the inode information i e the non filename information is stored in the directory entry for the file If the file has 152 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited QNX 4 filesystem more than one link the inode is stored as a record in a special file nam
323. ow Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 121 Configuring Your Environment Configuration strings In addition to environment variables QNX Neutrino uses configuration strings These are system variables that are like environment variables but are more dynamic When you set an environment variable the new value affects only the current instance of the shell and any of its children that you create after setting the variable when you set a configuration string its new value is immediately available to the entire system QNX Neutrino also supports configurable limits which are variables that store information about the system For more information see the Understanding System Limits p 331 chapter You can use the POSIX get conf utility to get the value of a configurable limit or a configuration string QNX Neutrino also defines a non POSIX setconf utility that you can use to set configuration strings if you re logged in as root In a program call confstr to get the value of a configuration string The names of configuration strings start with _CS_ and are in uppercase although getconf and setconf let you use any case omit the leading underscore or the entire prefix provided that the rest of the name is unambiguous The configuration strings include _CS_ARCHITECTURE The name of the instruction set architecture _CS_DOMAIN The domain of this node in the network _CS_ HOSTNAME The name of
324. permission to the user i e the owner of the file and the rest of the user s group and read permission to other users If you want to remove read and write permissions from the other users add this command to your profile umask 006 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 99 Working with Files If you re the system administrator and you want this change to apply to everyone change the umask setting in etc profile For more information about profiles see Configuring Your Environment p 115 Access Control Lists ACLs Some filesystems such as the Power Safe fs qnx6 so filesystem extend file permissions with Access Control Lists which are based on the withdrawn IEEE POSIX 1003 1e and 1003 2c draft standards With the traditional file permissions as set with chmod if you want someone to have special access to a file you have few choices e adding that person to the owning group e creating a supplemental group that includes that person and the owner of the file e loosening the permissions for others Keeping track of the users in each group and can become complicated and allowing others additional permissions can make your system less secure ACLs extend file permissions giving you finer control over who has access to what In an ACL the permissions are divided into these classes e owner class e group class consisting of named users the owning group and named groups e others or world
325. ppear when you use any of the cyclical console switching keychords The exception is console 1 where the system usually restarts Login For more information about the console see devc con and devc con hid in the Utilities Reference and Console devices in the Character I O chapter of the System Architecture guide Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Shell Shell After the character device driver processes what you type the command line is passed to a command interpreter or shell The default shell is sh which under QNX Neutrino is a link to the Korn shell ksh There are other shells available including small ones that are suitable for situations with limited memory esh Embedded shell fesh Fat embedded shell similar to esh but with additional builtin commands uesh Micro embedded shell with a subset of esh s functionality Here s a brief comparison of the features that the shells support Feature Interactive mode CCOO CO CS CI CI Filename expansion Parameter substitution Compound commands Command or arithmetic substitution Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 55 Using the Command Line 56 Feature Command and filename completion interactive command line Job control The small shells have fewer builtin commands than ksh has For more information about these shells see the Utilities Reference In general terms the shell breaks th
326. prc lprq error messages waiting for printer to become ready offline 224 Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Troubleshooting The daemon couldn t open the printer device This can happen for several reasons e g the printer is offline or out of paper or the paper is jammea The actual reason depends on the meaning of error codes returned by the system device driver some printers can t supply enough information to distinguish when a printer is offline or having trouble especially if connected through a serial line Another possible cause of this message is that some other process such as an output filter has an exclusive open on the device all you can do in this case is kill off the offending program s and restart the printer with 1prc printer is ready and printing The 1prq program checks to see if a daemon process exists for the printer and prints the file status located in the spooling directory If the daemon isn t responding the root user can use lprc to abort the current daemon and start a new one waiting for host to come up This implies that there s a daemon trying to connect to the remote machine named host to send the files in the local queue If the remote machine is up 1pd on the remote machine is probably dead or hung and should be restarted sending to host The files should be in the process of being transferred to the remote host If not root should use lprc to abort and restart the loc
327. prefix it receives messages whenever any client program tries to do an open read write etc on that pathname Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited How QNX Neutrino is unique For more detailed information on the resource manager concept see Resource Managers in System Architecture Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 25 Chapter 2 Logging In Logging Out and Shutting Down QNX Neutrino is a multiuser operating system it lets multiple users log in and use the system simultaneously and it protects them from each other through a system of resource ownership and permissions Depending on the configuration your system boots into text mode and prompts you for your user ID and password Your system might have been configured so that you don t have to log in at Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 27 Logging In Logging Out and Shutting Down 28 root OF NON root The QNX Neutrino RTOS includes at least a user account called root This user can do anything on your system it has what Windows calls administrator s privileges UNIX style operating systems call root the superuser Initially the root account doesn t have a password To protect your system you should e Seta secure password for this account as soon as you ve installed the OS e Create a non root account see Managing User Accounts p 33 to use for your day to day work to help prevent yo
328. printer_name spool O spooler var spool printers printer_name host Es gt T File that needs to Filter be converted v gt dev par File of the correct type Figure 7 Printing with spooler Normally spooler stores a file to be printed in a directory on disk then tells the filter where to get the file If you need to cut down on disk memory you can use the F option of spooler to disable the spooling of print files This option causes the spooler to send sections of a file to be printed directly to a FIFO buffer in piecemeal fashion the filter receives data to be printed from the FIFO and prints that part of the file When the buffer has been emptied spooler loads the next section of the file into the buffer and so on until the whole file has been printed Printing on a USB printer If you ve attached a USB printer to your machine and started the USB stack and devu prn as described in USB devices in the Connecting Hardware chapter you need to start an instance of spooler to manage it for example in etc rc d rc local QNX Neutrino doesn t currently enumerate USB printers To set up your USB printer do the following 1 Create usr spool output device where device is the device that devu prn created for the printer e g usbparo 2 Start spooler specifying the printer s device For example spooler d dev usbpar0
329. pt Suppose we have a script called ksh_script that looks like this bin sh echo 0 for arg in 4 do echo Sarg done If you invoke it as ksh_script one two three the loader invokes it as bin sh ksh_script one two three and then ksh removes itself from the argument list The output looks like this Kksh_script one two three Arguments to a gawk script Next let s consider the gawk version gawk_script which looks like this usr bin gawk f BEGIN for i 0 i lt ARGC i print ARGV i The f argument is important it tells gawk to read its script from the given file Without f this script wouldn t work as expected If you run this script as gawk_script one two three the loader invokes it as usr bin gawk f gawk_script one two three and then gawk changes its full path to gawk The output looks like this gawk one two three Arguments to a per1 script The perl version of the script perl_script looks like this usr bin perl for i 0 i lt S ARGV i print SARGV i n If you invoke it as perl_script one two three the loader invokes it as usr bin perl perl_script one two three and then perl removes itself and the name of the script from the argument list The output looks like this one two three 138 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Example of a Korn shell script Example of a Korn shell script Let s look at
330. pty in the Utilities Reference dev random Read from this device to obtain random data see random in the Utilities Reference dev sem A pathname space where entries for named semaphores appear dev sern Serial ports See stt y for configuration and devc ser for driver details in the Utilities Reference Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Where everything is stored dev shmem Contains files representing shared memory regions on the system also sometimes used for generic memory mapped files For more information see the description of the RAM filesystem p 149 in Working with Filesystems dev slog A device managed by slogger used to read or write system log messages Try sloginfo dev slog See slogger and sloginfo in the Utilities Reference for more information dev socket This directory is owned and managed through the TCP IP stack which is included in io pkt This directory contains pathnames through which applications interact with the stack For more information see the TCP IP Networking p 187 chapter in this guide dev text This file is managed by procnto Text written to this device is output through debug output routines encoded in the startup code for your system The actual result therefore varies from board to board On a standard PC using startup BIOS the default is to write to the PC console For more information see startup in the Utilities Reference de
331. r Practical Extraction and Report Language In general a shell script is most useful and powerful when working with the execution of programs or modifying files in the context of the filesystem whereas sed gawk 134 Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Available shells and per1 are primarily for working with the contents of files For more information see e the entries for gawk and sed in the Utilities Reference e Robbins Arnold and Dale Dougherty 1997 sed amp awk 2nd Edition Sebastopol CA O Reilly amp Associates ISBN 1 56592 225 5 e Schwartz Randal L and Tom Phoenix 2001 Learning Perl Sebastopol CA O Reilly amp Associates ISBN 0 59600 132 0 Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 135 Writing Shell Scripts Running a shell script You can execute a shell script in these ways e Invoke another shell with the name of your shell script as an argument sh myscript e Load your script as a dot file into the current shell myscript e Use chmod to make the shell script executable and then invoke it like this chmod 744 myscript Myscript In this instance your shell automatically invokes a new shell to execute the shell script 136 Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited The first line The first line The first line of a script can identify the interpreter to use The first line of many if not most shell scripts is in this form interp
332. r home Customizing your home Your home directory is where you can store all the files and directories that are relevant to you It s a good place to store your own binaries and scripts Your entry in the password database specifies your home directory see etc passwd p 36 in Managing User Accounts and the HOME environment variable stores this directory s name Your home directory is also where you store information that configures your environment when you log in By default applications pick this spot to install configuration files Configuration files are generally preceded by a period and run either when you log in such as profile or when you start an application Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 117 Configuring Your Environment Configuring your shell etc profile SHOME profile 118 There are many files that configure your environment this section describes some of the more useful ones etc profile p 118 SHOME profile p 118 ksh s startup file p 119 The login shell executes etc profile if this file exists and is readable This file does the shell setup that applies to all users so you ll be interested in it if you re the system administrator you need to log in as root in order to edit it The etc profile file sets the HOSTNAME PROCESSOR and SYSNAME environment variables if they aren t already set adds the appropriate directories to the PATH environment var
333. r in Docs department lp dev par1 sd usr spool output 1lpt1 lf usr adm lpd errs smx 0 Shi Each entry in the etc printcap file describes a printer Comments start with number sign An entry consists of a number of fields delimited by colons In the example above each field is on a separate line but you can string the fields together on one line as long as they each start and end with a colon Here s what each line means lpt1 tpptr printer in Docs department 210 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Printing with lpr The known names for the printer separated by bar characters The last name is the only name that can include spaces it s a long name that fully identifies the printer Entries may continue onto multiple lines by giving a backslash as the last character of a line Empty fields may be included for readability lp dev par1 The name of the device to open for output the default is dev 1p sd usr spool output 1pt1 The spooling directory the default is usr spool output ipd Each printer should have a separate spooling directory if it doesn t jobs are printed on different printers depending on which printer daemon starts first By convention the name of the spooling directory has the same name as its associated printer Lal Make sure you create the named spooling directory before you print 1 usr adm lpd errs A file to take pr
334. r of clients If dirty is permanently displayed even after a sync then either snapshots have been disabled due to a potentially fatal error or the disk hardware doesn t support full data synchronization track cache flush Enabling snapshots doesn t in itself cause a snapshot to be made you should do this with an explicit fsync if required It s often a good idea to fsync both before disabling and after enabling snapshots the chattr utility does this Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited DOS filesystem DOS filesystem The DOS filesystem provides transparent access to DOS disks so you can treat DOS filesystems as though they were QNX Neutrino POSIX filesystems This transparency lets processes operate on DOS files without any special knowledge or work on their part The fs dos so shared object see the Utilities Reference lets you mount DOS filesystems FAT12 FAT16 and FAT32 under QNX Neutrino This shared object is automatically loaded by the devb drivers when mounting a DOS FAT filesystem If you want to read and write to a DOS floppy disk mount it by typing something like this mount t dos dev fd0 fd For information about valid characters for filenames in a DOS filesystem see the Microsoft Developer Network at http msdn microsoft com FAT 8 3 names are the most limited they re uppercase letters digits and _ VFAT names relax it a bit and add the lowercase letters and
335. re Systems Limited Sample buildfile Sample buildfile Here s a sample buildfile for a PC based target In a real buildfile you can t use a backslash 1 to break a long line into shorter pieces but we ve done that here just to make the buildfile easier to read The build file for QNX Neutrino booting on a PC virtual x86 bios compress boot startup bios s64k PATH proc boot bin usr bin LD_LIBRARY_PATH proc boot lib usr lib lib dll procnto smp script startup script display_msg display_msg QNX Neutrino inside display_msg procmgr_symlink proc boot libc so 3 usr lib ldqnx so 2 display_msg gt Starting PCI Services seedres pci bios waitfor dev pci display_msg gt Starting Console Manager devc con n8 waitfor dev conl reopen dev conl display_msg gt Starting EIDE Driver devb eide blk cache 64M auto partition vnode 2000 ncache 2000 noatime commit low dos exe all waitfor dev hd0 waitfor dev hdl Mount one ONX 4 filesystem as and another as home Also mount a DOS partition and the CD drive mount dev hd0t79 mount dev hd1t78 home mount tdos dev hd1t12 fs hdl dos mount tcd dev cd0 fs cdO display_msg gt Starting etc system sysinit ksh c etc system sysinit libc so 2 libc so libcam so io blk so cam disk so fs qnx4 so fs dos so fs ext2 so cam cdrom so fs cd so data c seedres
336. real files are present on some media the package filesystem presents a virtual view of selected files to the client 9 QNX Neutrino doesn t start the package filesystem by default pathname prefix See mountpoint pathname space mapping The process whereby the Process Manager maintains an association between resource managers and entries in the pathname space persistent When applied to storage media the ability for the media to retain information across a power cycle For example a hard disk is a persistent storage media whereas a ramdisk is not because the data is lost when power is lost PIC Programmable Interrupt Controller a hardware component that handles IRQs PID Process ID Also often pid e g as an argument in a function call See also process ID POSIX An IEEE ISO standard The term is an acronym of sorts for Portable Operating System Interface the X alludes to UNIX on which the interface is based preemption Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 371 Glossary 372 The act of suspending the execution of one thread and starting or resuming another The suspended thread is said to have been preempted by the new thread Whenever a lower priority thread is actively consuming the CPU and a higher priority thread becomes READY the lower priority thread is immediately preempted by the higher priority thread prefix tree The internal representation used by
337. realtime threads with the priorities required to ensure the system response that you need 318 Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Faster boot times Faster boot times Here are a few tips to help you speed up booting e If your system s setup is static you can set up its device drivers yourself instead of running the enumerators e Remove as much as you can from the system initialization files and from the OS image if necessary Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 319 Fine Tuning Your System Filesystems and block I O devb drivers Here are the basic steps to improving the performance of your filesystems and block 1 0 devb drivers 1 Optimize disk hardware and driver options This is most important on non x86 targets and systems without hard drives e g Microdrive Compact Flash Not using the fastest available DMA mode or degrading to PIO can easily affect the speed by a factor of ten For more information see Connecting Hardware p 229 2 Optimize the filesystem options e Determine how you want to balance system robustness and performance see below e Concentrate on the cache and vnode filesystem independent inodes options the other sizes scale themselves to these e The default cache is 15 of the total system RAM to a maximum of 512 MB This is too large for floppy drivers devb fdc and RAM drivers devb ram but might be too small for intensive use e Set the com
338. removing the name from the parent directory and marking the inode as available These operations must be performed in this order to prevent corruption should there be a power failure between the two writes note that for creation the inode should be allocated before the name as a crash would result in an allocated inode that isn t referenced by any name an orphaned resource that a filesystem s check procedure can later reclaim If the operations were performed the other way around and a power failure occurred the result would be a name that refers to a stale or invalid inode which is undetectable as an error A similar argument applies in reverse for file deletion For traditional filesystems the only way of ordering these writes is to perform the first one or more generally all but the last one of a multiple block sequence synchronously i e immediately and waiting for I O to complete before continuing A synchronous write is very expensive because it involves a disk head seek interrupts any active sequential disk streaming and blocks the thread until the write has completed potentially milliseconds of dead time Throughput Another key point is the performance of sequential access to a file or raw throughput where a large amount of data is written to a file or an entire file is read The filesystem itself can detect this type of sequential access and attempt to optimize the use of the disk by doing e read ahead o
339. reter arg For example a Korn shell script likely starts with bin sh The line starts with a which indicates a comment so the line is ignored by the shell processing this script The initial two characters aren t important to the shell but the loader code in procnto recognizes them as an instruction to load the specified interpreter and pass it the path to the interpreter the optional argument specified on the first line of the script the path to the script A w N e any arguments you pass to the script For example if your script is called my_script and you invoke it as my_script my_argl my_arg2 then procnto loads interpreter arg my_script my_argl my_arg2 e The interpreter can t be another script e The kernel ignores any setuid and getuid permissions on the script the child still has the same user and group IDs as its parent For more information see Setuid and setgid p 98 in the Working with Files chapter of this guide Some interpreters adjust the list of arguments e ksh removes itself from the arguments e gawk changes its own path to be simply gawk e perl removes itself and the name of the script from the arguments and puts the name of the script into the 0 variable For example let s look at some simple scripts that echo their own arguments Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 137 Writing Shell Scripts Arguments to a ksh scri
340. reversed to represent the end of the branching structure Inside the case we find find name ch xargs grep 1 less This line does the bulk of the work and breaks down into these pieces e find name ch e xargs grep 1 e less Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 139 Writing Shell Scripts 140 which are joined by the or pipe character A pipe is one of the most powerful things in the shell it takes the output of the program on the left and makes it the input of the program to its right The pipe lets you build complex operations from simpler building blocks For more information see Redirecting input and output p 62 in Using the Command Line The first piece find name ch uses another powerful and commonly used command Most filesystems are recursive through a hierarchy of directories and find is a utility that descends through the hierarchy of directories recursively In this case it searches for files that end in either c or h that is C source or header files and prints out their names The filename wildcards are wrapped in single quotes because they re special characters to the shell Without the quotes the shell would expand the wildcards in the current directory but we want find to evaluate them so we prevent the shell from evaluating them by quoting them For more information see Quoting special characters p 63 in Using the Command Line The n
341. rinter down for maintenance Note that users can still enter jobs in a spool queue while a printer is stopped Place selected jobs at the top of a printer queue You can use this command to promote high priority jobs 1pr places jobs in the queue in the order they were received Each node you wish to print from must have a spooling directory to hold the files to be printed By default the pathname for this directory is usr spool output 1pd you can change the pathname of the spooling directory in the etc printcap file If this directory doesn t exist you must create it on all nodes 9 The 1pd daemon doesn t work without a spooling directory and it doesn t tell you why That s why it s a good idea to run the system logger see syslogd in the Utilities Reference when you re trying to debug printing problems then you can check for error messages in var log syslog Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Access control Printing with lpr The printer system maintains protected spooling areas so that users can t circumvent printer accounting or remove files other than their own Only the print manager daemon can spool print jobs The spooling area is writable only by a daemon user and daemon group The lpr program runs with the user ID root and the group ID daemon Running as root lets 1pr read any file required Accessibility is verified by calling access see the QNX Neutrino C Library Reference The group ID
342. rmation up What happens when you log in You typically start a session on the computer by logging in the configuration of your account determines what happens then When you log in the system creates a user session led by a process that runs under your user ID and default group ID as determined from your account entry in etc passwd The user ID and group ID determine the permission the process has to access files and system resources In addition if the process creates any files and directories they belong to that user and group Each new process that you start inherits your user ID and group ID from its parent process For more information about file permissions see File ownership and permissions p 97 in Working with Files For more information on characteristics that programs inherit from their parent programs see spawn in the QNX Neutrino C Library Reference For more information on sessions and process groups see IEEE Std 1003 1 2001 0 Standard for Information Technology Portable Operating System Interface e When you log in via the login utility Login changes directory to your HOME directory it also sets LOGNAME to your user name and SHELL to the login shell named in your account It then starts the login shell which is typically a command interpreter bin sh but could also be an application that gets launched as soon as you log in Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 35 Managing
343. rnnnrnnanrnanrnnnrnnarnnnnnna 49 Processing a COmMaANd it ada 50 Character device A sahacesnece pincer saned sgeaccgt cos erR eie Aaaa ARA aS Dedan Saata aaia 51 RUE MOAES ne i a a a A a acid 51 Table of Contents E A E E O A E CA AS 51 CA A 51 The keyboard at a glance sicion a a a a ea E aa ai 52 Physical and virtual consoles cccoccccoccconccnncnonnonnnnnnnoncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnonnnonannnannnnnns 53 Sl ita id A Vues AA AAA A A AAA 55 Editing the command Liness cre ta dardos ders 57 Command and filename completion ccccccceecceeece cece ceseeeceeseecseeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeees 57 Reserved WOAS anita ADA dE AAA A A A 58 Entering multiple COMMANAS cccocccccccconcnnncnnnnonnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnonanenanonanenannnones 58 AMASOS ici A A da dd edad 59 SUDSEILUH ONS atril citan 59 Redirecting input and output cccoccccoccconccnncnnnnnnnnnnnnoncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnonanenanincinnncns 62 RIDES estat e Se eae Be aloe a A o heat te eee ted 63 Quoting Special Characters meditando E NEEE A Eaa 63 History recalling COMMANAS ccoccccccccoccnoncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnoncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnenannnanennnnnanes 65 A tea ee hese ie ei has apes ee Sees eee cae ede ee es 65 A TEATE E EEA INE EIIE ES O 66 Understanding command SYNTAX occcooccoonccnncnnnnnnnnnnnnoncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnonanenannnannnanes 67 Displaying online usage messages cccooccconcconcnonnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnonanenannnnnnnanos 68
344. rted to NFS protocol see RFC 1094 and RFC 1813 requests and are sent to the server over the network The server receives the request performs the actual filesystem operation and sends a response back to the client In essence NFS lets you graft remote filesystems or portions of them onto your local namespace Directories on the remote systems appear as part of your local filesystem and all the utilities you use for listing and managing files e g 1s cp mv operate on the remote files exactly as they do on your local files This filesystem allows the same characters in a filename as the QNX 4 filesystem see Filenames p 152 earlier in this chapter NFS consists of e aclient that requests that a remote filesystem be grafted onto its local namespace e a server that responds to client requests enabling the clients to access filesystems as NFS mountpoints The procedures used in QNX Neutrino for setting up clients and servers may differ from those used in other implementations To set up clients and servers on a non QNX Neutrino system see the vendor s documentation and examine the initialization scripts to see how the various programs are started on that system It s actually the clients that do the work required to convert the generalized file access that servers provide into a file access method that s useful to applications and users If you want to start an NFS filesystem when you boot your system put
345. running with the appropriate shared objects e Run syslogd and examine the syslog file for logged system messages Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 227 Chapter 13 Connecting Hardware An embedded QNX Neutrino system typically has specific hardware so when the system boots it s likely to explicitly start the appropriate drivers You can find a list of currently supported hardware in the Community area of our website http www qnx com The website lists the chipsets and hardware that we ve tested with QNX Neutrino However many times there are slight variants of chipsets that will work with the drivers even if they aren t listed It s often worth trying these chipsets to see if the driver will work with your hardware but note that the hardware might not behave as expected You ll use the information in this chapter if the enumerator can t detect your system s devices or if you want to manually configure static devices in an embedded system e You need to be logged in as root to start any drivers o Make sure that PnP aware OS is disabled in the BIOS before you run QNX Neutrino Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 229 Connecting Hardware PCI AGP devices 230 If you don t know what type of controller you re using you can use the pci utility to identify it For example pci vvv less The output from this command looks something like this Class Mass Storage IDE Ve
346. s See also round robin and sporadic filename completion A shell feature that saves typing type enough of the file s name to identify it uniquely and then press Esc twice If possible the shell fills in the rest of the name filter A program that reads from standard input and writes to standard output such as grep and sort You can use a pipe to combine filters flash memory A memory technology similar in characteristics to EEPROM memory with the exception that erasing is performed electrically and depending upon the organization of the flash memory device erasing may be accomplished in blocks typically 64 KB bytes at a time instead of the entire device Contrast EPROM and RAM FQNN Fully Qualified Node Name a unique name that identifies a QNX Neutrino node on a network The FQNN consists of the nodename plus the node domain tacked together garbage collection The process whereby a filesystem manager recovers the space occupied by deleted files and directories Also known as space reclamation group A collection of users who share similar file permissions HA High Availability in telecommunications and other industries HA describes a system s ability to remain up and running without interruption for extended periods of time hard link Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 367 Glossary See link hidden file A file whose name starts with a dot such as profile Commands such as 1s d
347. s such as passwd need to run as a specific user in order to work properly which 1 passwd rwsrwxr x 1 root root 21544 Mar 30 23 34 usr bin passwd Notice that the third character in the owner s permissions is s This indicates a setuid set user ID command when you run passwd the program runs as the owner of the file i e root An s means that the setuid bit is set for the file but the execute bit isn t set You might also find some setgid set group 1D commands which run with the same group ID as the owner of the file but not with the owner s user ID If setgid is set on a directory files created in the directory have the directory s group ID not that of the file s creator This scheme is commonly used for spool areas such as usr spool mail which is setgid and owned by the mail group so that programs Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited File ownership and permissions running as the mai1 group can update things there but the files still belong to their normal owners If you change the ownership of a setuid command the setuid bit is cleared unless you re logged in as root Similarly if you change the group of a setgid command the setgid bit is cleared unless you re root When running on a Windows host mkefs mketfs and mkifs can t get the execute x setuid set user ID or setgid set group ID permissions from the file Use the perms attribute to specify the
348. s profile alias ls ls P Any changes that you make to the profile apply to new shells but not to existing instances For an example of kshrc see the Examples appendix Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 119 Configuring Your Environment Environment variables Many applications use environment variables to control their behavior For example less gets the width of the terminal or window from the COLUMNS environment variable many utilities write any temporary files in the directory specified by TMPDIR For more information see the Commonly Used Environment Variables appendix of the Utilities Reference When you start a process it inherits a copy of its parent s environment This means that you can set an environment variable in your profile and all your shells and processes inherit it provided that no one in the chain undefines it For example if you have your own bin directory you can add it to your PATH by adding a line like this to your profile export PATH PATH home username bin If you re the system administrator and you want this change to apply to everyone export the environment variables from etc profile or from a script in etc profile d For more information see the discussion of etc profile p 118 earlier in this chapter Setting PATH and LD_LIBRARY_PATH 120 The login utility doesn t preserve environment variables except for a few special ones such as PATH and TERM
349. s standard describes where files and directories should or must be placed in UNIX style operating systems For more information see http www pathname com The QNX Neutrino pathname space is extremely flexible Your system may be configured differently This section describes the contents of these directories Ed TITLTITITITIT 3 home lib proc tmp usr var The directory is the root of the pathname space Usually your primary hard disk or flash filesystem is mounted here On a QNX 4 filesystem this directory includes the following files altboot Contains an alternate OS image that s loaded if you press ESC during bootup and you re using the QNX 4 filesystem bitmap A system file that contains a bitmap representing the disk regions in use by the filesystem Each block is represented by one bit if the bit is set the filesystem is using the block You must preserve the integrity of this file to prevent disk corruption After an unexpected shutdown run chkfsys to walk through the entire filesystem and validate this file s contents correcting them if necessary For more information see QNX 4 filesystem p 151 in Working with Filesystems and chkfsys in the Utilities Reference boot This item depends on the filesystem you re using Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 85 Working with Files e Ona bootable Power Safe s qnx6 so filesystem it s a directory that contains the
350. se changes run routed which implements the Routing Information Protocol RIP and RIPv2 There s often confusion between routing and routing protocols The TCP IP stack determines the routing by using routing tables routing protocols let those tables change 190 Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Software components for TCP IP networking Software components for TCP IP networking To use TCP IP you need the following software components f R T f Client processes Network drivers devn so Hardware Figure 5 Components of TCP IP in QNX Neutrino io pkt Manager that provides support for dynamically loaded networking modules It includes a fully featured TCP IP stack derived from the NetBSD code base devn devnp Managers that form an interface with the hardware To set configuration parameters use the ifconfig and route utilities as described below If you re using the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP you can use dhcp client to set the configuration parameters for you as provided by the DHCP server The TCP IP stack is based on the NetBSD TCP IP stack and it supports similar features To configure the stack use the ifconfig and route utilities as described below To configure an interface with an IP address you must use the ifconfig utility To configure your network interface with an IP address of 10 0 0 100 you would use the following command ifconfig If na
351. se permissions explicitly You might also have to use the uid and gid attributes to set the ownership correctly To determine whether or not a utility needs to have the setuid or setgid permission set see its entry in the Utilities Reference Setuid and setgid commands can cause a security problem If you create any make sure that only the owner can write them and that a malicious user can t hijack them especially if root owns them Sticky bit The sticky bit is an access permission that affects the handling of executable files and directories e If it s set for an executable file the kernel keeps the executable in memory for a while after the program ends the exact length of time depends on what else is happening in the system This can improve the performance if you run a program e g a compiler or linker frequently e For a directory it affects who can delete a file in the directory You always need to have write permission on the directory but if the sticky bit is set for the directory you also need to be the owner of the file or directory or have write permission on the file If the third character in a set of permissions is t e g r t the sticky bit and execute permission are both set T indicates that only the sticky bit is set Default file permissions Use the umask command to specify the mask for setting the permissions on new files The default mask is 002 so any new files give read and write
352. seeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeensaees 175 When should yon tse Oret nai da diia danna dende 176 Conventions for NAMING nodes ccoccccccccccccocnnncnonnnennnenononcnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnonnnennnonanenaniness 177 Software components for Qnet networking ccecceeccecesecceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeesaneees 179 Si Geeta Gates suchde Soucca bas bath adhd agenda same a ied punch sunamushd te a R r e aaide Sen atudhete 180 Creating USC Mi hie eRe ioe cca ee eee ee aii 180 Starting the network manager protocols and drivers occccoccconccocncnnnonnneninencnnnnnnonos 181 Checking out the neighborhood coccccccccccccocnnocncnonennnencnnncnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnonnnnnnnnonnnonnnenanenaniness 182 Populating MER A a o 182 QNX Neutrino RTOS TROUBLESHOOTING cc ox2Sn ta ee de a 184 IS Qe PUNNMING cancion rai E de 184 Are io pkt and the drivers running occoocccccnnncncncnnncnnocnnoninnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnoninenineninns 184 Is the network card FUNCTIONAL occcooccccnconnnncnnnnnnnnoncnnnnncnnnnonnnnnannnonannnnnnnnnnannnnnnoss 185 How do get diagnostic information ocooocccccconcnoncnoncnnncnnonnnnnnnnnncnnnonnnonannnnnnnncnnns 185 S the HOStNAMe UNIQUE ies iii 186 Are the nodes in the Same domain ccccceecccceececeeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaneees 186 Chapter 11 TCP IP Networking oocccocccccccccnoccconcccnncnnnannnnnnnnnnoncnnnnnnrnnnrnnnrnnnrrnnrrnnnrnnnrnnnrnnnnnnnns 187 OVERVIEW of TOP Pc
353. seutensect seeeneedeudensescaseecgsdevdawevasseuensedeesvedvacsseeegsdens 333 QNX 4 Files a aaa 334 Power Safe fs qnx6 s0 filesystem oocooocccoccconnoncnoncnoncnonnnnocnnnnnnnnnonanonnnonannnnnnnacnnn 335 Ext2 SA sen tecehiccesesgtaas stuck cones tan danet cant satte das Senaat 335 DOS FAT 12 16 32 filesystem c c scesseestebecsdeeel a ci 336 CD ROM ISO9660 filesystem castas tati a a eeii tens 337 NFS2 and NFS3 filesysteM occcocccccncconcconcnonnonononnnonnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnonnnonnnonaninncnnn 337 CIS Ml ste ii A a e ada toreo 337 Embedded flash filesystem ccocccccccconcconcconnonnnonnnoncnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnonannnannnncnnn 338 Embedded Transaction filesystem ETFS occoccccccnnccnnncnnncnnonnnonnnnnnonononnnonanonaninannnns 338 UDF filesystem 32 22282 foros A eee ee ee eA ee ee eA 340 Apple Macintosh HFS and HFS Plus cccceccceseceeeceeeceeceseeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeneeeneeees 340 Windows NT filesystem cccccccc cece ecce cece eeeeeeeee eens esse esse eeseeeseeeseeeseeeeaeeeaeeeneeeneeees 341 Other Systemi MITS ii A A 342 Biles descriptor tecate tdo denon oct dal decide eo mondo 343 SYNCHTONIZAtION PEMIIVOS 3 A AA A A a A 343 TEPAP Misas a a diia 343 Shared MAN A A a da aiii 343 Message quee A A a a 343 QNX Neutrino RTOS Platform Spec fic LIMMITS e ee eeed segs id ha bed dee 344 Chapter 19 Technical Support vicio cn See idee canis cade li cee aces di a 345 Appendix A
354. ship of system resources that the user owned If necessary remove or alter references to the user in email systems TCP IP access control files applications and so on Instead of removing a user you can disable the account by using the passwd utility to change the account s password In this way you can tell which system resources the former user owned since the user ID to name translation still works When you do this the passwd utility automatically handles the necessary locking and unlocking of the account database If you ever need to log into that account you can either use the su switch user utility to switch to that account from root or log in to the account If you forget the password for the account remember that the root user can always change it What should you do with any resources that a former user owned Here are some of your options Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 43 Managing User Accounts e f you ve retained the user account in the account database but disabled it by changing the password or the login shell you can leave the files as they are e You can assign the files to another user find user user_name_or_ID chown new_username e You can archive the files and optionally move them to other media find user user_name_or_ID pax wf archivefile e You can remove them find user user_name_or_ID remove If you remove a user s acco
355. shot basis timeslice A period of time assigned to a round robin scheduled thread This period of time is small four times the clock period in QNX Neutrino programs shouldn t rely on the actual value doing so is considered bad design Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 377 Index backquote 60 _CS_ARCHITECTURE 122 _CS_DOMAIN 122 177 _CS_HOSTNAME 122 177 _CS_HW_PROVIDER 122 _CS_HW_SERIAL 123 _CS_LIBPATH 120 123 _CS_LOCALE 123 _CS_MACHINE 123 _CS_PATH 120 123 _CS_RELEASE 123 _CS_RESOLVE 123 189 199 _CS_SRPC_DOMAIN 123 _CS_SYSNAME 123 _CS_TIMEZONE 123 124 _CS_VERSION 123 _IO_READ 327 _PC_CHOWN_RESTRICTED 334 _PC_LINK_MAX 333 _PC_MAX_CANON 333 _PC_MAX_INPUT 333 _PC_NAME_MAX 152 332 333 _PC_NO_TRUNC 334 _PC_PATH_MAX 333 _PC_PIPE_BUF 334 _PC_VDISABLE 334 _SC_OPEN_MAX 332 end of options 68 76 161 261 wildcard character 61 current directory 66 81 150 153 164 171 292 fabricated by fs nt so 171 not supported by 150 164 dev shmem 150 flash filesystems 164 parent directory 81 150 153 164 171 292 fabricated by fs nt so 171 not supported by 150 164 dev shmem 150 flash filesystems 164 in command syntax 67 altboot 85 290 291 bad_blks 297 bitmap 85 291 297 rewriting with chkfsys 297 boot 85 290 291 351 diskroot 86 exrc 110 inodes 86 152 291 293 321 322 entries 152 293 pregrowing 321 kshrc 119 131 355 example of 355 interactive mode 131
356. sion 104 BMP Bound Multiprocessing 24 boot 94 image 94 boot directory 86 boot file 85 290 291 bootable 104 285 CDs 285 images 104 booting 103 163 299 302 319 ACLs don t persist across 103 Ext2 filesystem can t boot from 163 running chkfsys on servers 299 speeding up 319 troubleshooting 302 bootpd 194 bootptab 90 Bound Multiprocessing BMP 24 braces 61 buffers 308 323 326 333 canonical input 333 double 326 overrun attack 308 raw input 333 standard 1 0 323 BUFSIZ 320 323 326 build file extension 104 buildfiles 104 120 134 148 348 351 353 OS images creating 148 PATH LD_LIBRARY_PATH 120 script files 134 builtin commands 66 TOO fF ow Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited bunzip2 283 burst headers suppressing on print jobs 211 bytes 259 260 received 260 transmitted 259 bzip2 283 Cc C 104 code 104 header files 104 c file extension 104 C 104 code 104 definition files 104 cable modems 196 cables 235 257 cache size 232 320 328 floppy drives 232 320 USB storage devices 328 cacls DOS command 71 calculator 104 call DOS command 71 calloc 342 cam cdrom so 231 cam disk so 233 cam optical so 238 cancel UNIX command 20 canonical input mode 51 333 buffer size 333 CardBUS 243 carrier 262 cascading style sheets 104 case 139 cat 70 cc file extension 104 cd 66 70 81 symbolic links 81 CD DOS variable 73 CD ROM 84 87 93 162 231 233 337 drives 231
357. sion denied message You don t have write permission for the file If you re the owner or root you can change the permissions see File ownership and permissions p 97 above l m trying to list a directory that have write permission for but get a permission denied message You need to have read or execute permission for a directory in order to list it See File ownership and permissions p 97 above I m having trouble with a file that has a space in its name The command interpreter or shell parses the command line and uses the space character to break the command into tokens If your filename includes a space you need to quote the space so that the shell knows you want a literal space For more information including other special characters that you need to watch for see Quoting special characters p 63 in Using the Command Line Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 107 Chapter 6 Using Editors An editor is a utility designed to view and modify files Editors don t apply any persistent formatting to viewed text although many use colors or styles to provide additional contextual information such as type information in source code files For example if you re editing C code some editors use different colors to indicate keywords strings numbers and so on Which editor you use is largely a question of personal taste e Do you want to use a mouse or other pointer
358. source 104 at UNIX command 20 attacks 308 309 buffer overrun 308 denial of service DOS 309 stack smashing 308 takeover 309 attrib DOS command 71 audio 104 241 cards 241 wave files 104 Authentication Header See AH auto_add 182 autoconnect 90 AutolP 196 198 awk 104 b file extension 104 backdrops 95 backquotes 60 Backspace 52 backups 277 bad blocks 278 297 bad_blks 297 determining severity 278 removing 297 bad_blks 297 bat file extension 104 batch files 71 104 Bazaar 112 bc bench calculator 104 bin 86 95 binary output files 104 bind DNS resolver 308 security 308 bind ksh builtin 58 BIOS 24 235 System Management Mode SMM avoid it 24 UDMA mode 235 bit bucket 62 88 380 o itmap blocks 290 296 creating 296 itmap disk allocation file 85 291 itmap graphical images 104 itmapped font files 104 its 293 QNX4FS_FILE_LINK 293 itstream TrueDoc Portable Font Resource files 104 ock I O devb drivers 162 169 231 232 233 234 249 320 328 CD ROMs 231 EIDE 233 fine tuning 320 floppy drives 232 troubleshooting 234 USB mass storage devices 249 328 block special files 78 blocks 156 289 290 293 294 296 297 298 300 bad in middle of file 300 bitmap 290 examining within a file 300 extent 293 files and file extents 294 key components on disk 289 loader 289 296 partition block 296 recovering 156 297 298 root block 290 verifying allocation 297 BMP 104 file exten
359. sswd won t run If the system crashes during the update and etc pwlock still exists passwd refuses to work until the system administrator removes the file If the password files are left in an inconsistent state as a result of the crash the system administrator should also copy the backup files etc oshadow and etc opasswd to etc shadow and etc passwd to prevent additional problems Why can t I log in in text mode If you enter your user name and password to the text mode login prompt login and it responds Login incorrect it s likely because your user name doesn t exist or you ve typed the wrong password Both user names and passwords are case sensitive make sure you don t have Caps Lock on To avoid giving clues to unauthorized users login doesn t tell you whether it s the user name or the password that s wrong If you can t resolve the problem yourself your system administrator root user can set a new password on your account This symptom can also occur if one or more password related files are missing If the system administrator is in the middle of updating the files it s possible that its absence will be temporary Try again in a minute or two if this might be the case Otherwise see your system administrator for help If you are the system administrator and can t access the system try accessing it from another QNX Neutrino machine using Qnet from a development machine using the qconn interface or boot and ru
360. sted users but be very careful You may also find other resident daemons that can run independently of inet d see the Utilities Reference for descriptions bootpd Internet boot protocol server dhcpd Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol daemon lpd Line printer daemon see Printing p 203 mrouted Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol DVMRP daemon named Internet domain name server ntpd Network Time Protocol daemon routed RIP and RIPv2 routing protocol daemon rwhod System status database nfsd NFS server These daemons listen on their own TCP ports and manage their own transactions They usually start when the computer boots and then run continuously although to conserve system resources you can have inetd start bootpd only when a boot request arrives 194 Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Running multiple instances of the TCP IP stack Running multiple instances of the TCP IP stack In some situations you may need to run multiple instances of the TCP IP stack To start multiple instances of the stack 1 Start the first instance of the TCP IP stack by invoking io pkt as follows io pkt v4 del900 pci 0x0 2 Start the second instance of the TCP IP stack by invoking io pkt as follows io pkt v4 il del900 pci 0x1 ptcpip prefix sock2 You can get the PCI index of your NIC cards by using the pci vvv command If you re using different types of NIC cards you don t have to spe
361. stem devb eide amp When the driver starts it detects all EIDE devices attached to the chain For each device the driver creates an entry in the dev directory e g a hard drive appears as hdx where x is the number of the drive starting from 0 For example suppose a system has two hard drives installed The driver creates the following entries in the dev directory dev hd0 Usually the primary master dev hdl Usually the primary slave or the next drive on the system the secondary master If the system has one hard drive and a CD ROM the entries are dev hdo The primary master dev cdo The CD ROM drive Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 233 Connecting Hardware 234 A slave drive must have a master drive When the driver starts it displays on the console the type of detected hardware along with other debugging information that gets sent to the system logger slogger To view the system log run sloginfo 0 When you view the output from sloginfo there will likely be a number of ASC_MEDIA_NOT_PRESENT entries The driver logs these messages if there nl isn t a CD in the CD ROM drive You can generally ignore them Troubleshooting for devb eide If the driver doesn t detect the interface or drives attached to it Check the supported hardware part of our website to see if the interface is supported see the Community area of our website
362. sword file is currently being modified When passwd finishes it removes the lock file If you re the system administrator and you need to edit the account files you should 1 Lock the password database if the etc pwlock file doesn t exist lock the account files by creating it if it does exist wait until it s gone 2 Open the appropriate file or files using the text editor of your choice and make the necessary changes 3 Unlock the password database by removing etc pwlock 38 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Managing your own account Managing your own account As a regular non root user you can change your own password You can also customize your environment by modifying the configuration files in your home directory see the Configuring Your Environment chapter Changing your password To change your password use the passwd utility You re prompted for your current password and then for a new one You have to repeat the new password to guard against typographical errors Depending on the password rules that the system administrator has set passwd may require that you enter a password of a certain length or one that contains certain elements such as a combination of letters numbers and punctuation If the password you select doesn t meet the criteria passwd asks you to choose another If other users can access your system e g it s connected to the Internet has a dial in modem or is ph
363. system the flag is cleared In between the filesystem is dirty and may need to be checked if it never gets cleanly unmounted The Power Safe filesystem has no such flag it just rolls back to the last clean snapshot You can use the blk marking none option to turn off this marking see the entry for io b1k so in the Utilities Reference 146 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Mounting and unmounting filesystems Mounting and unmounting filesystems The following utilities work with filesystems mount Mount a block special device or remote filesystem umount Unmount a device or filesystem For example if s cifs is already running you can mount filesystems on it like this mount t cifs o guest none SMB_SERVER 10 0 0 1 QNX_BIN bin By default filesystems are mounted as read write if the physical media permit it You can use the r option for mount to mount the filesystem as read only The io b1k so library also supports an ro option for mounting block I O filesystems as read only You can also use the u option for the mount utility to temporarily change the way the filesystem is mounted For example if a filesystem is usually mounted as read only and you need to remount it as read write you can update the mounting by specifying uw For example mount uw To return to read only mode use the ur options mount ur You should use umount to unmount a read write filesystem before removing or e
364. t Here s a sample buildfile for an NFS mounting target In a real buildfile you can t use a backslash 1 to break a long line into shorter pieces but we ve done that here just to make the buildfile easier to read FEFE aE aE a aE AE A AE a aE aE AE AE AE AE AE a aE HE AEE AA AE aE aE AE aA AE aE aE EA AE AHHH AE HH QNX Neutrino RTOS on the fictitious ABC123 board H HARA AT AR AE EA EA EA AA AA AEA EA AEA AEE AEE AEA EA AEA AEA AE EEA EA HEAT AE AE EA EA EAT HE AEE EEA EA EE tH SUPPORTED DEVICES SERIAL RS 232 ports UARTO and UART1 PCI 4 PCI slots NETWORK AMD 79C973 FLASH 4MB Intel Strata Flash USB UHCI USB Host Controller tH For detailed instructions on the default example configuration for tH these devices see the CONFIGURING ON BOARD SUPPORTED HARDWARE Ht section below the build script section or refer to the BSP docs Tip Each sub section which relates to a particular device is marked de with its tag ex SERIAL You can use the search features of your editor to quickly find and add or remove support for tH these devices tH FRAT HR AAR TH AEA AEA HARA AE AE FE FE AE EAE EE EAE EAE AEA EE HE AEE EE AE AEE AE HE FE AE AE EE AEA EAA AEE H NOTES TH FARA HR AAR TH HARA HARARE AE AE FE FE AE HR AAT HAA TH AE RAH AEA EA HARA AE ERAT AEA THR ART HARA THE dd START OF BUILD SCRIPT FRAT HRA TH HAH HARA HARA AE HEAT HE AEA TH AEA HE AEA HARA RAAT HAA HAT HA
365. t such as from an installation CD and from there manually reset the password Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 39 Managing User Accounts 40 Access the necessary files from the root account of another QNX Neutrino machine using Qnet For more information see Using Qnet for Transparent Distributed Processing p 175 Remove the media on which the etc passwd and etc shadow are stored and install it on another QNX Neutrino machine from which you can modify the files In the case of an embedded system build a new image that contains new passwd and shadow files and then transfer it to your target system Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Managing other accounts Managing other accounts As a system administrator you need to add and remove user accounts and groups manage passwords and troubleshoot users problems You must be logged in as root to do this because other users don t have permission to modify etc passwa etc shadow and etc group While it s safe at any time to use the passwd utility to change the password of an existing user who already has a password it isn t necessarily safe to make any other change to the account database while your system is in active use Specifically the following operations may cause applications and utilities to operate incorrectly when handling user account information e adding a user either by using the passwd utility or by manually editing
366. t with another piece of hardware Try changing the I O port to see if that helps e If you hear a bit of sound and then nothing make sure that the IRQ isn t conflicting with another device and is reserved in the BIOS You can also try changing the IRQ as well e If the driver starts correctly but there s no sound check the DMA settings on the card and try changing them if possible Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 241 Connecting Hardware PnP based You might need to obtain a copy of isapnp which is used to initialize ISA PnP cards QNX Neutrino doesn t supply this utility but it s freely available on the Internet and has been ported to the QNX Neutrino RTOS PCI Cards If your PCI card doesn t work swap PCI slots Sometimes the IRQ that s assigned to the particular slot doesn t work well with the card For additional information about the card use the pci utility For a list of supported hardware see the Community area of our website http www qnx com 242 Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited PCCARD and PCMCIA cards PCCARD and PCMCIA cards The QNX Neutrino RTOS supports PCMCIA 1 0 2 0 and CardBUS type cards By default the driver detects the ISA PCI based controller If an adapter isn t detected check the supported hardware page to ensure that your PC Card adapter s chipset is supported Currently the driver doesn t let you specify the adapter s I O port and IRQ but you can specify th
367. t Distributed Processing p 175 chapter in this guide and in the Native Networking Qnet chapter of the System Architecture guide Qnet displays other QNX Neutrino machines on the network in the filesystem and lets you treat remote systems as extensions of the local machine It does no authentication beyond getting a user ID from the incoming connection so be careful when running it on a machine that s accessible to public networks To make Qnet more secure you can use the maproot and mapany options which map incoming connections root or anyone respectively to a specific user ID For more information see 1sm qnet so in the Utilities Reference IPsec is a security protocol for the Internet Protocol layer that you can use for example to set up a secure tunnel between machines or networks It consists of these subprotocols AH Authentication Header Guarantees the integrity of the IP packet and protects it from intermediate alteration or impersonation by attaching a cryptographic checksum computed by one way hash functions ESP Encapsulated Security Payload Protects the IP payload from wire tapping by encrypting it using secret key cryptography algorithms IPsec has these modes of operation Transport Protects peer to peer communication between end nodes Tunnel Supports IP in IP encapsulation operation and is designed for security gateways such as VPN configurations amp The IPsec support is subject t
368. tain typographical conventions to distinguish technical terms In general the conventions we use conform to those found in IEEE POSIX publications The following table summarizes our conventions Reference Code examples Command options Commands Environment variables File and pathnames Function names Keyboard chords Keyboard input Keyboard keys Program output Variable names Parameters User interface components Window title Example if stream NULL 1R make PATH dev null exit Ctrl Alt Delete Username Enter login stdin parml Navigator Options We use an arrow in directions for accessing menu items like this You ll find the Other menu item under Perspective gt Show View We use notes cautions and warnings to highlight important messages Notes point out something important or useful or undesirable side effects Cautions tell you about commands or procedures that may have unwanted 4 Warnings tell you about commands or procedures that could be dangerous to your files your hardware or even yourself Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 15 About the QNX Neutrino User s Guide Note to Windows users In our documentation we use a forward slash as a delimiter in all pathnames including those pointing to Windows files We also generally follow POSIX UNIX filesystem conventions 16 Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems
369. tems Limited 235 Connecting Hardware size drive rotation speed PCI bus and filesystem Don t expect a UDMA 6 drive to have a sustained throughput of 100M s e Check to make sure that the device you re attempting to connect can operate at the expected UDMA modes e Correct the assignment of primary secondary and master slave interfaces For example putting two hard drives as primary secondary rather than master slave on the primary may allow driver parallelism SCSI devices A SCSI Small Computer Systems Interface bus is simply another bus that you can attach multiple peripherals to QNX Neutrino supports many brands and varieties of SCSI adapters see the devb block oriented drivers in the Utilities Reference When the SCSI driver starts up it scans the bus for attached devices When the driver finds a supported device it creates an entry in the dev directory e g a hard drive is hdx where x is the number of the drive starting from 0 If the driver doesn t find any devices it might not know the device ID of the adapter Passing the device ID and vendor ID to the driver often corrects this problem In the following example the driver automatically scans for SCSI devices on the chain and adds them into the dev directory as they re found For example if the system has four hard drives in it the entries in the dev directory are as follows e dev had0 lowest SCSI ID first e dev hdl e dev hd2 e dev hda
370. ternal copy of the bitmap and verifying the consistency of all files and directories it finds in the process When it has finished processing all files chkfsys compares the internal bitmap to the bitmap on the disk If they match chkfsys is finished If any discrepancies are found chkfsys will upon your approval rewrite the bitmap with data consistent with the files it was able to find and verify In addition to verifying block allocation bitmap chkfsys attempts to fix any problems it finds during the scan For example chkfsys Can e unbusy files that were being written when a crash occurred e fix the file size in a directory entry to match the real data When to run chkfsys It s a good idea to run chkfsys as part of your regularly scheduled maintenance procedures this lets you verify that the data on your disk is intact For example you might consider running chkfsys on your network servers every time they boot An automated check on the filesystem at boot time guarantees that chkfsys will attempt to fix any problems it finds during the scan To automate this process add chkfsys to the server s rc local file It s especially important to run chkfsys after a system crash power outage or unexpected system reboot so that you can identify whether any files have been damaged The chkfsys utility checks the clean flag on the disk to determine whether the system was in a consistent state at the time The clean fla
371. ters This reduces the processing done on each character to a minimum and provides the highest performance interface for reading data Also raw mode is used with devices that typically generate binary data you don t want any translations of the raw binary stream between the device and the application Contrast canonical mode remote execution Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 373 Glossary Running commands on a machine other than your own over a network replenishment In sporadic scheduling the period of time during which a thread is allowed to consume its execution budget reset vector The address at which the processor begins executing instructions after the processor s reset line has been activated On the x86 for example this is the address OxFFFFFFFO resource manager A user level server program that accepts messages from other programs and optionally communicates with hardware QNX Neutrino resource managers are responsible for presenting an interface to various types of devices whether actual e g serial ports parallel ports network cards disk drives or virtual e g dev nul1 a network filesystem and pseudo ttys In other operating systems this functionality is traditionally associated with device drivers But unlike device drivers QNX Neutrino resource managers don t require any special arrangements with the kernel In fact a resource manager looks just like any other user level program See
372. the Process Manager to store the pathname table priority inheritance The characteristic of a thread that causes its priority to be raised or lowered to that of the thread that sent it a message Also used with mutexes Priority inheritance is a method used to prevent priority inversion priority inversion A condition that can occur when a low priority thread consumes CPU at a higher priority than it should This can be caused by not supporting priority inheritance such that when the lower priority thread sends a message to a higher priority thread the higher priority thread consumes CPU on behalf ofthe lower priority thread This is solved by having the higher priority thread inherit the priority of the thread on whose behalf it s working process A nonschedulable entity which defines the address space and a few data areas A process must have at least one thread running in it process group A collection of processes that permits the signalling of related processes Each process in the system is a member of a process group identified by a process group ID A newly created process joins the process group of its creator process group ID The unique identifier representing a process group during its lifetime A process group ID is a positive integer The system may reuse a process group ID after the process group dies process group leader A process whose ID is the same as its process group ID process ID PID Copyright
373. thus is a potential security issue if you don t configure it properly The inetd daemon listens for connections on some well known ports as defined in etc inetd conf in the TCP IP network On receiving a request it runs the corresponding server daemon For example if a client requests a remote login by invoking rlogin then inetd starts rlogind remote login daemon to satisfy the request In most instances responses to client requests are handled this way You use the super server configuration file etc inetd conf to specify the daemons that inetd can start As shipped in the QNX Neutrino distribution the file contains commented out descriptions of all currently shipped QNX Neutrino TCP IP daemons and some nonstandard pidin services You need to edit inetd conf and uncomment the descriptions of the ones you want to use When it starts inetd reads its configuration information from this configuration file It includes these commonly used daemons ftpd File transfer rlogind Remote login rshd Remote shell telnetd Remote terminal session tftpd DARPA trivial file transfer Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 193 TCP IP Networking e Remember that you shouldn t manually start the daemon processes listed in this file they expect to be started by inetd o e Running rshd or rlogind can open up your machine to the world Use le the etc hosts equiv or rhost s files or both to identify tru
374. tilities Reference To check the filesystem for consistency which you aren t likely to need to do use chkgnx6fs The chkfsys utility will claim that a Power Safe filesystem is corrupt lt Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 157 Working with Filesystems Booting Snapshots 158 The current boot support is for x86 PC partition table based the same base system as current booting with a BIOS that supports INT13X LBA The mkqnx6fs utility creates a boot directory in the root of the new filesystem This is always present and always has an inode of 2 the root directory itself is inode 1 The mkgnx6fs utility also installs a new secondary boot loader in the first 8 KB of the partition and patches it with the location and offset of the filesystem The fs qnx6 so filesystem protects this directory at runtime in particular it can t be removed or renamed nor can it exceed 4096 bytes 128 entries Files placed into the boot directory are assumed to be boot images created with mkifs The name of the file should describe the boot image The directory can contain up to 126 entries You can create other types of object in this directory e g directories or symbolic links but the boot loader ignores them The boot loader also ignores certain sized regular files e g O or larger than 2 GB as well as those with names longer than 27 characters The filesystem implicitly suspends snapshots when a boot
375. timestamps and so on The most expensive operation of a filesystem is in updating the metadata This is because e The metadata is typically located on different disk cylinders from the data and is even disjoint to itself bitmaps inodes directory entries and hence incurs seek delays e The metadata is usually written to the disk with more urgency than user data because the metadata affects the integrity of the filesystem structure and hence may incur a transfer delay Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 321 Fine Tuning Your System Almost all operations on the filesystem even reading file data unless you ve specified the noatime option see io b1k so in the Utilities Reference involve some metadata updates Ordering the updates to metadata Some filesystem operations affect multiple blocks on disk For example consider the situation of creating or deleting a file Most filesystems separate the name of the file or link from the actual attributes of the file the inode this supports the POSIX concept of hard links multiple names for the same file Typically the inodes reside in a fixed location on disk the inodes file for fs qnx4 so or in the header of each cylinder group for s ext2 so Creating a new filename thus involves allocating a free inode entry and populating it with the details for the new file and then placing the name for the file into the appropriate directory Deleting a file involves
376. ting 266 Win 266 modes See permissions more 20 70 motd 91 118 mount 94 147 159 167 173 181 231 232 324 configuration 324 NFS 167 mountpoints 82 94 pathname space 94 move DOS command 71 mq mqueue directory 88 mrouted 194 MRU Maximum Receivable data Unit 257 msgs UNIX command 20 msiexec DOS command 71 MTU Maximum Transmittable data Unit 257 multicast mode 259 multicore processing 24 344 maximum number of processors 344 mutexes limits 343 mv 70 355 interactive mode 355 myQNX account center 345 N name resolution 177 name servers 91 188 199 information about 199 named 194 named groups and users 100 named semaphores 88 343 limits 343 pathname space 88 named special files 78 149 NAT Network Address Translation 313 native networking 175 NCFTP printing over 203 356 NDP Node Discovery Protocol 178 net 175 184 net cfg 189 netstat 192 200 network 175 179 185 187 191 194 299 card 185 functionality checking 185 drivers 179 191 manager io pkt 179 191 390 network continued native Qnet 175 routing tables 194 daemon 194 running chkfsys on servers 299 TCP IP 187 network adapters 87 254 mounting 87 Network Address Translation See NAT Network File System See NFS Network Interface Card See NIC Network Time Protocol See NTP networks 90 91 177 192 200 configuration 192 directory 177 hostname database 90 names 91 status getting 200 newgrp 34 NFS 166 194 337 34
377. ting table These systems have two or more network interfaces If a TCP IP host has Internet access there must be a gateway located on its network In order to use TCP IP you need an IP address and you also need the IP address of the host you wish to communicate with You typically refer to the remote host by using a textual name that s resolved into an IP address by using a name server Name servers A name server is a database that contains the names and IP addresses of hosts You normally access a TCP IP or Internet host with a textual name e 8 www qnx com and use some mechanism to translate the name into an IP address e g 209 226 137 1 The simplest way to do this mapping is to use a table in the etc hosts file This works well for small to medium networks f you have something a bit more complicated than a small internal network with a few hosts you need a name server e g for an ISP connection to the Internet Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Overview of TCP IP When you use a name to connect to a TCP IP host the name server is asked for the corresponding IP address and the connection is then made to that IP address You can use either e a name server entry in the configuration string _CS_RESOLVE obtained from a configuration file default etc net cfg or e a name server entry in the etc resolv conf file For example nameserver 10 0 0 2 nameserver 10 0 0 3 For more in
378. tinue to write and fill the extra space When the file is closed any extra space is returned This design ensures that when files even several files at one time are written they re as contiguous as possible Since most hard disk drives implement track caching this not only ensures that files are read as quickly as possible from the disk hardware but also serves to minimize the fragmentation of data on disk Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 151 Working with Filesystems For more information about performance see Fine Tuning Your System p 315 Filenames The original QNX 4 filesystem supported filenames no more than 48 characters long In QNX Neutrino 6 2 1 and later this limit has increased to 505 characters via a backwards compatible extension that s enabled by default The same on disk format is retained new systems see the longer name but old ones see a truncated 48 character name Long filenames are supported by default when you create a QNX 4 filesystem to disable them specify the N option to dinit To add long filename support to an existing QNX 4 filesystem log in as root and create an empty read only file named longfilenames owned by root in the root directory of the filesystem Cd root dir touch longfilenames chmod a r longfilenames chown root root longfilenames Le After creating the longfilenames file you must restart the filesystem for it to enable long filenames Y
379. tinuing to transmit after a packet has been sent This error shouldn t occur on faster networks because they allow a larger frame size Receive Alignment errors A receive alignment error means that the card has received a damaged frame from the network When one of these errors occurs it also triggers an FCS Frame Check Sequence error These errors occur if the received frame size isn t a multiple of eight bits one byte These errors are commonly due to faulty wiring cable runs that are out of the IEEE 802 3 specification a faulty NIC or possibly a faulty hub or switch To narrow down this problem do a binary division of the network to help eliminate the source Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Network adapters Received packets with CRC errors An entry in this field indicates the number of times on a hardware level the card received corrupt data This corruption could be caused by a faulty hub cable or network card The best way to try to solve Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC errors is to do a binary division of the systems on the network to determine which system is sending bad data Once you ve done that you can start replacing the hardware piece by piece Because this error is on the receiving end it s difficult to determine if the CRC is bad on a sent packet Packets Dropped on receive This usually means you got an overrun while receiving a packet This has to do with DMA and the FIFO like a Transmit
380. to a file called filelist enter la gt filelist You can specify a file descriptor for the above redirections For example if you don t want to display any error messages redirect stderr to dev null a special file also Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Shell known as the bit bucket that swallows any data written to it and returns end of file when read from my_command 2 gt dev null For more information see Input output redirection in the entry for ksh in the Utilities Reference Pipes You can use a pipe to to build complex commands from smaller ones For example grep some term html sort u we 1 Programs such as grep sort and wc a utility that counts characters words and lines that read from standard input and write to standard output are called filters Quoting special characters Certain characters may have special meaning to the shell depending on their context If you want a command line to include any of the special characters that the shell processes then you may have to quote these characters to force the shell to treat them as simple characters You must quote the following characters to avoid their special interpretation S amp gt Tab Newline Space You might need to quote the following characters depending on their context within a shell command In order to quote You can A single character Precede the character with a single backslash 1
381. to select a different pathname For information on disabling this feature see the description of etc default passwd in the documentation for passwd Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Managing other accounts Login shell bin sh This is the program that s run once the user logs in Traditionally this is the shell bin sh giving the user an interactive command line upon logging in You can specify any program as the login shell but you can t pass command line arguments to it Instead of specifying a custom program within the account entry you should customize the user s profile file in their home directory bin sh runs this profile automatically when it starts up For more information see Configuring Your Environment p 115 New password Removing accounts Specify the initial password for the account You re asked to confirm it by typing it again To remove a user account 1 OO Aa Ww Lock the user account database if the etc pwlock file doesn t exist lock the account files by creating it if it does exist wait until it s gone Remove the account entry in etc passwd and etc shadow to disable future logins or change the login shell to a program that simply terminates or that displays a message and then terminates Remove references to the user from the etc group file Unlock the account database by removing etc pwlock If necessary remove or change owner
382. toconfiguration protocol called AutolP zeroconf IETF draft This autoconfiguration protocol is used to assign link local IP addresses to hosts in a small network It uses a peer negotiation scheme to determine the link local IP address to use instead of relying on a central server PPPoE stands for Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet It s a method of encapsulating your data for transmission over a bridged Ethernet topology PPPoE is a specification for connecting users on an Ethernet network to the Internet through a broadband connection such as a single DSL line wireless device or cable modem Using PPPoE and a broadband modem LAN users can gain individual authenticated access to high speed data networks By combining Ethernet and the Point to Point Protocol PPP PPPoE provides an efficient way to create a separate connection to a remote server for each user Access billing and choice of service are managed on a per user basis rather than a per site basis It has the advantage that neither the telephone company nor the Internet service provider ISP needs to provide any special support Unlike dialup connections DSL and cable modem connections are always on Since a number of different users are sharing the same physical connection to the remote service provider a way is needed to keep track of which user traffic should go to where and which user should be billed PPPoE lets each user remote site session learn each other s networ
383. tory printf lt img src s s alt s border 1 gt n lt BR gt dir files num files num printf Location s s n n lt BR gt dir files num return 0 rand_images pl This Perl script displays a random image usr bin perl This script selects a random number and then chooses an image based on that number This allows the image to change each time the webpage is loaded set variables Sdir images files filel jpg file2 jpg file3 jpg filed jpg files jpq srand time Snum rand files Pick a Random Number Print Out Header With Random Filename and Base Directory print lt img src SdirSfiles S num alt Sfiles Snum border 1 gt n lt BR gt print Location S dirSfiles num n n lt BR gt Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 275 Chapter 15 Backing Up and Recovering Data No matter how reliable your hardware and electrical supply are or how sure you are that you ll never accidentally erase all your work it s just common sense to keep backups of your files Backup strategies differ in ease of use speed robustness and cost Although we ll discuss different types of archives below here s a quick summary of the file extensions associated with the different utilities Extension Utility No matter how robust a filesystem is designed to be there will always be situations in the real world where disk corruption will oc
384. type echo PATH You can put your current directory in your PATH but it can leave you vulnerable to Trojan horse programs For example if is at the beginning of your PATH the shell looks in the current directory first when trying to A find a program A malicious user could leave a program called 1s in a directory as a trap for you to fall into If you want to have your current directory in your PATH make sure that you put it after the directories that hold the common utilities For information about setting your PATH see Environment variables p 120 in Configuring Your Environment If you want to know which version of a command the shell will choose use the which command For example which ls bin ls You can use command line options to get more information which laf ls rwxrwxr x 1 root root 19272 May 03 2002 bin ls If you try this for a command that s built into the shell which can t find it which cd which no cd in bin usr bin opt bin 66 Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Utilities The whence command displays what the command means to the shell including any aliases in effect For example if you ve created an alias for 1s the output might be whence 1s is p Understanding command syntax Whenever you look up a command in the Utilities Reference you ll see a syntax statement that summarizes how you can use the command For most commands t
385. u from accidentally modifying or deleting system level software You need to log in as root to do some things such as starting drivers performing system administration tasks and profiling applications The default command line prompt indicates which user ID you re using e For root it s a number sign e For other users it s a dollar sign For information about changing the prompt see kshrc in the Examples appendix Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Logging in Logging in If your system is configured to boot into text mode it prompts you for your user name and then your password The system does this by automatically starting the login utility 9 If you type an invalid user name the system prompts you for the password anyway This avoids giving clues to anyone who s trying to break into the system Text mode on an x86 machine could be on a physical console supplied by devc con or devc con hid On any other type of machine you could be connecting to the target via a serial port or TCP IP connection Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 29 Logging In Logging Out and Shutting Down Once you ve logged in After you ve logged in the system automatically runs the home username profile script This script lets you customize your working environment without affecting other users For more information see Configuring Your Environment p 115 To c
386. unt in the account database but don t remove or change the ownership of their files it s possible that a future account may A end up with the same numeric user ID which would make the new user the owner of any files left behind by the old one Defining groups A user s account entry in etc passwd solely determines which group the user is part of on logging in while the groups a user is named in within the etc group file solely determine the groups the user may switch to after logging in see the newgrp utility As with user names and IDs the numeric effective group ID of a running program determines its access to resources For example if you have a team of people that require access to home projects on the system but you don t want the other users to have access to it do the following 1 Adda group called projects to the etc group file adding all necessary users to that group for details see Creating a new group p 45 below 2 If you want this group to be the default for these users change their account entries in etc passwa to reflect their new default group ID 3 Recursively change the group ownership and permissions on home projects chgrp R projects home projects chmod R gtrw home projects 4 Remove access for all other users chmod R o rwx home projects For more details on permissions see File ownership and permissions p 97 in Working with Files 44 Copyright 2014 QNX Softw
387. unt the drive when you change disks For information about specific options see cam cdrom so s cd so and fs udf so in the Utilities Reference You can treat DVD RAM drives like hard disks They appear in the dev directory as a CD but you can mount and treat them just like a hard disk see Hard disks p 233 below Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 231 Connecting Hardware Floppy disks The driver for a floppy drive is devb fdc In order to use a floppy disk you need to ensure that the floppy controller is enabled in the BIOS and that the BIOS is configured to recognize the correct type of floppy drive e g 1 44 MB 2 88 MB The driver uses these locations as default e 1 0 port 0x3 0 e IRQ6 e DMA 2 If your controller is located at a different address you can change these locations in the driver s options e The default cache size specified by io blk so is 15 of system RAM which is excessive for devb fdc You ll probably want to reduce it to something more reasonable devb fdc blk cache 512K The driver creates a dev tfdxentry where x is the number of the floppy drive starting at O If no entry appears the BIOS settings might be incorrect or there could be a problem with the controller Check the output from sloginfo for clues Once you have an entry in the dev directory you need to mount the floppy disk The mount command detects the type of filesystem you re usin
388. upported InkType 1 B amp W 3 2 Color CMY 4 Color CMYK Resolution 600 600 PaperSize 8500 11000 Letter Orientation Q Portrait Intensity 50 InkType A Color CMYK NonPrintable 500 Left 500 Top 500 Right 500 Bottom A eh A A eh a a a cee eh ep a th a te ens teeta if PNPID HEWLETT PACKARDHP_850DDE PNPSTR MFG HEWLETT PACKARD MDL HP 8500 CLS PRINTER CMD POSTSCRIPT Supported PaperSize 8500 11000 Letter 8500 14000 Legal 7250 10500 Exec 11000 17000 B 8262 11692 A4 5846 8262 A5 7000 9875 B5 11692 16524 A3 if PNPID HEWLETT PACKARDHP_25A854 PNPSTR MFG HEWLETT PACKARD MDL HP 2500C CLS PRINTER CMD PCL MLC PML POSTSCRIPT Supported PaperSize 8500 11000 Letter 8500 14000 Legal 7250 10500 Exec 11000 17000 B 8262 11692 AS 5846 8262 AS 7000 9875 BS 11692 16524 A3 e OO SE SOR EE ESE SO NEE LOR SES OER SEE CAS SSE AO AOE ELSE OR SENSEI SO ES OR SOS COS SEUSS COR SECIS ORS OP oe Using SAMBA PNPCMD POSTSCRIPT a i Neg a ap ep ep ga Sth a er i a eT et a agin rier feast The following macros are expanded for each filter command line d Device m PnP manufacture model id n Printer name s Spooldir name A real SS A AA A AE A A E FT A TS AAA A e E O amen FileVersion 2 You need to have an environment variable DEVICE_URI set for smbspool to access the SAMB
389. ur device You can search the manufacturer s website for information or use the vendor and device IDs to cross reference with usr include hw pci_devices h You can also search http www pcidatabase com Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited CD ROMs and DVDs CD ROMs and DVDs You usually attach CD and DVD drives to a SCSI or EIDE ATA bus which driver you use depends on the bus Ensure that the hardware is set up correctly and that the BIOS detects the hardware properly If you attached the drive to an EIDE bus simply use the devb eide driver If the drive is on a SCSI bus you need to determine the proper driver for your SCSI interface see Hard disks p 233 below By default the drivers load the cam cdrom so shared object which provides a common access method for CD ROM devices Depending on how you start the driver it also loads one of the following e fs cd so support for CD ROMs ISO 9660 filesystems e fs udf so support for CD ROMs ISO 9660 filesystems and DVD ROMs Universal Disk Format filesystems We ve deprecated fs cd so in favor of fs udf so CD ROM and DVD ROM devices both appear in the dev directory as dev cdx where x is the number of the drive starting at O Simply mount the drive using the mount utility specifying cd or udf as the type of filesystem For example mount t cd dev cd0 fs cdrom mount t udf dev cd0 fs dvdrom You don t need to remo
390. user you have to specify the full path usr sbin nicinfo Now figure out the diagnostic information from the following output end AMD PCNET 32 Ethernet Controller Physical Node ID 0010100100404 sear enas cae 000C29 DD3528 Current Physical Node ID c cciccceuciwcecius 000C29 DD3528 Current Operation Rate 1 eee ee eee ee eens 10 00 Mb s ACtive Tntertace Type ira a Sak aes UTP Maximum Transmittable data Unit c ccoooooooss 1514 Maximum Receivable data Unit occcooooooooos 1514 Hardware Interrupt siriene bi daeta 0804045 0x9 I O APELEULES esrrsrrerr rr 0x1080 Oxl1l0ff Memory Aperture oooooooononorormonorrn s 0x0 Promiscuous Mode can AAA AAA A AA Off Multicast Support robo o 4 Be Enabled Packets Transmitted ON sisscccss0csea eran sas 588 Bytes Transmitted OR evi cnsnenes doe ane a ese 10 37 21 Memory Allocation Failures on Transmit 0 Packets Received OK scicccccrccnccncc cece ces 11639 Bytes Received OK icincsccaad aria 934712 Memory Allocation Failures on Receive 0 Single Collisions on Transmit mesa arcaicas 0 Deferred Transi bS eee 0 Late Collision on Transmit rrors een 0 Transmits aborted excessive collisions 0 Transmite UNGETTUAS 6405555445555 R KERR 0 No Carri r on Transmit eee e dieso eius 0 Receive Alignment errorS ooooomoomoooo o 0 Received packets with CRC errors 0 Packets Dropped on Fecelve 2 66 ete eice eee ees 0
391. ust have shtml as its file extension You can use SSI tags to interact with a data server Syntax for SSI Commands Here are some examples of SSI commands that you can use in your scripts lt echo var DATE_LOCAL gt Display the time and date lt techo var DATE_GMT gt Display the time and date using Greenwich Mean Time lt techo var REMOTE_ADDR gt Display the visitor s IP address lt echo var HTTP_USER_AGENT gt Display the visitor s browser information lt config timefmt SA B d Sy gt This file last mod ified lt echo vars LAST MODIFIED gt Display the date the page was last modified Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 271 Setting Up an Embedded Web Server lt include virtual myfile shtml gt Include the file myfile shtml as inline HTML in the web page lt exec cgi counter pl gt Execute the CGI script counter pl and put the output on the web page lt config cmdecho on gt lt exec cmd cd tmp 1s gt Display the contents of the tmp directory on the web page Data server method You can also handle dynamic HTML by using a data server process ds A data server lets multiple threads share data without regard for process boundaries Since the embedded web server supports SSI we ve extended this support by adding the ability to talk to the data server Now you can have a pro
392. utility For example dd if dev fd0 of floppy img Create a directory with all the needed binaries in the layout that you want in your CD ROM ISO image For example mkdir iso_image cp Rc bin iso_image bin cp Rc etc iso_image etc Make sure that the isocatalog Is in usr share cdburning on the system Create the ISO image using mkisofs making sure to specify the catalog with the c option For example mkisofs 1 f r joliet quiet V My Label b floppy img c usr share cdburning isocatalog o my_iso_image iso Burn the ISO image to a CD Removable media Other forms of removable media are also useful for backing up data QNX Neutrino supports LS 120 magnetic optical MO drives internal ZIP drives and USB mass storage devices Each has its own benefits and weaknesses it s up to you to determine which form of media is best for backing up your data For instructions on how to install this hardware see the Connecting Hardware p 229 chapter in this guide Backing up physical hard disks You can make identical images of hard drives under QNX Neutrino using simple utilities This is called making a raw copy of the drive D The instructions here are for copying from one hard disk to another of identical properties size make model To make a copy of a drive that differs in size and make contact technical support for the ONX_Drive_Copy utility If you have an identical hard drive manu
393. v tty A virtual device owned by the process manager procnto that resolves to the controlling terminal device associated with the session of any process that opens the file This is useful for programs that may have closed their standard input standard output or standard error and later wish to write to the terminal device dev tty p zP T 0 9a f The slave side of the corresponding dev pt y p zP T 0 9a f file The program being controlled typically uses one of these files for its standard input standard output and standard error dev zero Supplies an endless stream of bytes having a value of zero Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 89 Working with Files etca The etc directory contains host specific system files and programs used for administration and configuration These files include etc autoconnect Automatic TCP IP connection configuration script See etc autoconnect in the Utilities Reference etc bootptab Network boot protocol server configuration file See etc bootptab in the Utilities Reference etc config A directory that contains system configuration files such as the ttys file that tinit uses to configure terminal devices etc default A directory that contains default configuration files primarily for TCP IP facilities etc dhcpd conf Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol configuration see etc dhcpd conf in the Utilities Reference etc ftpd conf Con
394. var directory contains variable data files including cache files lock files log files and the dumps subdirectory var dumps The directory where dumper saves any dumps that result when a program terminates abnormally 96 Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited File ownership and permissions File ownership and permissions Each file and directory belongs to a specific user ID and group ID and has a set of permissions also referred to as modes associated with it You can use these utilities to control ownership and permissions Specify the permissions for a file or directory Change the owner and optionally the group for a file or directory Change the group for a file or directory For details see the Utilities Reference You can change the permissions and ownership for a file or directory only if you re its owner or you re logged in as root If you want to change both the D permissions and the ownership change the permissions first Once you ve assigned the ownership to another user you can t change the permissions Permissions are divided into these categories u Permissions for the user i e the owner g Permissions for the group o Permissions for others e everyone who isn t in the group Each set of permissions includes r Read permission wW Write permission x Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 97 Working with Files Setuid and setgid 9
395. vicio ri 0 Late Collision on Transmit exrors oni eyes os 0 Transmits aborted excessive collisions 0 Transmits aborted excessive deferrals 0 Transmit Underruns sessions odes da 0 No Carrier on Transmit sircecriseriscriseris 0 Jabber dabected mesa tiner ketay 0 Receive Alignment errors ooooocmoooo ooo 0 Received packets with CRC errors 0 Packets Dropped on receive suecirr pisas 0 Ethernet Headers out of range 0 Oversized Packets received 5 scsi hisses wees 0 Frames with Dribble Bits conmigo deere gad 0 Total Frames experiencing Collision s 0 The output from nicinfo depends on what the driver supports not all fields are included for all drivers However the output always includes information about the bytes and packets that were transmitted and received The categories shown in the above example are described below When dealing with a network problem start with these e Physical Node ID p 256 e Hardware Interrupt p 258 e I O Aperture p 258 e Packets Transmitted OK p 259 e Total Packets Transmitted Bad p 259 e Packets Received OK p 260 e Received packets with CRC errors p 263 Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 255 Connecting Hardware 256 Physical Node ID The physical node ID is also known as the Media Access Control MAC address This value is unique to every network card although some models do let you assign your
396. with lpr Printing with 1pr The 1pr line printer system supports e multiple printers e multiple spooling queues e both local and remote printers e printers attached via serial lines that require line initialization e g baud rate To print a file using the line printer system you need e a user interface and a method of organizing and preparing print jobs e spooling directories somewhere to store files waiting to be printed e away of preventing unauthorized access e for remote printing a network manager capable of delivering the files to be printed e some knowledge about the printer being used You need to log in as root to set up the lpr system User interface The line printer system consists mainly of the following files and commands etc printcap I root 7 only Ipre mm ll a Any user Figure 6 Printing with the 1pr utilities lpd Printer daemon that does all the real work lpr Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited 205 Printing 206 1pd printer daemon lpr start a print job Program to enter a job in a printer queue lprq Spooling queue examination program lprrm Program to delete jobs from a queue lpre Program to administer printers and spooling queues only root can use this utility etc printcap A master database that describes printers directly attached to a machine and printers accessible across a network It describes the av
397. x device driver Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited A process that allows the OS and application programs to make use of the underlying hardware in a generic way e g a disk drive a network interface Unlike OSs that require device drivers to be tightly bound into the OS itself device drivers for QNX Neutrino are standard processes that can be started and stopped dynamically As a result adding device drivers doesn t affect any other part of the OS drivers can be developed and debugged like any other application Also device drivers are in their own protected address space so a bug in a device driver won t cause the entire OS to shut down 365 Glossary 366 DNS Domain Name Service an Internet protocol used to convert ASCII domain names into IP addresses In QNX Neutrino native networking dns is one of Qnet s builtin resolvers edge sensitive One of two ways in which a PIC Programmable Interrupt Controller can be programmed to respond to interrupts In edge sensitive mode the interrupt is noticed upon a transition to from the rising falling edge of a pulse Contrast evel sensitive edited mode See canonical mode EPROM Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory a memory technology that allows the device to be programmed typically with higher than operating voltages e g 12V with the characteristic that any bit or bits may be individually programmed from a 1 state to a 0 state Cha
398. x86 PIII 725 machine with a UDMA 4 EIDE disk using the QNX 4 filesystem The table lists the rates in megabytes per seconds for writing and reading a 256 MB file using file descriptors and standard I O Record size FD write FD read Stdio write Stdio read 326 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Filesystems and block I O devb drivers Record size FD write FD read Stdio write Stdio read Notice how the read access is very sensitive to the record size this is because each read maps to an _IO_READ message and is basically a context switch and message pass to the filesystem when only small amounts of data are transferred each time the OS overhead becomes significant Since standard I O access using fread uses a 1 KB internal buffer the number of _IO_READ messages remains constant regardless of the user record size and the throughput resembles that of the file descriptor 1 KB access in all cases with slight degradation at smaller record sizes due to the increased number of 1ibc calls made Thus you should consider the anticipated file access patterns when you choose from these I O paradigms Pregrowing a file This example illustrates the effect of pregrowing a data file on an x86 PIII 725 machine with a UDMA 4 EIDE disk using the QNX 4 filesystem The table shows the times in milliseconds required to create and write a 256 MB file in 8 KB records Scenario Creation Write Total write
399. xplicitly when fsync is called for any file in the Power Safe filesystem e explicitly when switching to read only mode with mount ur e periodically from the timer specified to the snapshot option to the mount command the default is 10 seconds You can disable snapshots on a filesystem at a global or local level When disabled a new superblock isn t written and an attempt to make a snapshot fails with an errno 0 EAGAIN or silently for the sync or timer cases If snapshots are still disabled when the filesystem is unmounted implicitly or at a power failure any pending modifications are discarded lost Snapshots are also permanently disabled automatically after an unrecoverable error that would result in an inconsistent filesystem An example is running out of memory for caching bitmap modifications or a disk I O error while writing a snapshot In this case the filesystem is forced to be read only and the current and all future snapshot processing is omitted the aim being to ensure that the last stable snapshot remains undisturbed and available for reloading at the next mount startup i e the filesystem always has a guaranteed stable state even if slightly stale This is only for certain serious error situations and generally shouldn t happen Manually disabling snapshots can be used to encapsulate a higher level sequence of operations that must either all succeed or none occur e g should power be lost dur
400. y that the etc printcap file or the protection modes of the files are incorrect Files may also be inaccessible if people bypass the lpr program In addition to messages generated by 1pd any of the filters that 1pa spawns may log messages to the syslog file or to the error log file the file specified in the 1 entry in etc printcap If you want to debug problems run syslogd Troubleshooting remote printing problems If the file you send doesn t print you may get an error message from one of the 1p print utilities if you don t get an error message there are some other things that you should check If you do get an error message from one of the 1p print utilities see Understanding lpr error messages p 224 Otherwise check the following e Although the spawned 1pa program creates spooler subdirectories as required to hold print jobs you must create the main spooling directory yourself make sure this directory default usr spool output 1pd exists e Verify the contents of the etc printcap on each node e If 1pd isn t already running but you can t start it check to see if the lock file usr spool output lpd lock exists If this file exists when 1pd isn t running e g after a power failure or system crash remove it e Make sure that the etc hosts 1lpa on the printing node contains the name of the sending node 226 Copyright o 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Troubleshooting e Make sure that io pkt is
401. you specify the ram nodinit option By default io b1k so allocates 15 of system RAM for cache The devb ram system looks like a disk drive to io b1k so so it doesn t know that the cache is unnecessary You should use the blk cache 512k option to reduce the cache size to the minimum A better way of creating a RAM disk is to use the blk ramdisk option which creates an internal RAM disk that io b1k so does know is RAM and doesn t need to be copied via cache It uses a 4 KB sector size If you already have any other devb driver running then you can simply piggyback the RAM disk on it by adding for example blk ramdisk 10m to the invocation of that devb driver If you really want a separate devb ram then it can be the container for an internal RAM disk too with an invocation like this devb ram disk name ram ram capacity 0 nodinit blk ramdisk 10m cache 0 vnode 256 Ignore the O sized dev ram1 that devb ram creates and use the dev ram0 which is from io b1k so You need to manually dinit it and mount it first For example dinit dev ram0 mount tqnx4 dev ram0 This approach has superior performance because it eliminates the memory to memory copies of devb ram it bypasses cache lookups and the 4 KB sectors have smaller overheads 240 Copyright 2014 QNX Software Systems Limited Audio cards Audio cards Audio drivers in QNX Neutrino are very simple to initialize When you use io audio you
402. you want just type in the new password and then confirm it If you don t wish to change the user s password press Ctrl C to terminate the passwd utility without changing anything If the user name isn t already registered passwd prompts you for account information such as the user s group list home directory and login shell The etc default passwd configuration file specifies the rules that determine the defaults for new accounts For more information see the description of this file in the documentation for passwd The prompts include User id default Specify the numeric user ID for the new user By default no two users may share a common user ID because applications won t be able to determine the user name that corresponds to that user ID Group id default Choose a numeric group ID that the user will belong to after initially logging in The passwd utility doesn t add the new user to the group s entry in Lal the etc group file you need to do that manually using a text Y editor See Defining Groups p 44 for more details Real name Enter the user s real name The real name isn t widely used by system utilities but may be used by applications such as email Home directory home username Enter the pathname of the user s home directory usually home username The passwd utility automatically creates the directory you specify If the directory already exists passwd by default prompts you
403. ysically accessible by others be sure to choose a password that will secure your account from unauthorized use You should choose passwords that e are more than 5 characters long e consist of multiple words or numbers and include punctuation or white space e you haven t used on other systems many systems and websites in particular don t store and communicate passwords in encrypted form this lets people who gain access to those systems see your password in plain text e incorporate both uppercase and lowercase letters e don t contain words phrases or numbers that other people can guess e g avoid the names of family members and pets license plate numbers and birthdays For more information on system security see Securing Your System p 307 Forgot your password If you forget your password ask the system administrator root user to assign a new password to your account Only root can do this In general no one can retrieve your old password from the etc shadow file If your password is short or a single word your system administrator or a hacker can easily figure it out but you re better off with a new password If you re the system administrator and you ve forgotten the password for root you need to find an alternate way to access the etc passwd and etc shadow files in order to reset the root password Some possible ways to do this are e Boot the system from another disk or device where you can log in as roo
404. ystem The chkfsys utility e checks the directory structure of an entire disk partition reports any inconsistencies and fixes them if possible e verifies overall disk block allocation e writes a new bitmap upon your approval The chkfsys utility assumes that the root block is valid If the root block isn t valid chkfsys complains and gives up you ll need to try restoring the root block with the dinit utility dcheck The dcheck utility checks for bad blocks on a disk by attempting to read every block on the drive When you specify the m option dcheck removes any bad blocks from the disk allocation bitmap bitmap If it finds the file bad_b1ks dcheck updates the bitmap and recreates the bad_blks file You can run dcheck a few times to increase your chances of recognizing bad blocks and adding them to the bad_blks file zap The zap utility lets root remove files or directories from the filesystem without returning the used blocks to the free list You might do this for example if the directory entry is damaged or if two files occupy the same space on the disk an error Recovering a zapped file If you zapped a file in error it s sometimes possible to recover the zapped file using the zap utility with the u option immediately after the deletion You can recover a zapped file using zap under these conditions e the directory entry for that now deleted file must not be reused e the disk blocks previously use

QNX® Neutrino® RTOS:User's Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

QNX&reg; Neutrino&reg; RTOS:User's Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

QNX® Neutrino® RTOS:User's Guide